JP2021094314A - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To realize a suitable performance for ensuring sufficient entry of game balls into a start pocket during time-shortening.SOLUTION: Performance determination means displays an object for suggesting the number of retained balls as a second lottery value acquired with entry of game balls into the second start pocket 12 as an opportunity on a performance display device 60 in an easy-ball-entry state in which ball entry easiness into the second start pocket 12 is increased. The performance determination means displays the object in a predetermined mode regardless of the actual number of retained balls of the second lottery value as an initial display mode of the object. The performance determination means displays the object in a specific mode differing from the predetermined mode when the reservation upper-limit number of game balls of the second lottery value enter the second start pocket 12 from a state in which the object is displayed in the predetermined mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 49

Description

The present invention relates to a ball game machine having a game area in which a game ball is launched.

Conventionally, among various types of ball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machine has a plurality of symbols changed in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided in the substantially center of the game board. Display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display", etc.). This gaming machine shifts to a special game called a big hit, in which more prize balls can be obtained than in a normal game when the combination of symbols when the movement of symbols in a plurality of rows is stopped becomes a specific mode. Known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed, but also the variable display time is usually set in a state where one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is obtained, as in a state called a so-called reach screen. The production is designed to raise the expectations of the player, such as making it longer than that. In addition, the player's expectation is raised by the effect of using characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display and the advance notice effect that suggests the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

In recent years, the need to develop models that are not tied to any type has been recognized in order to further improve game playability. For example, pachinko gaming machines that mix multiple gaming machines of the same type or mix different types of gaming machines. Development is also underway. In addition, when a small hit occurs, the game ball is passed through a specific area (V zone) in the variable ball entry device to promote the game from "small hit" to "big hit", and a new special game (hereinafter, "" A gaming machine that generates a "small hit development big hit" or "small hit V") has also been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-230714 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-29308

In order to increase the number of balls ejected in a gaming machine equipped with a small hit V, it is necessary to enter the ball into the starting port in a short time to obtain a small hit. On the other hand, the period of time reduction (number of fluctuations in time reduction) is often set in a relatively short period of time.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to realize a suitable effect for ensuring sufficient entry into the starting port during a short time.

In order to solve the above problems, the ball game machine of a certain aspect of the present invention has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed, a first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and a predetermined position in the gaming area. The second starting port and the first starting port, which are provided in the above and have a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state. The winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing judgment based on the first lottery value acquired with the above or the second lottery value acquired with the entry into the second starting port, the first lottery value and the second lottery. Hold control means for holding the value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the hit / fail judgment, the symbol display device for displaying the result of the hit / fail judgment in a variable manner, and the hit / fail judgment. When the symbol indicating that the result is a hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, the effect display device for displaying the effect, and the effect display. It is provided with an effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the device. The gaming state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the starting port in the normal game includes a normal state and a state in which the ease of entering the ball into the starting port is higher than the normal state. The effect determining means displays an object suggesting the reserved number of the second lottery value in the easy-to-enter state, and the effect determining means displays the object as an initial display mode regardless of the actual reserved number of the second lottery value. The object is displayed in a predetermined mode, and when a predetermined number of balls are inserted into the second starting port from the state in which the object is displayed in the predetermined mode, the object is displayed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode.

It should be noted that any combination of the above components, and those in which the components and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, and the like are also used. , Is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the ball game machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a suitable effect for ensuring sufficient entry into the starting port during a short time.

It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the back side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the functional block of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of a main board. It is a figure which shows typically the hit / fail judgment table. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the winning / failing lottery value for each set value. It is a figure which shows typically the symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the advance hit / fail judgment table referred to in the advance hit / miss judgment. It is a figure which shows typically the advance hit / fail judgment table corresponding to a game setting. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a sub-board. It is a figure which shows the outline of the mobile cooperation system typically. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of a main board and a sub board schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of an effect control device schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing of the main board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S120 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing of the sub-board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the command is received from the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for various device control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the decorative pattern variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small hit game. It is a perspective view which shows the basic structure on the outer surface of a slot machine. It is a rear view of the housing door part exposed when the housing door part is opened. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the housing base part exposed when the housing door part is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a functional block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a basic game in a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of the main control unit and the sub-control unit schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of the effect display control part schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows the main program control processing of the main control device in a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control unit. It is a figure which shows the main game flow of the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows the breakdown of the big hit in the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows a plurality of kinds of fluctuation pattern modes. It is a perspective view of the start port unit. It is a right side view of a start port unit. It is sectional drawing of the start port unit. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance production in a normal time. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance production in the time saving game. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Example. It is an external perspective view which shows the structure of the grand prize opening schematicly. It is a figure which shows schematic the internal structure of the grand prize opening. It is a figure which shows the example of the production during a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the display timing of a suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect following FIG. 54. It is a figure which shows the example of the big hit end demonstration production. It is a time chart about the big hit end demo production. It is a figure which shows the example of the hold change lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the hold change lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the special game end screen. It is a figure which shows the example of the trophy lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the trophy lottery table of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the trophy lottery table of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the trophy lottery table of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the special game end screen of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance production (common for hit and miss) in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance production (off) in the 5th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance production (hit) in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance production (per revival) in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect screen which concerns on the explanatory effect. It is a figure which shows the flow of the special production in the 1st section of a special production period. It is a figure which shows the flow of the special production in the 2nd section of a special production period. It is a figure which shows the game flow of the pachinko game machine of 6th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of the lightning strike hold change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of a hold change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the seven-star hold change production. It is a figure which shows the example of the end demon hold change production. It is a timing chart of the pending change effect. It is a figure which shows the lottery route of a hold change production. It is a figure which shows the example of the child lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the grandchild lottery table. It is a figure which shows the example of the over prize production. It is a figure which shows the example of the over prize production decision table. It is a figure which shows the kind of a special variation pattern table.

(Prerequisite technology)
FIG. 1 shows a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball plate 105, a lower ball plate 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, an effect button 109, and a cross key 110. Includes decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening portion and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it should be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate 105 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, extracting the game balls from the lower ball plate 106, and the like. The lower ball plate 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds according to the game state and the effect are output by means for controlling the effect. Most of the resin members constituting the appearance of the door 104 are translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent member. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc. by means for controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on the game area 81 partitioned by the rail 82. , Out port 34, effect display device 60, center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central portion of the game area 81 and the upper portion and the right portion thereof, and is a flow path of the game ball and the effect display device. It has 60 functions such as protection and decoration. A stage 65 on which the inflowing game ball rolls is formed at the lower part of the center decoration 64, and the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction of entering the first starting port 11 and the first starting port 11 depending on the rolling method. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. At the upper part of the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 that is driven according to the content of the effect and performs an effect is provided. In the game area 81, a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path of the game ball are installed. In this specification, "winning ball", "winning prize", and "falling in" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning opening and each entry opening may be composed of a "passing opening" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") of a type through which a game ball passes, and the "entry ball" may be formed. "Prize," "fall," and "pass" may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that the ball can be aimed at one side depending on the launch strength of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided at a substantially central lower portion in the game area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11. Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, while right-handed. That is, when the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow to the right passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can enter the second starting port 12 or is easy to enter, but cannot enter the first starting port 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, normally, the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is covered with the first starting port 11 to prevent the inflow of the game ball. Therefore, unless the expanding mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened, the second starting port 12 is opened. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball at 12. The winning / failing lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is executed every time a ball is entered into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. To.

The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that it is possible to strike a target depending on the firing strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that it is difficult for a game ball aiming at one of them to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when it is left-handed, that is, when it is aimed to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64 and fired relatively weakly. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where it is possible to enter the ball or it is easy to enter the ball when the ball is hit right-handed, that is, when the ball is launched relatively strongly aiming at flowing into the right passage of the center decoration 64.

The first starting port 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting winning detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) which is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Be prepared. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The first operating port 31 is provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81 and includes the first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operation port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operating port 32 is provided at a position on the right side of the game area 81 and includes the second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The passage of the game ball through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an open lottery to determine whether or not to expand the ordinary electric accessory 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol, which is a symbol showing the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called "ordinary symbol lottery". After a predetermined time has passed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stops. When the normal symbol stops at the hit symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of entering the second starting port 12 is increased. As a modification, the number of operating ports may be one, and the game area 81 may be provided at a position on the left side.

Each of the three general winning openings 33 includes a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20. The grand prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the grand prize opening 20, and generates the grand prize opening winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that opens as a "big hit" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined mode. The big winning opening 20 is provided at a position on the upper right side of the out opening 34. As a modified example, another large winning opening may be provided at the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port through which a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports is discharged, and includes an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball that is discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out opening 34 is provided at the lowermost center portion of the game area 81 so that all the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be provided side by side while securing a game ball passage having a sufficient width to prevent the out port 34 from being clogged with balls.

A symbol display unit 120 is arranged below the outside of the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display unit 41, a second special symbol display unit 42, a first special symbol hold display unit 71, a second special symbol hold display unit 72, a normal symbol display unit 45, and a normal symbol. Each display unit such as a hold display unit 75, a game status display unit 76, and an abnormality notification unit 77 is provided. Specifically, the first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol The variation of 51 and the second special symbol 52 is displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and is a special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and is a special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are 8-segment LEDs composed of, for example, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 8 segments of 1 segment representing a "dot". It is a display device of. With an 8-segment LED, a numerical value equivalent to 8 bits can be expressed by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 represented by the combination of segments do not necessarily form the body of letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by the combination of each segment. .. These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42, or a predetermined display (for example, "-") and non-display (for example, all lights are turned off) are displayed. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after being repeated for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 use LED dot arrays that are not 8-segment LEDs, and a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second are used depending on the combination of lighting patterns and lighting colors. The special symbol 52 may be expressed.

Further, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to have a directing role, in the prerequisite technology, the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display at the lower left of the game area 81 are displayed. The unit 42 displays the image in an inconspicuous size. However, when adopting a method of expressing the special symbol itself without using a decorative symbol by giving it a directing role, the special symbol is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to be made to.

A first special symbol holding display unit 71 is provided above the first special symbol display unit 41 as a holding lamp for special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first game, and a second special symbol display unit 42 is provided above the second special symbol display unit 42. The second special symbol hold display unit 72 is provided as a hold lamp for the special symbol change corresponding to the game of. The first special figure reservation display unit 71 is composed of two lamps, and the number of winning / failing lottery values held in the first game is determined by the number of lighting or blinking (hereinafter, the number of holdings of winning / failing lottery values). (Simply also called "holding number") is displayed. The number of holds on the first special figure hold display unit 71 is the number (number) of acquisitions of lottery values based on winning a prize in the first start port 11 while the first special symbol 51 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The second special figure hold display unit 72 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of holdes in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of holds in the second special figure hold display unit 72 is the number of times (number) of lottery values obtained based on winning a prize in the second start port 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The number of hold of the winning / failing lottery value is also displayed at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 60 in a form represented by the number of lighting of the hold lamp image.

A normal symbol display unit 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120. For convenience, the ordinary symbol display unit 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the ordinary symbol is expressed by the lighting combination thereof. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by blinking the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, and finally, the stop symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. Is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the stop symbol of disconnection, turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first hitting mode, and the first The second hit mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display unit 45, a normal symbol hold display unit 75 is provided as a hold lamp for changing the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold display unit 75 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of hold of normal symbol fluctuations according to the number of lamps lit or the number of blinks. The number of reserved normal symbol changes is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during the changing of the normal symbol, and the number of normal symbol lottery for which the normal symbol change has not yet been executed. Is shown.

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game status display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a display corresponding to a game state such as a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game status is notified by turning on the lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and turning off when the normal state is in the normal state, and the 7-segment LED is displayed during the execution of the special game. Displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies a part of the abnormality of the gaming machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of abnormality. In addition, these display units may not be centrally arranged in the symbol display unit 120, and each display unit may be individually configured, or may be divided into a plurality of display devices which are appropriately arranged. Further, the notification of the gaming state such as the specific gaming state may be configured to be performed only for a predetermined period such as a certain time after returning from the power failure.

At the substantially center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative symbol 61 linked to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is provided. Display the fluctuation of the production image including. Hereinafter, such a display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display" or the like.

The effect display device 60 is a display device including a liquid crystal display that variablely displays the decorative symbol 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbol 61 is a symbol for visually producing the determination result display of the lottery shown by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. As the decorative symbol 61, the effect display device 60 displays, for example, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of symbols imitating a game of a slot machine are varied in a central region of the screen. In the prerequisite technique, symbols composed of numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three columns and varied, and a hit or miss is indicated by a combination of three symbols that are finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns, and these numbers, letters, and symbols are common to all symbols. It may be configured by adding a different pattern to each and integrating them. This pattern is a pattern on which a motif related to the theme of decoration or production set in the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and may be, for example, a pattern on which a character of a person or an animal is drawn. The decorative design 61 is switched between the case where the design including the design is integrally displayed and the case where the design is separated and only the numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the development of the effect. It may be configured to be. In the background of the variable display of the decorative symbol 61, a moving image having a directing effect related to the theme of the decoration or effect set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the variation of the symbol.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, but the width of the display area may be about half the width of the game area, or a large size exceeding half. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width sufficient for one game ball to pass through, and if the player launches the so-called "right-handed" with the maximum strength, the right-hand passage will almost certainly occur. The game ball can be passed through, and it can be distinguished from the so-called "left-handed". The effect display device 60 is not limited to the case where it is composed of a single display device, but may be composed of a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of a plurality of displays, displays of different sizes such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal may be combined, the sub liquid crystal may be arranged at a position adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, for example, a firing handle. It may be installed in the vicinity of (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). When installed in the vicinity of the launch handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that can be operated and input by the player. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. ..

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the effect content, and the effect content or the like is changed according to the pressing mode. The effect button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are oriented substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be projected. The rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 function as a lever 112 in a state of projecting to the outside, and the player can hold the effect button 109 and pull the lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the outer wall surface on the left side of the upper ball plate 105.

The method of gaming and the flow of control performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 105 are guided one by one to the rail 82 and launched to the game area 81 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle. .. When the player fixes the rotation position of the launch handle 107 by hand, the launch of the game ball is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, and the like, and falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting. When the game ball falls into each of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 20, the winning ball according to the type of the winning opening is the upper ball plate 105 or the lower. It is paid out to the ball plate 106. The game balls that fall into each winning opening such as the general winning opening 33 are treated as safe balls, and the game balls that fall into the out opening 34 are treated as out balls. The specification may be such that the discharge of the safe sphere is excluded from the detection by the out detection device 39, or the safe sphere is also guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all the discharge is detected by the out detection device 39. May be. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the guide of the safe ball and the detection of the safe ball by the out detection device 39 are not performed, and the total of the number of detected balls of the safe ball added to the number of detected balls of the out ball is used as the number of discharged balls.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45, and is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode or the second hit mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded based on the hit mode of the stopped and displayed symbol and the game state when the stop is displayed. .. That is, when the gaming state when the symbol is stopped is the normal gaming state and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Further, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode in the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), the normal symbol is in the second hit mode in the normal state and the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state). When the stop display is displayed, a long opening for 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set so as to differ depending on the game state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning symbol of the first winning mode is selected) is 1 /. 3. The execution probability of long opening (probability of selecting the hit symbol of the second hit mode) is set to 2/3. Further, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, the ball entry easy state), the normal symbol is hit with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first hit mode and the second hit mode is the same as that in the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed regardless of the winning mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (the opening time when the stop is displayed in the first hit mode is 0). The ease of entering the second starting port 12 is improved by (extending from .1 second to 6.0 seconds). The function of extending the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (long opening) is sometimes called "opening extension".

As described above, by setting the probability of long opening to be higher than the probability of short opening in the normal state, long opening is executed at a constant rate even in the normal state when the normal symbol is won. .. As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, the specification may have the same probability of both, or the specification may always be short opening. Good. Further, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, the ease of entering the second starting port 12 may be enhanced by using three functions including a function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In that case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. The probability of winning the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric accessory 90 may be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 expands, it may be notified in advance to that effect, the hold of the normal symbol change may be pre-read and notified before the start of the change of the normal symbol, or the normal symbol may be notified. It may be notified during the fluctuation.

As a modification of the opening mode when the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is increased to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may be an embodiment. Further, a plurality of combinations of the opening time and the number of opening times may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, when the 2-second opening is performed 3 times, the total opening time is the same as when the 6-second opening is performed once, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former player enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening adjusts the hitting direction to the second starting port 12 from that point. It can be said that the chance is long. Further, it may be configured so that there are a plurality of hit types of ordinary symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism may be different depending on the hit types. For example, when the normal symbol is the first hit, the 0.1 second opening is set once in the normal state, the 1 second opening is set three times in the easy-to-enter state, and the second hit is the normal state. Then, the 6-second opening may be performed once, and the 2-second opening may be performed twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42, and the effect display device 60. , And the decorative symbol 61 are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a variable pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. The decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to a variable effect pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns and fluctuation production patterns are prepared, and each has various fluctuation times, long and short. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variablely displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to the variation effect pattern having the same variation time. In the variation pattern, the variation display time is set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 occurs when the variation display time elapses. It will be stopped. Hereinafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 displayed according to the variation effect pattern will be illustrated, and the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. Details of the variation pattern and the method of determining the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61, first, when the variation starts, the symbols are varied in all three rows like the reel rotation of the slot machine, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped one by one in the final stop mode. The symbol combination as is displayed. As an operation when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190 is stopped, it may be controlled to stop a plurality of rows at the same time instead of one row at a time so that the effect display other than the decorative symbol is noticed during the variable display, or the effect display other than the decorative symbol may be noticed in a shorter fluctuation time. It may be possible to display the symbol variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190, it is controlled so as to delay the start of the fluctuation of some columns according to the subsequent development (type of effect pattern, etc.) in the fluctuation to produce a feeling of expectation. You may do it.

Next, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The variable effect pattern includes a normal off-effect pattern, a reach-out effect pattern, and a reach jackpot effect pattern. The normal out-of-order effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a normal out-of-order symbol combination. The out-of-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a combination of out-of-reach symbols through a reach state, which is a state in which one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is made. The reach jackpot effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying the symbol combination of the jackpot after the reach state. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various fluctuation times, long and short, and a reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ". The normal out-of-reach effect pattern, the reach out-of-reach effect pattern, and the reach jackpot effect pattern are classified into a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state, respectively. However, even in the normal state, if there is a second symbol variation corresponding to the entry of the ball into the second starting port 12, the probability that the jackpot will be accompanied by a probability change or the probability that the number of unit games of the special game will increase is the first. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first fluctuation corresponding to the entry of the ball into the 1 start port 11, a pattern for chance effect indicating that the chance is a relatively advantageous jackpot may be used. In the prerequisite technique, the time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since the time saving is involved in the probability changing state, the time saving pattern is also used in the probability changing state. However, in the modified example, the specification may be such that a pattern for probabilistic change different from that for time saving is used in the probable change state. Alternatively, a specification that uses a common pattern for time saving and probability variation may be used, or a specification that uses a probability variation pattern in the probability variation state without using the time reduction pattern in particular may be used.

When the number of hold of the winning / failing lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of a loss is shortened than usual in order to improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "shortening variation"). Similarly, when the number of winning / failing lottery pending is 4, the symbol fluctuation time in the case of losing is further shortened as compared with the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "ultra-shortening fluctuation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the stop mode showing a big hit after the above-mentioned symbol variation, it is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is started. The stop mode of the decorative symbol 61 showing the jackpot is, for example, a combination mode in which the types of the three symbols match.

There are two types of special games, normal special games and shortened special games, and there is a big difference in the profits from the winning prize balls. Usually, the special game is started by displaying the production screen called the start demo time. After the screen display of the start demo time, the big winning opening 20 is opened, and the opening is continued for about 30 seconds, or is temporarily closed after 9 or more game balls have fallen. The process from opening to closing of the large winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be a case where a plurality of short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the large winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 16 times, the special game is usually ended by the display of the effect screen called the end demo time. In normal special games, you can expect enough balls to enter 9 or more balls per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (also called "balls") by 16 unit games, which is a big profit. Is obtained. A special game in which 16 unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "16R jackpot", and a special game in which four unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 16 times, in some unit games, the unit game is substantially repeated a small number of times by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) than usual. It is also possible to realize a normal special game similar to the one (sometimes referred to as a "substantial nR jackpot").

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demo time and the end demo time are short or almost nonexistent (0.1 seconds, etc.), and the large winning opening 20 is opened for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the large winning opening 20 is only repeated twice for a very short time, it is almost impossible to enter the large winning opening 20, and the number of balls is substantially equal to zero. is there. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as a "2R jackpot". Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, the shortened special game can be realized by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all the unit games.

Further, when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the predetermined small hit mode after the above-mentioned symbol variation, the small hit game composed of one unit game. The opening and closing operation of the grand prize opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting the small hit game, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds, and the operation mode is similar to the 2R big hit in appearance.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop symbol at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), the probability change, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the end of the special game. During the probability change, a winning / losing lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game may occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery is a specific big hit, that is, a big hit accompanied by a probability change is not clearly shown from the appearance, and a latent probability change state that is not explicitly notified as a decorative pattern or production content may be used. In that case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the change is probable or non-probable even during the probable change. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be clearly shown to the effect display device 60 whether it is a probable change or a non-probable change.

In the normal game after the special game is completed, the easy entry state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed so that the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90 is extended. Since the number of hits of the normal symbol per fixed time can be increased and the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12 is also increased, it is highly possible that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it is possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls held or gradually increasing the number of balls held.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific game states, the so-called time reduction, in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shorter than that in the normal state, is further executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 fluctuations are displayed, but reaches the fluctuation number. If a big hit occurs before, the time reduction will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened in the shortened time, until a big hit occurs as compared with the case where the symbol fluctuates with the normal fluctuation time. The time can be shortened, and the ease of obtaining a big hit can be relatively increased. In the modified example, the specification may be such that the time reduction of the special symbol is not carried out in the state where the ball is easily entered.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure of the pachinko gaming machine on the back side. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes all game operations such as a lottery when winning a prize in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content of the effect display device 60, and changes the effect display content particularly according to the determination result of the main board 200. The back setting mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for the prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out the prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball plate 105 according to the winning of each winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the stored balls of the upper ball plate 105 into the game area 81 one by one. The launch control board 157 controls the launch operation of the launch device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies electric power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number for the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of safe balls and out balls.

A setting changing device 170 is provided on the board of the main board 200. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing a setting to one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as a game setting) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (settings 1 to 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of a big hit can be different depending on the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more favorable the game specifications can be to the player. When each of the jackpot probabilities from the settings 1 to the setting 6 is M1 to M6, M1 ≤ M2 ≤ M3. The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦ M4 ≦ M5 ≦ M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 has a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game store, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a set setting value. It includes a setting display unit 173 for lighting and displaying, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey type switch for shifting to a state in which the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") or a state in which the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 and the setting key is turned to turn it on, and then the power switch 150 is turned on to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, in order to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the number "1" indicating the setting 1 is displayed on the setting display unit 173 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is changed in order such as 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → .... When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the off state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory and the setting change is confirmed. , You will be ready to play. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is not switched and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off, the game becomes playable. When the setting key is turned off to enable the game, the setting display unit 173 is turned off and the current set value cannot be visually recognized.

The setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), RAM clear is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key is on), the setting changes state when the RAM is cleared. Further, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key-off state, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key on state, the setting confirmation state is entered. Further, the setting display unit 173 may also be used as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the combined display unit may function as a performance display unit 159 when the game is playable, and may function as a setting display unit 173 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. In addition, the setting changing device 170 may not be provided so that the game setting cannot be changed.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows a functional block of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described, but in the present specification, in order to match the physical configuration and the functional configuration, for example, a physical configuration such as a main board 200, a payout control board 155, a launch control board 157, etc. For the part already explained as, the term may be used as it is for convenience.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates a power source to be used in the gaming machine based on an AC power supply (AC24V or the like) supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. Main board 200, payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling prize ball payout, launch control board 157 for controlling launch of game balls to the game area, and directing operations and processing are controlled. The function is shared with the sub-board 300 as a sub-control device.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port group (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port). It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the out port 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and sends and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200, a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200, and the like to indirectly transmit the launch control board 157. And also controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball feed device 164, and the ball feed device 164 and the launch device 164 and the launch device are based on the launch permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155. The device 156 is controlled to launch a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes an effect display device 60, a movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), a speaker 108, an effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109, cross key 110), a decorative lamp 111, and electrical. It is connected to and sends and receives various control signals to and from each.

Data transmission / reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is unidirectional from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200, and data transmission can be performed. I can't even request it. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, data is transmitted and received in both directions between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155, and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub board 300, data can be transmitted and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the launch control board 157. It may be configured to send and receive data.

Note that the functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, and the sub board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some functional blocks are mounted on other boards. It may be mounted. For example, the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional block included in the launch control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. Good. Further, for example, a part of the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. May be divided into a plurality of substrates to form one functional block as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary judgment means 235, a general drawing lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, and a main board. Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening / closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, The main error detecting means 284, the setting changing means 286, the setting confirming means 287, and the command communication means 205 are provided.

<Entering ball determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines the entry of a game ball into each winning opening. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the first start winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11, and when it receives the second start winning information, the game ball has won the second start opening 12. to decide. When the winning ball determining means 201 receives the large winning opening winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the large winning opening 20, and when it receives the general winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the general winning opening 33. Upon receiving the passing information, the ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. Upon receiving the discharge information, the ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34. The entry determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of the safe balls and the out balls, and displays the ratio on the performance display unit 159. The ball entry determination means 201 is "number of payout balls" ÷ "total number of launching balls" x 100 when the probability of a big hit is a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (so-called low probability and low entry ball). The value of is displayed on the performance display unit 159. Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general drawing lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 has random numbers (also referred to as “win / fail lottery values”) used in the win / loss lottery by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 from “0” to “65535”. A random number in the range is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 is "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 has "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "variation pattern determination lottery values") used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Random numbers in the range up to "" are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "99" as a random number used in the winning / failing lottery by the general drawing lottery means 213 by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" as a random number used when determining a normal symbol by a predetermined means. The "random numbers" here are not only physical random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit and genuine random numbers in the mathematical sense, but also pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. But it may be. Alternatively, it may be a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number. Further, as the random numbers acquired by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212, the random numbers generated by the same generation means may be acquired, or the random numbers generated by another generation means may be acquired. ..

<Public map lottery means 213>
When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol lottery means 213 generates random numbers of a random number used for winning / failing lottery of the normal symbol and a random number used for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol. Obtain from 202 and execute the lottery. The ordinary symbol lottery means 213 has a normal symbol winning / failing determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct, and a normal symbol determination that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol to be displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 45. Hold the table. The normal symbol winning / failing judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for winning / failing and the winning, and the normal symbol judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol. The hit / miss and stop symbols of the normal symbol are determined based on the hit probability and the symbol selection probability. When the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol by referring to the ordinary symbol determination table, and the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol is set. When it corresponds to the deviation, the mode of the deviation symbol of 1 is always determined. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol corresponds to a hit and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first hit mode or second hit mode), the opening / closing control means 275, which will be described later, changes the mode of the stop symbol and the game state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds at the time of short opening and 6 seconds at the time of long opening. The lottery value of the ordinary symbol is temporarily held by the hold control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is held only when the predetermined upper limit number of holds held by the hold control means 240 is not exceeded.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 has a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game, such as a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first hit / fail determination means 221 and a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination. The first winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery corresponding to the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11, including the means 231. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second hit / fail determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to entry into the second starting port 12. The second winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first start port 11. Specifically, the first winning / failing lottery value for winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determining means 226, and the first variation pattern. The first pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determination means 231 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the second starting port 12. Specifically, the second winning / failing lottery value for determining the winning / failing by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, and the second variation pattern. The second pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determination means 232 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first winning / failing determination means 221 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the first winning / failing lottery value. The second winning / failing determination means 222 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the second winning / failing lottery value. In the hit / fail judgment, more specifically, "big hit" indicating that the game shifts to the special game, "small hit" indicating that the game shifts to the small hit game, and "small hit" indicating that the game does not shift to the special game and the small hit game. It is determined which of the two is "off". The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a hit / fail determination table referred to in the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the hit / fail judgment executed at the start of the symbol variation from the preliminary hit / fail judgment described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "hit / fail judgment as the main judgment". In the present specification, when the term "table" or "selection criterion" is used, the correspondence between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is strictly defined by the table structure. Not only pointing to data, but also broadly including the case where such a correspondence is realized by a program structure in which a second parameter is derived from one or a plurality of first parameters. Including them, the concept is substantially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". Further, when a table structure is used, the selection criteria that are substantially one type may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables, but the term "multiple types of selection criteria" is subdivided. Shows the actual number of types of tables, not the number of converted tables.

The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a table corresponding to each hit / fail determination as a hit / fail determination table to be referred to in the hit / fail determination. Specifically, a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means 221 (also referred to as “first hit / miss judgment table”) and a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means 222 (“second hit / miss judgment table”). A table to be referred to is selected according to the winning / failing judgment to be executed while holding the "winning / failing judgment table"). In the plurality of winning / failing determination tables, the determination results of big hit, small hit, and miss are associated with the winning / failing lottery value, and the winning / failing probability is determined according to the range setting of the associated big hit. In addition, a plurality of types of winning / failing judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. Is prepared. If the probabilities of big hit, small hit, and loss are the same among the plurality of game settings, a win / fail determination table that is common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a hit / fail determination table. This figure shows a winning / failing determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a winning / failing determination table corresponding to setting 6. In the winning / failing judgment table of this figure, the judgment results of big hit, small hit, and miss are associated with the winning / failing lottery value, and the winning / failing probability of the big hit and the winning / failing probability of the small hit are associated with each associated range setting. Is decided. The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 refer to the pass / fail determination table of the present figure in the hit / fail determination as the present determination. In both the first winning / failing lottery by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the second winning / failing lottery by the second winning / failing determination means 222, a big hit is normally obtained only when the winning / failing lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of big hits is expanded, and the big hits are obtained not only when the winning / failing lottery value corresponds to the range of 0 to 299 but also when it corresponds to the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state. In this figure, a single hit / fail judgment table shows the jackpot range for both normal time and probability change, but the hit / fail judgment table may be prepared separately for normal time and probability change, and the first It may be prepared separately for one winning / failing lottery and for the second winning / failing lottery.

In the premise technology, even if the winning / failing lottery value does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it becomes a small hit. In the example of this figure, when the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determination means 221 corresponds to the range of 56500 to 65535, a small hit is obtained, and the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determination means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first winning / failing lottery has a wider range of small hits than the second winning / failing lottery, and small hits are more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to a big hit, it is originally all "off", but in the example of this figure, if it does not correspond to a big hit but also does not correspond to a small hit, the winning / losing lottery value range Is particularly expressed as "off". That is, when "hit or not" is considered from the viewpoint of "whether or not it is a big hit", "small hit" may be included in "missing" in a broad sense in the sense of "not a big hit". In addition, when "hit or not" is considered from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "small hit" may be included in "hit" in a broad sense together with "big hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the judgment table for big hits and the judgment table for small hits are realized in the form of a single hit / fail judgment table, but even if each is realized as a separate table. Good. Further, the "small hit" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any of the games. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding hit / fail judgment table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning / failing lottery value for each set value. FIG. 3A shows the correspondence between the first winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the winning / failing determination result. FIG. 3B shows the correspondence between the second winning / failing lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determination means 222 and the winning / failing determination result. The range of the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value, which are big hits during normal times and probability changes, is 0 to 294 if the set value is "1", 0 to 295 if the set value is "2", and the set value "2". If it is "3", it is 0 to 296, if it is a set value "4", it is 0 to 297, if it is a set value "5", it is 0 to 298, and if it is a set value "6", it is 0 to 299. Therefore, as the set value becomes larger, the range of the winning / failing lottery value that becomes a big hit in the normal time increases, and the probability of becoming a big hit in the normal time increases. In addition, the range of the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value, which are big hits (that is, normally off) only at the time of probability change, should be 295 to 2949 if the set value is "1" and the set value "2". For example, 296 to 2959, for the set value "3", 297 to 2769, for the set value "4", 298 to 2979, for the set value "5", 299 to 2899, and for the set value "6", It is 300 to 2999. Therefore, as the set value becomes larger, the range of the winning / failing lottery value that becomes a big hit at the time of probability change increases, and the probability of winning a big hit at the time of probability change also increases. The range of the winning / failing lottery value is determined so that the ratio between the normal jackpot probability, which is a jackpot during normal times, and the jackpot probability, which is a jackpot during probability changes, is constant regardless of the set value. In this figure, the range of the winning / failing lottery value is defined so that the probability of the jackpot at the time of probability change is 10 times the probability of the jackpot at the normal time, and is common to all the set values "1" to "6". .. In addition, the range of the winning / failing lottery value is determined so that the probability of a small hit is constant regardless of the set value. In all the set values "1" to "6", a small hit is obtained when the range of the first winning / failing lottery value corresponds to 56500 to 65535, and a small hit is made when the range of the second winning / failing lottery value corresponds to 64000 to 65535. It will be a hit. The range of winning / failing lottery values outside the range of big hits or small hits is "out of line". In this figure, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence between the winning / failing lottery value and the winning / failing determination result may be determined so that the jackpot probability is the same between the different set values.

<1st symbol determining means 226 and 2nd symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stopped symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol based on the symbol lottery value acquired from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the winning / failing determination. .. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determining means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second symbol determining means 227 holds the hit / fail by the second hit / miss determination means 222. Holds a plurality of symbol judgment tables according to the judgment result. The first hit / miss determination means 221 holds a first symbol determination table at the time of a big hit, a first symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, and a first symbol determination table at the time of a miss, which is referred to at the time of a small hit. The second hit / miss determination means 222 holds a second symbol determination table at the time of a big hit, a second symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol determination table at the time of a miss, which is referred to at the time of a small hit. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "symbol determination as the main determination".

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7 (a) is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 7 (b) is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, and FIG. 7 (c) is a table to be referred to. This is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of the present figure in the symbol determination as the present determination. In each symbol determination table, the correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with the hit / miss judgment results of big hit, small hit, and miss, respectively. "0" to "4" correspond to the big hit, and "5" to "9" correspond to the small hit. "10" corresponds to the disconnection. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by a combination of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7 (a), the types of special symbols "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of the jackpot and the probability fluctuation after the jackpot. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 16R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "0 to 99" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and is "0 to 99" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144 ”. The type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "substantially 4R hit") with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. It is associated with "145-149". The type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot accompanied by a probability change, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "3" indicates a 16R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the content of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuations) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery value.

In addition, it is possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of special symbol types, the jackpot can be increased while increasing the symbol types. You can set fewer types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into more types of jackpots in correspondence with the increased number of symbol types. Further, it is possible to provide different symbol types at the time of the first lottery and at the time of the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is configured to correspond to each of the type of special symbol selected at the time of the first lottery and the type of special symbol selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the ratio of probability fluctuations to be the same in the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery value in the entire range in the case where the winning / failing determination result is wrong. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol will always be stopped and displayed in the case of deviation. It is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols to be stopped and displayed in the case of disconnection.

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the types of special symbols "5" to "9" are associated with small hits. The type "5" is associated with the range "0 to 49" of the symbol lottery value, and the type "6" is associated with the range "50 to 99" of the symbol lottery value. The type "7" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the symbol lottery value range. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In the prerequisite technique, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is also referred to as the pre-design determination table in the pre-symbol determination. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine that the value of "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination is the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of holds. It should be noted that, as the preliminary symbol determination table, a table that can be further subdivided to enable complicated determination, or a table in which the determination range of the jackpot symbols that execute the same special game is summarized and simplified may be used. .. In addition, when a symbol is uniformly determined at the time of deviation as in the premise technology, a specific symbol is determined without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a symbol determination table for deviation. You may.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 acquires, from the random number generating means 202, a variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is defined. It is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determining means 232 uses the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined as the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. It is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the above. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 respectively refer to the variation pattern table when starting the symbol variation to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation. Further, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 execute a preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232, and the control means of the main board 200, refer to the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the start port. The pre-pattern judgment table used for information generation for the execution judgment of the look-ahead process at the time of entering the ball is held or shared. The fluctuation pattern defines the fluctuation time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and has various fluctuation times, long and short, depending on the type. That is, in each fluctuation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is defined, the variation display time is substantially set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the special symbol is set when the variation display time elapses. Fluctuation is stopped. The fluctuation pattern determination executed at the start of the symbol variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as the main determination" in order to distinguish it from the prior pattern determination. Further, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative pattern described later, it may be defined as a different type of variation pattern with the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table of the present figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table of the present figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the winning / failing judgment result is incorrect in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "2" is selected, and when the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, the normal reach of the pattern range number "3" is "normal". 2 ”is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, "out of reach" of the pattern range number "4" is selected. As "out of reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation pattern is 10 seconds, and when the number of holdings is 3, the fluctuation pattern is 7 seconds and the number of holdings. When is 4, a 4-second fluctuation pattern is selected.

In this figure, an example of mainly classifying into five types according to the fluctuation time will be described, but a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns are prepared for each of the fluctuation patterns in the sub-board 300, and dozens of types of variation effect patterns are prepared in total. Is associated with the lottery value range of each category.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "normal 1", "normal 2", and "out of reach" also differs depending on the number of reservations. When the number of holds is 0 or 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of holds increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" becomes narrower, and the lottery value of "out of reach" The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of holds, the wider the lottery value range of the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and the probability that the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time will be selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of holds, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of holds, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a fluctuation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the fluctuation pattern is different for each number of holds, it is possible to realize control in which a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected when the number of holds is small.

If the winning / failing judgment result is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", is selected and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 124 to 248, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, the normal reach of the pattern range number "7" is selected "normal 1", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, the normal reach of the pattern range number "8" is "normal". 2 ”is selected.

If the winning / failing judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", is selected, and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 123 to 255, "normal 3", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10", is selected.

When the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 transmit the pre-determination result to the effect determining means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value (0 to 10) of the pattern range number is set to the first correctness. It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second winning / failing lottery and the number of holds. In the configuration shown in FIG. 8, it is illustrated that a table is provided for each winning / failing judgment result in the preliminary pattern judgment. However, regardless of the winning / failing lottery result, the prior pattern judgment table of 1 is used and the random number value is approximately which. In addition to deriving only information regarding whether or not the table is located in the range, the control means side of the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation is to be executed together with the preliminary pass / fail determination result.

In the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 8B referred to in the time saving state, the pattern lottery value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern for time saving. However, the correspondence between the range of the pattern lottery value and the fluctuation time is the same as that in FIG. 8 (a) except for "no reach and shortening of deviation" selected by deviation. “Reachless loss shortening” is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “reachless loss” in FIG. 8 (a). For "shortening without reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds when the number of holdings is 0, 1 and a fluctuation pattern of 1 second when the number of holdings is 2-4. Are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables according to the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, the second lottery is easy to enter despite the time saving. The situation in which the hold of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the out-of-ball fluctuation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a fluctuation pattern table is referred to in which a fluctuation pattern for a long time (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the fluctuation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of holdings. It may be that.

<Hold control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the hold control means 240 includes the special figure hold means 241 and the normal figure hold means 242. When the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value is newly acquired, the special figure holding means 241 changes the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value acquired before that. When is displayed, the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value is suspended, and the winning / failing lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding symbol. Here, for each of the first special symbols, up to four, the first winning / failing lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are memorized, and for the second special symbol, each of them has an upper limit of four. The second winning / failing lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal figure holding means 242 stores the normal figure lottery value acquired by the normal figure lottery means 213 as a holding ball. The number of these holds is represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure hold display unit 71, the second special figure hold display unit 72, and the normal figure hold display unit 75, respectively. The number of holds by the special figure holding means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery held by the special figure holding means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery, and the symbol variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the jackpot lottery value is held as the first win / loss lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second win / fail lottery, the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot lottery value of the first win / loss lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if a big hit is held as the first winning or losing lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of consecutive big hits can be obtained by continuing to hit until the big hit is held as the second winning or losing lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251, a second special figure control means 252, and a normal figure control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let me. The first special symbol control means 251 sets a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let me. The second special symbol control means 252 also sets a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed.

When the special figure holding means 241 stores the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery, the first special figure controlling means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery regardless of whether or not the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored by the special figure holding means 241. As a result, when the lottery value is held in both the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / failing lottery is preferentially read out and the symbol variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the symbol change does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0.

The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 are changed by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing of starting and the timing of stopping the change display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When the fluctuation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing judgment result, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation pattern determined or determined as the final judgment and a value indicating whether the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery is performed are set. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. The normal symbol control means 254 causes the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 213 as a variable display of the normal symbol.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other while the variable display of one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is displayed. The special figure adjusting means 276 has a second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball has entered the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12. The variation display of 52 is prioritized over the variation display of the first special symbol 51 based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the second winning / failing lottery value is always preferentially digested, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously changed and displayed.

The special symbol adjusting means 276 in the modified example displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the variation of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the balls into the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. It may be selectively changed and displayed. For example, when the ball enters in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable order. Will be done. In this case, the special figure adjusting means 276 monitors the hold control means 240 and stores the hold order of the winning / failing lottery value. Since which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the ball entry order of the game ball, that is, the hold order of the winning / failing lottery value in the hold control means 240, the player can easily visually grasp the change order.

In another modification, the special symbol adjusting means 276 may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the ball entry order. Good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately displayed in a variable manner. Since which special symbol should be changed simply alternates regardless of the order in which the game balls enter, the player can easily grasp the order of change.

When one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in the hitting mode, the special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variation display of the other. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbol is not started while the special game is executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The pre-determination means 235 includes a first lottery pre-determination means 236 and a second lottery pre-determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 is a random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the execution of various determinations by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. Is used to determine in advance information about the change before the start of the change of the first special symbol by the first special figure control means 251. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 is a random number acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the execution of various determinations by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Is used to determine in advance information about the change before the start of the change of the second special symbol by the second special figure control means 252.

The first lottery pre-determination means 236 includes a first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table, a first pre-symbol lottery value determination table, and a first pre-variation pattern random value determination table as determination tables for pre-determination related to the first lottery means 211. Hold the table. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first win / fail lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-variation pattern determination table to determine a random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as the pre-determination results, and the information regarding the pre-determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table referred to in the preliminary hit / fail determination. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the first game) refers to the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table of FIG. 9A when the ball enters the first start opening 11, and the win / fail lottery value. When is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary hit / fail judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 56499", the value of "3" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, the first symbol lottery value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and when the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that fact is set as the advance symbol determination result. .. When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the first pre-variation pattern random number value determination table (not shown), when the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the first game) is the first start port 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. The information is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the first winning / losing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

The second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the second game) refers to the second pre-win / fail lottery value determination table shown in FIG. 9B when the ball enters the second start port 12, and the win / fail lottery is performed. When the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary hit / fail judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value of "3" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "64,000 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, referring to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. .. When the second symbol lottery value is "145-149", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the second pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), when the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the second game) is the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the second winning / failing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

The various information temporarily stored as the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is stored in a predetermined pre-determination result storage area up to a maximum of four, respectively, as in the case of the number of reserved storages. The preliminary determination result may be stored using the hold storage area stored by the hold control means 240. The information may be deleted based on the fact that the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. In this way, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected by sharing the information with other areas or erasing the information based on the completion of transmission. Further, as the judgment table for the pre-judgment, the judgment table for the main judgment may be used without providing the table dedicated to the pre-judgment. Part or all of them may share a common pre-judgment table. In this way, by sharing with other determination tables, it is expected that the data capacity of the main board 200 will be reduced. The content to be transmitted as the determination result of the pre-determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, only the determination result of whether or not the result is transmitted. Further, the value of the random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 described above without being determined by the pre-determination means 235, and the sub-board is transmitted. It may be configured so that the content of the preliminary determination is determined by 300.

The pre-determining means 235 may refer to a pre-winning lottery value determination table in which the correspondence between the winning / failing lottery value and the pre-winning / failing determination result is different depending on the set value set by the setting changing device 170. Similar to the above-mentioned winning / failing determination table, a plurality of types of advance winning / failing lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the advance winning / failing lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set value of the game setting. In addition, a pre-win / fail lottery value determination table that can be commonly used among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the winning / failing may be pre-determined by the combination of the set value of the game setting and the value of the pre-winning / failing determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table corresponding to the game setting. FIG. 3A is a pre-hit / fail determination table referred to by the first lottery pre-determination means 236, and FIG. 3B is a pre-win / fail determination table referred to by the second lottery pre-determination means 237. When the winning / failing lottery value is "0 to 294", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "11", indicating that a big hit is obtained in all the settings 1 to 6. When the winning / failing lottery value is "295", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "12", which indicates that the setting is 2 or more in the normal state or a big hit in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "296", the preliminary winning / failing judgment result is "13", indicating that a big hit is obtained with the setting 3 or more at the normal time or all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "297", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "14", indicating that a big hit is obtained in the setting 4 or more in the normal time or all the settings in the probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "298", the preliminary winning / failing judgment result is "15", which indicates that the setting is 5 or more in the normal state or a big hit in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "299", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "16", indicating that a big hit is obtained with the setting 6 at the normal time or all the settings at the time of probability change. Further, when the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "21", indicating that a big hit is obtained in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "22", indicating that a big hit is obtained when the setting is 2 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2960 to 2696", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "23", indicating that a big hit is obtained when the setting is 3 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "23", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting of 4 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2980 to 2899", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "25", indicating that a big hit is obtained when the setting is 5 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "26", indicating that the setting 6 at the time of probability change is a big hit. Further, when the first winning / failing lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499" and the second winning / failing lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "3000-63999". It becomes "30", which indicates that it is a small hit in all settings. Further, when the first winning / failing lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535" and the second winning / failing lottery value shown in (b) is "64,000 to 65535", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is ". It becomes 40 ”, indicating that it is out of order in all settings. By using such a pre-win / fail determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate pre-win / fail determination result for each set value of the game setting.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first winning or losing lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a shift to the special game. It is determined that the conditions have been met, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20. Similarly, when the special game control means 260 results in the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicating a shift to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. It is determined that the special game operating condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is continuously performed a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 16R jackpot that repeats a unit game 16 times, a 4R jackpot that repeats a unit game four times, and a 2R jackpot that repeats a unit game with a shorter opening time than the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot only twice. The 16R jackpot is the jackpot in the second win / loss lottery, and the 4R jackpot is the jackpot in the first win / loss lottery. In the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot, in principle, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. Even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the jackpot 20 may be opened in the same opening mode as the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small hit game control means 265>
The small hit game control means 265 operates the small hit game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small hit. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275. Similarly, the small hit game control means 265 is small when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small hit. It is determined that the winning game operating condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275.

In the small hit game, the unit game is executed once, and the large winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for about 1.6 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large winning opening 20 to end the small hit game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls a normal game in a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a ball entry easy state. When the special symbol is a specific jackpot symbol accompanied by a transition to the probabilistic change, the specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game. The probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the ball entry easy state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 select the variation pattern having a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is substantially shortened. To do. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of winning / failing lottery values held by the holding control means 240 is referred to, and as the number of holdings by the holding control means 240 decreases, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, only the probability change of the normal symbol and the opening extension of the second starting port 12 or the opening extension of the second starting port 12 are carried out. That is, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting port 12 to be in the open extension state when a specific big hit occurs, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning / failing lottery is the second winning / failing lottery. It shifts to a probability change state higher than the normal probability state. During the probability change state, the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 is maintained at a high probability of becoming a big hit.

<Open / close control means 275>
The opening / closing control means 275 controls the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the large winning opening 20 of the second starting port 12. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12. In the normal state, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 at the opening time of short opening or long opening according to the result of the open lottery, and in the easy entry state, the opening / closing control means 275 opens at the opening time of long opening. 2 The starting port 12 is opened. This is intended to improve the ease of entering the ball of the second starting port 12 so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls held. In the special game, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the large winning opening solenoid 92 to open the large winning opening 20.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes the control start processing of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The main power cutoff processing executing means 282 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the main board 200 when a power supply abnormality such as a power supply cutoff occurs. The main error detecting means 284 executes an abnormality detection process on the main board 200. The control start processing, the abnormality response processing, and the abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287>
The setting changing means 286 executes a "setting changing process" for changing the game setting. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the setting changing state, the setting changing means 286 shifts to the above-mentioned setting changing state. When the setting change means 286 shifts to the setting change state, the setting display unit 173 displays the setting value stored in the setting memory. The setting changing means 286 changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ... In response to the pressing of the setting change button 172. , The setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as the display of the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting changing means 286 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming the game setting. When the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state and the RAM clear switch is not pressed and the power switch 150 is turned on, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory when the setting confirmation state is entered. Unlike the above-mentioned setting changing means 286, the setting checking means 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even when the setting change button 172 is pressed, and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

Note that the set value data managed in the setting memory may not be the numerical values of "1" to "6" but may use the numerical values of "0" to "5" instead. In this case, the setting value "0" corresponds to the setting 1, the setting value "1" corresponds to the setting 2, the setting value "2" corresponds to the setting 3, and the setting value "3" corresponds to the setting 4. , The set value "4" may correspond to the setting 5, and the set value "5" may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, the RAM clear process is performed when the RAM is abnormal, and when the set value data is set to the initial value "0", the abnormality is not judged. Can be simplified. Further, when executing some lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting a different table or data for each set value in the look-ahead processing, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. .. For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as it is as the offset data. When the setting changing means 286 and the setting confirming means 287 use the numerical values of "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the numerical values of the setting value data may be displayed as they are on the setting display unit 173, or the setting may be performed. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, since the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of the settings 1 to 6 in the game setting and displayed, the display can be easily understood by the manager of the game machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 transmits the payout control command communication means 206 for transmitting the control command necessary for executing the payout or the like to the payout control board 155, and the sub-control for transmitting the control command necessary for executing the effect control or the like to the sub-board 300. Includes command transmitting means 207. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening based on the determination of the winning balls to each winning opening by the winning ball determining means 201, and the main board 200. Send a command indicating the status of the error that occurred in. When the sub-control command transmission means 207 starts the symbol variation, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determination means 303 together with the symbol variation control command.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 fluctuates at the timing when the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When the fluctuation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing judgment result, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation pattern determined or determined as the final judgment and a value indicating whether the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery is performed are set. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the pre-determination result by the pre-determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303. After the pre-judgment result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning openings (first start port 11, second start) corresponding to the pre-judgment result are started regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the lottery is started immediately. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the mouth 12), the information on the number of reserved pieces, the game state, etc., and is deleted from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, a so-called "look-ahead" process is realized in which the sub-board 300 can presumably recognize the winning / failing result in advance based on the received prior determination result before the turn of the symbol variation start comes around. The processing based on the prior determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmitting means 207 is set by the information on the special game by the special game control means 260, the information on the small hit game by the small hit game control means 265, the lottery result information by the general drawing lottery means 213, and the setting changing means 286. The setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub-board 300. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 is transmitted to various controls on the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing and information on errors by the main initial processing executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284. Information about various signals and the like is appropriately transmitted to the sub-board 300.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a symbol mode determining means 301, a pattern storage means 302, an effect determining means 303, an effect controlling means 304, a timekeeping means 307, an effect setting means 308, a sub initial processing executing means 360, and a sub power cutting processing executing means 362. The sub-error detecting means 364, the command receiving means 370, and the sub-side pre-determining means 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image contents to be displayed on the effect display device 60 and the display process thereof are defined when the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates. The effect pattern includes a plurality of variation effect patterns in which the variation process from the start to the stop of the variation in the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 and the effect process are defined, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed separately and the degree of expectation for a big hit. It includes a plurality of advance notice effect patterns that suggest the height of the variable display before the stop of the variable display.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side pre-determining means 371 holds the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determining means 303 includes a normal effect determining means 373 and a look-ahead effect determining means 374. The normal effect determining means 373 is displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery or the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker. The content of the effect to be output to 108, the decorative lamp 111, etc. is determined. The effect determining means 303 determines the effect content according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and determines the effect content to be output to the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the like. .. The normal effect determining means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232, and is selected from a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation patterns of the special symbol transmitted from the command communication means 205. One of them is selected and read from the pattern storage means 302. The normal effect determining means 373 sends the read information of the variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304. The normal effect determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. In some cases, the fluctuation effect pattern may be determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the variation is combined with the content of the look-ahead effect by the look-ahead effect determination means 374. The production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 more accurately identifies and identifies the result of the present determination based on the preliminary determination result from the command communication means 205, the past preliminary determination result held on the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before the final determination, and the content of the execution. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determining means 374 determines whether the current game state is in the probability-variable game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the pre-determination result before the pre-determination result received this time. Determine whether or not to do so. Based on the judgment result, the pass / fail result of the main judgment and the selected fluctuation pattern related to the pre-judgment result received this time are specified, and based on the specific result, whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed and the execution content of the look-ahead effect are determined. .. Since there are many parts in the effect determining means 303 in which the normal effect determining means 373 and the look-ahead effect determining means 374 cooperate with each other, the effect determining means 303 will be described as a comprehensive effect determining means 303 except for a particularly necessary part.

In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the effect image having the same variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol 61 and the arrangement thereof by the lottery determination result by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is decided according to the variation effect pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determining means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of the stopped symbols to the effect control means 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to for determining a stop symbol of a decorative symbol.

The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, for example, when the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 indicates a shift to a special game of 4R jackpot or 16R jackpot. Is selected as a specific combination, for example, a combination in which three symbols such as "777" and "111" are aligned. When the hit / fail judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357" is selected, but the specific combination is not necessarily a combination of three symbols. It does not have to be. If the hit / fail judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination in which the three symbols are not aligned, such as "312" and "946", and it is a specific combination selected for a 2R big hit or a small hit. The combination that does not apply is selected. If the hit / fail judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot, and a variation pattern indicating a miss with reach is selected, a combination such as "191" or "727" in which only one symbol is not aligned. Select.

The variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, the effect process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation. The variable effect pattern includes a pattern for displaying a normal out-of-order symbol, a pattern for displaying an out-of-order symbol through a reach state that would be a big hit if one more symbol is aligned, and a big hit symbol after the reach state. The pattern when doing is included. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various fluctuation times, long and short. In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol having the same variation time as the special symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for time saving, the effect determining means 303 is a variation in which the effect content for time saving is determined. Select a production pattern. The content of the effect for shortening the time is an effect of outputting a background image or sound that impresses the player in an advantageous state due to the shortened time or the probability change.

The notice effect pattern is an effect pattern for temporarily displaying an image, animation, video, or the like of a specific character or motif on the screen, an effect pattern for operating an accessory, or an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound. The effect of the advance notice effect pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol change, and it is suggested in advance that the symbol change is highly expected to stop in the jackpot mode. For example, there is a normal advance notice effect in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group advance notice effect in which a group of a large number of characters is displayed so as to pass from one end to the other end of the screen. Further, a step-up notice effect is further included in which the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the higher the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big hit.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (notice after reach) in which the effect is executed at a timing after the display mode of the decorative symbol 61 is in the reach state to announce the final stop mode of the symbol, and the decorative symbol 61. There is a pattern (pre-reach notice) that simultaneously announces that the production will be executed at the timing when it is not stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The effect determining means 303 should determine whether or not to display the advance notice effect on the effect display device 60 according to the determination result of the winning / failing lottery or the advance determination result by a predetermined advance notice lottery, set the advance effect, and display the effect. Determine the notice production pattern. The effect determining means 303 holds a notice determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the notice effect, and a notice type table to be referred to when selecting the type of the notice effect pattern. The notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to depending on the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery or the preliminary judgment result, and if the winning / failing lottery is successful, the advance notice effect is displayed with a higher probability than in the case of losing. As such, the correspondence between the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery and whether or not to display the notice effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to suggest a high degree of expectation for a big hit by displaying the notice effect itself.

The effect control means 304 variably displays the effect image including the decorative symbol 61 on the effect display device 60 according to the selected variable effect pattern data. The effect control means 304 sets the reception of the variation start command of the decorative symbol 61 as a start condition for the variation display of the new decorative symbol. When it is determined by the effect determining means 303 that the advance notice effect is to be displayed, the effect control means 304 displays the advance notice effect according to the selected advance notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a form of superimposing it on the effect of the symbol variation. Let me.

When the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery is stored, the effect control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery, and whether the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored. Regardless of whether or not, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery is started. As a result, when the lottery value is reserved for both the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / failing lottery is preferentially read and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. .. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the change of the decorative symbol does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0. In this way, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol 61.

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The effect control means 304 includes an effect display control means 305, a voice control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the sound control means 306 controls the sound output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are changing, it is necessary to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing on the effect display device 60. Normally, a normal size decorative symbol 61 having a certain size is variablely displayed, but in a manner that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal size decorative symbol 61, other than the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is the main production content. You may display a special effect to be performed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the symbol is changing by variablely displaying an alternative symbol which is a decorative symbol having a size smaller than the normal size decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative symbol, it means a normal size decorative symbol, but when distinguishing it from an alternative symbol, the normal size decorative symbol is also referred to as a "normal decorative symbol" or a "main decorative symbol".

The alternative symbol is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, for example, while the normal decorative symbol is hidden. The alternative symbol is a form of a decorative symbol for suggesting the result of a hit / fail judgment in a dramatic manner, has a display form simplified (in other words, simplified or simplified) as compared with the normal decorative symbol, and is a normal decorative symbol. It is displayed in a simpler fluctuation process. The alternative symbol has an appearance display form corresponding to a portion indicating the symbol type of the ordinary decorative symbol, and has, for example, a display form representing a number, a character, or a symbol indicating the symbol type. Further, the alternative symbol is variablely displayed in a narrower area than the area where the decorative symbol is normally displayed in a variable manner, and is typically at a position where it is difficult to hinder the main effect by elements other than the symbol, for example, in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. It is displayed in a variable manner. The alternative symbol is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative symbol, but has a display form in which at least the symbol type can be visually identified. The alternative symbol may be a reduced version of the normal decorative symbol as it is, and may be the same as the normal decorative symbol except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggests a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning / failing lottery will be in a state advantageous to the player depending on the combination of the stopping modes at the end of the fluctuation. For example, it is suggested that the plurality of alternative symbols have a high expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation by being in a reach state in which two symbol types out of the three alternative symbols are aligned. In addition, the left and right symbols that are in the reach state are specific types of symbols that suggest that the expectations are relatively high, such as "3" and "7", and the expectations such as "1" and "2" are high. By becoming a kind of symbol that suggests that it is relatively low, it may suggest that the degree of expectation of the reach state is high or low. It should be noted that the alternative symbol does not appear in a definite stop state in appearance, but in a temporary stop state in which minute shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the substitute symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed instead of the substitute symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in the fixed stop state. Further, the decorative symbol and the alternative symbol are not displayed exclusively, but the display periods may overlap. Furthermore, at a predetermined effect in which the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, the variation display of the normal decorative symbol may be continued and the variation of the alternative symbol may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbol, the special symbol is changing in an image as small as or smaller than the alternative symbol in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A simple symbol suggesting that there is may be displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbol may be composed of a variable display of three symbol combinations like a normal decorative symbol, a variable display of one symbol, or a simple symbol ("○", "×", etc.). May be configured to be sequentially switched. The simple symbol is not related to the variable display mode of the normal decorative symbol or the alternative symbol, but displays a certain fluctuation from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and is related to the stop display mode of the normal decorative symbol at the time of stop display. May be displayed. It should be noted that the simple symbol may be changed as appropriate, as long as it suggests that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbol is at least notified, such as displaying a combination of two symbols. Further, the simple design may be referred to as a "sub-decorative design", "sub-designation", "mini-decorative design", "mini-designation", or the like. In addition to the effect display device 60, a variable display of a decorative symbol called a fourth symbol, which indicates a display equivalent to a simple symbol depending on a light emitting mode such as an LED, may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during change of the special symbol, display of the result) when a problem occurs in the effect display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the fourth symbol, the LEDs light up in sequence of "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including extinguishing is also possible). Depending on the type of special symbol, it may be displayed in a variable manner, or it may be indicated by blinking in a single color according to the type of the special symbol to indicate the variable display, and the emission color when the stop display is displayed may indicate the type of deviation or jackpot.

The timekeeping means 307 is a timekeeping circuit that outputs time information used for the game. The timekeeping means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from the time when the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit having a built-in battery and capable of continuously measuring the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off or a power failure may occur may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is a possibility that the time of each game console may differ slightly due to individual differences or time lag, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, the time difference between multiple game consoles as long as the power is turned on at the same time. Is unlikely to occur.

The effect determining means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the time measuring means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronized effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 during the synchronized effect period, which is a period substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the symbol variation and the game state. The synchronization effect period extends for several minutes, the length of which is longer than the symbol variation time for one time, and may include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronized effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the effect pattern defines the reproduction of a predetermined music and video. A plurality of types of effect patterns for synchronized effects are prepared, and different types of effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as month, date, day of the week, and time.

The entrainment effect is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. That is, in "normal game", (1) "normal game during variable display" in which the symbol is variablely displayed, and (2) "normal game during variable stop" in which neither the variable display of the symbol nor the standby demo screen is displayed. , (3) "Normal game while the standby demo screen is displayed", which is the display of the standby demo screen instead of the variable display of the symbol. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the cases of (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the volume reduction and the brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). It can be different from the time of. In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information about the mobile cooperation system described later by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is received, the video and audio output of the synchronized effect is output. It is suppressed, and priority is given to screen display such as production customization by the mobile cooperation system.

The tuning effect is, for example, an effect of reproducing a performance or video of a predetermined song at a predetermined time (referred to as “synchronization effect start time”). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronized effect may be the time that is reached with a predetermined time interval from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time of every hour or half hour based on the standard time. It may be. Alternatively, a time that may vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may be different, such as first one hour later, then three hours later, instead of a fixed interval such as "every hour". The interval may vary depending on the date and day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of the same models installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from the time when the power is turned on, the amusement store turns on the power of a plurality of units at the same time. As a result, the same synchronization effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of game consoles when the predetermined time is reached. As a result, the production is displayed at the same time as if multiple units are synchronized, and the same music and video are played at the same time, creating a synergistic and realistic feeling as if a live performance or movie was being screened on the spot. A directing effect can be obtained.

The synchronization effect function is also built into another game console of the same model, and multiple game consoles on the same game island are turned on at the same time by a game clerk every day. Then, the plurality of game consoles that are turned on at the same time all reach the synchronization effect start time almost at the same time, and the synchronization effect can be executed simultaneously at the same time. This is called a multiple-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only the video display will be synchronized with multiple units, but also the sound effects and background music output will be synchronized with multiple units, and the more units that are synchronized, the more synergistic effect will be obtained by executing the production all at once. Increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the player's game history. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of production results. The history of game results is the result of a game that leads to a ball output that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions. The history of the production result is different from the profit in the game, and is recorded in order to obtain the profit such as the right to change the content and type of the production and the right to make it easier for a specific type of production to appear. It is information such as the score of. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini game, and the like and give it to the player, coded information indicating the score and the game history, for example, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the screen. When the player reads the two-dimensional code with the camera of his / her mobile terminal and decodes it, the score and game history information obtained by the decoding are stored in the player's mobile terminal. The cooperation system between the gaming machine and the player's mobile terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). With this as an opportunity, the number of customizable items will increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the setting of which of a plurality of types of effect content options is selected as the effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and the game history. For example, as the effect patterns to be displayed during the special game, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different displayed motifs, characters, and songs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which effect is to be displayed. I will do it. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as the design of the design included in the decorative design that changes the design, and the player is allowed to select which of the designs is to be displayed. In such a case, when the player accepts the operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed and the effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 selects the selected content. Remember. The effect determining means 303 selects the type of the effect pattern during the special game according to the settings stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initial processing execution means 360 executes the control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. When a power supply abnormality such as a power supply cutoff occurs, the sub-power cutoff processing executing means 362 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the sub-board 300. The sub-error detecting means 364 executes the abnormality detection process on the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detecting means 364 detects the power failure, the sub-power cut processing executing means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as the power cut processing.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of a mobile phone cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player registers the user by setting an account and a password in the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site in advance on the mobile terminal 354. When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player at the start of the game, the effect display control means 305 displays the two-dimensional code 350, which encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, on the screen of the effect display device 60. The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") in which the player's identification information and the production score history are encoded is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 displays the password information input screen on the effect display device 60, and causes the player to input the password information via a button operation such as a cross key 110. By decoding the input password information by the effect setting means 308 and registering it as the player's identification information and the effect score history, the player's previous game content and effect score state can be inherited. The input of the password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start the effect customization for selecting various effect elements. After that, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game and the production progress, the points given by the effect setting means 308 to the player as a benefit for the effect are added as needed and accumulated as the effect score history, and the player. Can customize the effect at any time and select and set a favorite element as various effect elements. The score for the production is basically added for each symbol change, and the higher the production type with higher expectation for transition to the special game, the higher the score is given, and the higher the score is given even when the transition to the special game is performed.

As a production customization, the player uses a part of the accumulated points, and according to the number of points used, the color, background, shape, character, and the color, background, shape, character, which constitute the production content displayed on the production display device 60. You can change the production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element via a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. As for the effect elements that can be customized, a plurality of types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player operates a button as an instruction to end the game or the effect customization, the effect setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as a privilege on the effect and the effect score history, and controls the effect display. The means 305 displays on the effect display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his / her own mobile terminal and decode the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as production benefits and production score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via a transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and the production can be taken over in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol fluctuations and the number of productions increase, and the score can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291 and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). The ball entry signal from each ball entry port, the payout signal from the payout control board 155, and the like are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as the winning port solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Further, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as a result of a winning / losing lottery, a result of determining a symbol, and a result of determining a variation pattern. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

The instruction data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte instruction type data, so-called MODE data, and 1-byte instruction content data, so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by transmitting the command type data and the command content data to the sub board 300 in association with each other. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned to each instruction type in advance at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether the instruction type data or the instruction content data is used. When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that the instruction type data is the most significant bit. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Since the communication from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is a specification in which 1 byte of data is transmitted for each data transmission, it is necessary to transmit 1 byte each twice in order to transmit 2 bytes of instruction data. .. The MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and the EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise or the like, the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read twice in succession by the sub board 300, the completion of transmission / reception of the data is confirmed. .. The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read two times in a row, and transmits the same data up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 310, a sub RAM 311, a sub ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of the data storage means for holding the sub control program including the effect pattern data in which the effect process is defined and the display pattern data in which the effect display process is defined. A sub control program including the effect pattern data, the display pattern data, and the voice pattern data is read from the sub ROM 312 into the sub RAM 311, and the effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Signals from an external device such as the effect button 109 are acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives an external device such as an effect display device 60, a speaker 108, a decorative lamp 111, and a movable accessory 66 by an effect control device 313, various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and displays and outputs the display. , Voice output, lamp lighting, and control of the production by the movement of the accessory. The sub CPU 310 transmits the display pattern data and the voice pattern data to the effect control device 313. In the prerequisite technology, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a substrate and are separated and connected to each other. It may be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and a voice control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display or effect display as an effect object indicating a judgment result of a winning / failing lottery, for example, a sprite image of a decorative pattern used for decorative pattern variation, a sprite image used for a notice effect, and various effects. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data in which the motion is defined when the motion is added to the images used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The voice data is voice data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character lines that are output during the production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified in the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using the effect image data and motion data. Is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, the control CPU 320 transmits commands, effect image data, and motion data related to the effect display to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 controls the display. Similarly, commands and voice data related to voice output are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the voice control circuit 314, and voice output control is performed by the voice control circuit 314.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via the bus 330. The bus 330 in this figure comprehensively shows buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus for convenience.

The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among the data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is used as a work area when decoding the effect image data or motion data by the decoder 332, or as a work area when executing drawing processing or image processing by the drawing circuit 336. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 in order to generate a display image, and the generated display image is used as a frame of a moving image as a frame buffer. Store in 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has, for example, a memory area for two frames, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for another frame.

The data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as "summary display pattern data" in which the outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the outline display pattern data defines a rough flow of a series of effect display processes such as fluctuation start and fluctuation stop timings of decorative symbols, playback order of a plurality of moving images, and playback start and stop timings. .. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns and the display processing order for each frame for displaying moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

When the effect control device 313 performs display control based on the "rough display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads the "detailed display pattern data" required for the processing from the data ROM 324 and uses both display pattern data. And execute the display process. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display putter data including the "summary display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in the present specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "rough display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and simply "display pattern data". ". For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "rough display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". .. In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "summary display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and even if the display pattern data that serves as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. Good.

In the prerequisite technology, a configuration including a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326 is shown as a hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. In the modification, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute a process that is executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also serve as the functions of the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the effect control device 313 may have a hardware configuration in which the display control circuit 326 is not included. In this case, the process to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. May be done.

Further, in the prerequisite technology, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a configuration in which the effect control device 313 is included in addition to the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 and the sub ROM 312. In the modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may also have the function of the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may also have the function of the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. In this case, the process to be executed by the effect control device 313 is executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. You may.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the main board 200 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start processing is executed by the main initial processing execution means 280, and will be described below as being executed by the main CPU 290 that functions as the main initial processing execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets the stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial hardware-related settings such as the setting of the internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is in the ON state (Y in S105), confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), the setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), the setting confirmation process is executed (S126). If the setting key is in the OFF state in S105 (N in S105), the processes of S122 to S126 are skipped.

Subsequently, the power off / return process or the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed according to the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at the time of power off / recovery is executed. To do. In other cases, that is, even when the RAM clear switch is turned on or the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power failure information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). When the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power off information flag (S108). If the value of the power off information flag does not match the power off normal data (N in S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power off information flag matches the power off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing is normally completed when the power is turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291. Therefore, the main CPU 290 uses the checksum. Check the data in the main RAM 291. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), the process for returning to the state before the power is turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off / recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power-on was normally turned on is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initial setting of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. To do. Next, the untransmitted command request before the power is turned off is cleared, and the command transmission of various information indicating the game state is requested. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open / closed state of the second starting port 12 and the large winning opening 20 is returned to the state before the power was cut off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared by 0, the initial setting of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. In the initialization process of S116, the set value stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 is not cleared, and the set value set in the setting change process of S124 is retained as it is.

When the power off / returning process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to activate the interrupt process described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, after that, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15 in detail. The value of the setting memory in which the set value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the set memory value is not normal (N in S132), the set value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the set memory value is normal (Y in S132), the process in S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the state shifts to the setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If there is a change operation by the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N in S140), the process in S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N in S144), the processes of S138 to S142 are repeated. When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the set value cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the setting value is returned.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15 in detail. The value of the setting memory in which the set value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the set memory value is not normal (N in S152), the set value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the set memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process in S154 is skipped. The state shifts to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the set value, and if the setting key is turned OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is hidden. The set value is made invisible (S162) and returned.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 temporarily prohibits timer interruption (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors the power failure (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), a power supply disconnection memory is executed by inputting an unconditional interruption request signal from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290. In the process, the power off confirmation data is stored in the power off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), executes the process for power-off. Therefore, proceed to S212. If the value of the power off confirmation flag does not match the power off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number update process is executed (S208), the timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. When the timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), the interrupt process described later is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

When a power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the content of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is not saved normally, and the power-off error data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216), proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is normally saved, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 in order to inspect the backed up data in the main RAM 291 at the next power-on (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and a loop is performed until the power is turned off. The above-mentioned processing when the power is turned off is executed by the main power cut processing execution means 282 realized by the main CPU 290.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the details of the interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312). , 2nd start port valid period setting process (S314), prize monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol variation start Monitoring process (S324), start port monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening validity period setting process (S332), special symbol change start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), ball entry passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game status display processing (S340), handle status signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), launch control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), effect control command transmission processing (S352), and external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch mounted on the game board surface, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the door / frame opening signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the touch state signal is monitored. , Data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291. The data indicating this input state are level data (input port data at the time of this interruption) and rising data or falling data (input port data at the time of this interruption and data at the time of the previous interruption). Data indicating a switch in which switching was observed by comparing the data of the input port with an exclusive logical sum).

In the various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and stored by incrementing the value when the value is less than the predetermined maximum value, and 0 is stored when the value is equal to or more than the predetermined maximum value. Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the subtraction result is stored when the result of subtracting the predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, and the predetermined maximum value is stored when the result is less than 0. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291 and the value of the random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. If the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the random number value returns to the initial value, that is, the range of random numbers is cycled. Then, the initial value is newly set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291 and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to 0. The same process is executed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the table, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the value of the timer is 0, the timer is not updated.

In the second starting port valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting port 12 is set. An ordinary electric accessory 90 is arranged at the second starting port 12 as a prerequisite technique, and the valid period during which the prize ball is paid out and the lottery related to the second special symbol is executed when the game ball is inserted. An invalid period is set in which the prize ball is not paid out and the lottery related to the second special symbol is not executed even if the game ball enters. As will be described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process for winning the second start port is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so that the game ball enters the second start port 12. Even if the prize balls are paid out and the lottery related to the second special symbol is not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set in the first starting port 11, the large winning opening 20, the first operating port 31, the second operating port 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric accessory is operating", data indicating that the second start port 12 is in the valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "normal electric accessory is in operation", the second start that measures the effective period for detecting the residual ball inside the normal electric accessory 90 that has entered the ball just before the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory. If the value of the mouth effective extension timer is not 0, data indicating that the second start port 12 is in the valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag, and the value of the second start port effective extension timer is 0. If there is, the data indicating that the second start port is in the invalid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. As a modified example, the ordinary electric accessory 90 may be provided in the winning openings other than the second starting opening 12, and in that case, the second starting opening valid period setting process is performed for the target winning opening. It is configured to have a validity period setting process which is an equivalent process.

In the prize monitoring process (S316), the passage of the game ball through the switch is inspected, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch has no invalid period or is currently in the valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If so, update the winning counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of commands.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of the received data from the payout control board 155. Are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the first operation port 31 and the second operation port 32 of the game ball is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When the number of reserved symbols is less than the upper limit of 4, the number of reserved ordinary symbols is updated and the random numbers related to the ordinary symbols are stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, the process related to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol changing", the normal symbol changing processing is executed, and when "normal symbol stop symbol is being displayed", the normal symbol stop symbol display processing is executed and "normal electric" is executed. If "the accessory is operating", the normal electric accessory operation end demo is executed, and if "the normal electric accessory operation end demo is in progress", the normal electric accessory operation end demo process is executed. In the normal symbol change processing, after the normal symbol is changed, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is over, the fluctuation stop setting of the normal symbol is set and the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the normal symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal electric accessory is operating", the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the start of operation of the normal electric accessory is saved, and the operation of the normal electric accessory is started. The operation setting of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of off, the state of the normal symbol is set to "waiting for normal symbol change". When the winning number of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the game ball is monitored in the processing during operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings. Executes the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second start port. If it is determined that the number of winnings in the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 is used. If it is determined that the opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the above is completed and the opening of the entrance of the normal electric accessory 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the second starting port are valid. Execute the extension time setting. If it is determined that the opening / closing time of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not over, the opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not set. In the process during the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration, when the operation end demo time of the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored and it is determined that the operation end demo time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is over, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol". Set to "Waiting for fluctuation".

In the normal symbol change start monitoring process (S324), when the state of the normal symbol is monitored and "waiting for normal symbol change" and the value of the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is other than 0, the normal symbol changes. To start. When it is determined to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is decremented, and the hit judgment, the determination of the stop symbol, the setting of the fluctuation pattern number of the normal symbol, and the setting of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are executed. .. After that, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol changing", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the state setting of the normal symbol, the hit determination, and the fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the start port monitoring control process (S326), the first start port 11 winning and the second starting port 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number is added. It is stored in the buffer as a random number per special symbol used in the jackpot judgment. Further, as random numbers related to the special symbol, a symbol random number and a variable pattern random number are acquired and stored. When the hold of the second special symbol is prioritized over the hold of the first special symbol, only the update of the hold related to the prize is executed, but when the hold order of the special symbol is the winning order, the hold is executed. In addition to updating the hold related to the winning, the total number of holdings is updated and the winning order is stored. Next, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number memorized at the start opening prize, if the state of the gaming machine is confirmed and it is judged that the command transmission period is reached, a hit notice effect request, a hit symbol notice effect request, and a pattern notice are requested. The production requests are executed in order. Here, when (1) the big hit game is not executed and the random number related to the first special symbol is stored in a situation where it is not easy to enter the ball, (2) the big hit game is not executed and the big hit game is not executed. When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored in the situation where it is easy to enter the ball, or (3) When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the big hit or the small hit. In addition, it is judged that it is the command transmission period. Next, a production command corresponding to the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the look-ahead, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to 1) in the pre-judgment information (pre-hit judgment information, pre-symbol judgment information, pre-pattern judgment information). Four of the information (information that can be identified by the command) are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-judgment process, but in another example, when there is a ball entering the start port, the command is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub CPU 310 may perform various status determinations such as whether or not it is a period. Next, the value of the second starting port validity period flag is inspected, and if the value of the second starting port validity period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is the valid period, the first starting port winning prize is awarded. As in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the invalid period, the monitoring process of the second starting port winning is not executed. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is once changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed. ..

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is inspected, and when the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, during a big hit or a small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. When the special electric accessory is not operating, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general-purpose processing is terminated, and if it is "start of change", the special symbol change. The start process is executed, and if it is "special symbol changing", the special symbol changing process is executed, and if it is "special symbol stop symbol displaying", the special symbol stop symbol displaying process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub-board 300 is started to display the effect. Request commands for additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "special symbol variation in progress", and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern with 0. .. In the process during special symbol change, after changing the special symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has ended, the change stop setting of the special symbol is set and the state of the special symbol is changed to "special". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for change of the special symbol", the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated is set, and the probability of the special symbol is set. The fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol, the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory are disabled, and the state of the gaming machine is prepared to open the winning opening. Set in, set the hit start demo display time, command request for hit start demo effect, and command request for launch position specification effect (command request to execute an effect that suggests a recommended launch position such as "right-handed") To execute. When the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is performed. In order to end the operation of, set the state of the special symbol to "Waiting for special symbol change", set the state of the gaming machine during the small hit start demo, set the hit start demo display time, and set the hit start demo effect. Executes a command request and a command request for a firing position designation effect. If the result of the hit judgment is incorrect, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is displayed. In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol change", and the command request for the firing position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric accessory control process (S330), in order to execute the process related to the special electric accessory, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory is inspected, and the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating. If it is determined, the processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric accessory, the processing during preparation for opening the large winning opening, the processing during operation of the special electric accessory, the processing during closing of the large winning opening, the processing during the big hit end demonstration, the processing during the small hit start demonstration, the small hit special electric Execute processing during operation, processing during closing of the small hit big winning opening, and processing during demonstration of the end of small hit.

In the large winning opening validity period setting process (S332), the result of the validity period determination of the large winning opening 20 is saved. Therefore, if the value of the large winning opening valid time is 0, the large winning opening valid period flag is set to a large prize. The mouth invalid period data is stored, and if it is other than 0, the big prize opening validity period data is stored in the big winning opening validity period flag.

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a state where the change can be started. When the digestion order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) it is not in the big hit or the small hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (3). ) When the second special symbol is waiting for change and (4) the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is other than 0, the special symbol can start changing. Is determined. When the digestion order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the winning order, in addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, (6) When all of the determinations, that is, the order of digestion, that is, the order of winning, are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing.

When it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start to fluctuate, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is subtracted, and an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Next, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, the random number per special symbol determines whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the design is decided. In the determination of the symbol, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol hit symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the miss symbol is lost. Is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is determined based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit symbol determined in the symbol determination process, and the special symbol Set the game state after the big hit, such as the operation content of the fluctuation time shortening function and the easy winning state of the normal symbol. Next, the settings during the big hit, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big winning opening, are executed. Subsequently, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big hit based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol. Next, the start demo time and the end demo time are set with reference to the table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of the winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the content of the fluctuation pattern selection state is set, the start demo time and the end demo time are set, and the hit is made by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends. The area of the main RAM 291 used for the determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is incorrect, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, the short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the opening signal of the door / frame, and the error state changes. If there is, the error state is stored, and the sub-board 300 is requested to display the error state effect of the game machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the error state storage and the error state effect display request are not executed.

In the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 monitors the continuous on-time of each switch level in order to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, and the continuous on-time (continuous on-time) For example, if it is determined that the value of the counter that increments for each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the ball entry passage time error, the command transmission request, and the security output to the external information output terminal 160 Create output requests in order. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the abnormality of the ball entry transit time. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, the security output request is not created.

In the game state display process (S340), the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol are requested to be displayed. Create data.

In the handle state signal inspection process (S342), in order to monitor the touch state of the handle, the handle state is inspected, and if it is determined that the handle state has changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is subtracted and the handle state is changed. Update, set the handle status monitoring timer, and execute the command transmission request for the handle status effect. If it is determined as a result of the inspection that there is no change in the handle status, the handle status monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle status monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output processing (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are continuous. Initialize the display to display the number of times the LED is activated, the operating status of the special electric accessory when the continuous operating device is not operating, the striking display, the error display, and the prize ball ratio display. , Acquire and output display data in order.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, the setting of the prohibition / permit for launching corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition / permission data, the firing prohibition / permission signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test apparatus is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output processing (S350), in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 is obtained. Acquire and output data. The operation flag and the operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and the solenoid operation timer is acquired. Then, the solenoid operation timer is updated and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the effect control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a transmission request for the command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300 is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the command buffer used is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, retain MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include a random number per ordinary symbol and a random number per fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol as random numbers related to the ordinary symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as a random number related to the special symbol. , There are soft random numbers per special symbol, symbol random numbers per special symbol, and variable pattern random numbers. In addition, as random numbers for giving initial values of normal symbol per random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number, which are initial value update type random numbers, normal symbol per initial value random number and special symbol per symbol initial value are used. There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per normal symbol is the number of pending changes in the normal symbol when it is determined in the interrupt processing normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for hit determination and determination of the stop symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 232, for example, is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is reserved for normal symbol fluctuation when it is determined in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When the number is less than the upper limit value of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) that the normal symbol variation is to be started.

The random number per special symbol is obtained when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , The values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and both are added to generate the value, which is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per special symbol is used to execute the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). It is obtained from the predetermined position of, and is used to generate a random number per special symbol as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is set at a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). Is acquired from a predetermined position of the above and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The symbol random number per special symbol is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the hit determination is a jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is determined by the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). Obtained from the position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The initial value random number per ordinary symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol have the same range of values as the random number per ordinary symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per ordinary symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are the random number per ordinary symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the special random number per initial value update type random number update process (S308). It is used as the initial value of each random number when updating the soft random number per symbol.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. To. That is, the normal symbol per random number, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol per random number, the special symbol per soft random number, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the time from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process differs depending on the game state and the like, the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) includes various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), It is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when the initial value is set in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random every time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the sub-board 300 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initial process execution means 360, and will be described below as being executed by the sub CPU 310 that functions as the sub-initial process execution means 360. When the control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and sets registers and initializes ports of the sub CPU 310. Perform the initial settings related to the hardware (S504). The control program is read from the sub ROM 312 and placed in the sub RAM 311, and among various variables in the control program, the initial value is set for the variable having the initial value, and the zero clear data is set for the variable without the initial value. This initializes the sub RAM 311 (S506). The interrupt process on the sub-board 300 includes a process when the power is turned on and a reset process when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled, as interrupt processes that are executed with the highest priority. Next, as an interrupt process of priority level 7 having a high execution priority, there is a command process received from the main board 200, and as an interrupt process of priority level 3 having the next highest priority, CPU runaway detection by the watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The next priority interrupt process for priority level 2 includes processing related to commands sent and received to and from the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority level 1 interrupt process is communication processing with the real-time clock. There are various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the above various processes occur at the same time, the interrupts set in advance for each interrupt type are executed with priority. The processes shown in this figure include the highest priority level interrupt, the process when the power is turned on, the reset process when various abnormalities occur, and the priority level 3 interrupt, which is the reset process when CPU runaway is detected. Including.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the model is set from all the error information stored in advance for all models (S512). .. All the lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main process of S518 does not return to the main flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. In order to check in the main process of this figure whether the control program arranged in the sub RAM 311 is correctly arranged in S506 of FIG. 20, the start address for starting the check is acquired (S530), and in the subsequent processes. All interrupts are allowed (S532), and device initialization operations such as motors and solenoids are executed (S534).

If the setting is to use the watchdog timer, clear the watchdog timer (S536), update the decorative symbol counter so that the combination of the decorative symbols is a random combination (S540), and input the sub CPU 310. (S542). Since S540 is a process in a method of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using a counter, in the case of a method of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using a lottery sheet incorporating all the symbol combinations that are the out-of-order symbols. Does not execute the processing of S540. The process of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later in S552. The sub CPU 310, which functions as the sub-error detecting means 364, monitors the error state, notifies the error when various errors are detected (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546), and executes the process. The advance notice lottery is executed (S548). In the advance notice lottery in S548, since the command of the advance notice effect to appear immediately after the start of the symbol change is transmitted to the effect control device 313 as soon as possible, the lottery process is not processed in one loop but a plurality of times. It is divided into loops, and the notice effect that appears immediately after the start of the symbol change is drawn in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, or solenoid, that operation is executed (S550), the command saved in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if immediately after the command analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Return (Y in S554), if not immediately after command analysis (N in S554), update the lottery software random number as a low priority process that can be performed in free time (S556), and return to the process in S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed shows the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552, and when the command to be analyzed indicates the stop symbol of the special symbol, the lottery sheet is displayed. If the method is used to determine the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command having the highest priority next to the reset interrupt and the error interrupt. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in a row, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600), and the confirmed command is the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). The hard random number is acquired for the subsequent processing (S606), and the original routine is returned. By acquiring the hard random number each time the main command is interrupted from the main board 200 in this way, the random number acquisition timing is not caused to be periodic, and the randomness of the value is enhanced. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in a row (up to 5 times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), and if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data). The command write pointer which is the read position in the ring buffer) is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command light pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned. If the first command has not been received in S608, skip S610 and later (N in S608) and return to the original routine.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command related to the effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and is generated in a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data is transmitted to the control CPU 320 up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives a command indicating that the command data has been normally received on the control CPU 320 side from the control CPU 320. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N in S622), S624 and subsequent steps are skipped and the original routine is returned.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command received by the sub CPU 310 from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been normally received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is for controlling a lamp such as a decorative lamp 111, controlling a solenoid or a motor for driving a movable accessory 66, and managing and controlling various timers, and is generated at a cycle of 1 ms. Since it is the lowest priority level 1 interrupt, the interrupt of priority level 2 or higher is permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the effect button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power failure , Processes the input / output of ports that input / output drive signals to controlled devices such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating a power failure is input, the backup process is immediately started. A timer is used to update the data related to device control (S644), such as counting processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on / off control of the buffer for writing data to the port in S642. Update (S646), update the timer for managing the input valid time of the effect button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 and runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. To create a 16 ms cycle (S650).

The minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Further, when counting a relatively long period such as an error notification for 30 seconds, if a count with a 10 interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value becomes longer than necessary, but 16 ms. The count value can be shortened by using the count value of the cycle.

The task control includes 16 types of tasks from processes 0 to 15, one of which is the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks are the runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter to realize switching in a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processes 0 and 8, and when the count values of the task control counters are 0 and 8, that is, once every 80 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring is realized in a cycle of 8 ms.

A toggle signal that is on / off inverted for each frame is output from the control CPU 320, and if this toggle signal does not change continuously at the same value for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 Sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 in a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), it is monitored in a cycle of 8 ms shorter than that cycle. Finally, the timer that manages the relatively long error notification period such as the error notification for 30 seconds as described above is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends at the time-out.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol variation. When the second winning / failing lottery value is held (Y in S700), the second winning / failing determination means 222 reads the second winning / failing lottery value and determines whether or not the second special symbol 52 is correct (S702), and the second winning / failing is determined. The determination means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determining means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and issues a variation start command together with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to start the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

When the second winning / failing lottery value is not held (N in S700) and the first winning / failing lottery value is held (Y in S708), the first winning / failing determination means 221 is the first winning / losing lottery. The value is read out and the hit / fail of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first hit / miss determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 is the first. 1 The variation pattern of the special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and the variation start command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 together with the determined result to start the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first winning / failing lottery value is not held, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

The symbol variation display of the special symbol is processed (S718), S718 is repeated until the predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the symbol display is stopped after the predetermined variation time elapses. When the timing is reached (Y in S720), a fluctuation stop command is sent to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol fluctuation being displayed at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is finished. To do.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying decorative symbol variation. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the variation start and the effect display content from the main substrate 200 (S750), and stops the decorative symbol according to the received special symbol stop symbol, variation pattern, and hit / fail determination result. The aspect is determined (S752), and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, when the precursor setting is turned on by the preliminary determination (Y in S756), the already determined variable effect pattern includes a specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposed on the advance notice effect. If it is not (N of S758) and it is not a symbol change that is the trigger for turning on the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting for displaying the predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is set. If it is a symbol change that is an on-trigger (Y in S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). When the precursor setting is not turned on (N in S756) or when the variable effect pattern includes a specific effect content (Y in S758), the processes of S760 to S764 are skipped.

After that, the variation effect display of the decorative symbol is started (S766), the variation effect display process of the decorative symbol and (S768) are executed, the notice effect display process is executed (S770), and the variation stop command is received from the main board 200. When S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772) and the fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the symbol variation display is stopped by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774). ), The variation effect of the decorative pattern is completed (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect process of the special game (S800), and the open / close control means 275 opens the grand prize opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not passed (N of S804) and the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the game returns to S804 (N of S806), and the predetermined opening time has passed (N of S806). Although the opening time has not passed (Y of S804) (N of S804), when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y of S806), the opening / closing control means 275 is the large winning opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds to return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display is displayed. The control means 305 ends the effect processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts the execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, the time saving, and the easy-to-enter state (S818). ).

Here, the start of the effect processing of the special game (S800) is the effect time for notifying the player of the start of the game related to the big hit (a special game in which the special electric accessory is continuously operated based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device). When the game state before the transition is a specific game state (probability change game or time saving game) when shifting to the jackpot game, the normal game state (probability fluctuation function, time saving function is turned off) The process of setting the game to be executed, the process of setting the content of the jackpot game to be executed, and the process of setting the sub control command are performed. On the other hand, the process related to the end of the special game effect process (S814) is a standby process or sub-control for securing an effect time for notifying the player about the end of the jackpot game and the presence or absence of the transition to the specific game state. The command transmission process is executed. The start of the effect processing (S800) and the end of the effect process (S814) of these special games are called "big hit (role) start demo" and "big hit (role) end demo".

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of the small hit game. In the small hit game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the large winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822). When the time has passed (Y of S822), the large winning opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the opening and closing of the set number of times has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of opening and closing to return to S820. (S828) If the opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y in S826), the small hit game is ended.

When the small hit game is performed, the same control related to the time called "start demo" and "end demo" may be performed as in the big hit game described above. In addition, when executing a small hit game, generally, even if the small hit game is started in the specific game state, unlike the big hit game, the small hit game is different from the big hit game unless the specific game satisfies other end conditions. There is no transition to the normal game triggered by the execution of (the process of turning off the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function is not performed).

In the prerequisite technique, the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game, that is, the second game has one big hit than the first game. Although it was designed to have a higher expected value of winning a prize ball in, in another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value of winning a prize ball than the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected value of winning the prize ball in the first game and the second game is substantially equal to each other. In the latter case, it may be designed so that the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game is equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which a unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in a second game, a special game in which a unit game is executed four times with a probability of 50% is executed. However, there may be a special game in which the unit game is executed 16 times with a probability of 50%. Further, in any case, when a specific area is provided in the large winning opening and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game is completed. It may be configured so that a specific game such as a probabilistic state is performed. In this case, the special game executed when the big hit is made in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game which is executed when the big hit is made in the first game. It may be configured so that the probability that the normal game in the probabilistic state is executed after the end of the special game is high. For example, the first hit in which a special game in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area is executed, and the second hit in which a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area is executed. It may be provided so that the second game has a higher probability of being a second hit than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of a second hit in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of a second hit in the second game may be configured to be 100%.

(Prerequisite technology 2)
Next, the basic configuration of the slot machine will be described as a prerequisite technology.
FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a basic structure on the outer surface of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 is mainly a box-shaped housing base 1102, a housing door 1104 provided on the front surface of the housing base 1102, and various types provided on the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. It is equipped with a device. The housing door portion 1104 is a door body that is openably and closably attached to the opening of the housing base 1102, and the housing of the slot machine 1010 can be formed by integrating the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. Form. The housing door portion 1104 is locked during the business hours of the game store to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 1010. Access to the interior is only possible when the housing door 1104 is unlocked by an employee of the amusement store.

A transparent window 1132 is provided in the housing door portion 1104 substantially in the center of the front surface thereof, and a reel rotating inside is visually recognized through the transparent window 1132. An effect display device 1130 for displaying the effect content is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the housing door portion 1104. In the operation area provided below the transparent window 1132 in the housing door portion 1104, a first bet button 1112a, a second bet button 1112b, a settlement button 1113, a cross key 1118, an effect button 1120, and a medal insertion slot 1110 are provided. Be done. The first bet button 1112a is a button for placing one medal (hereinafter, also referred to as "bet"), and the second bet button 1112b is a so-called max bet button, which is a maximum number of bets of three. It is a button for playing medals. The settlement button 1113 is a button for instructing the player to pay out the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 1110 and stored as a stored medal or the bet medal. The cross key 1118 and the effect button 1120 are operation input means for receiving the operation input of the player as the effect. Below the bet buttons 1112a and b, a start lever 1114 is provided for the player to instruct the start of rotation of the reel. To the right of the start lever 1114, a left stop button 1116a, a middle stop button 1116b, and a right stop button 1116c for instructing the rotation stop of the three reels are provided. A medal payout port 1108 and a medal tray 1106 are provided below the housing door portion 1104, and speakers 1122 are provided on the left and right sides of the payout port 1108. A plurality of effect lamps 1124 are provided at a plurality of places such as the outer periphery of the housing door portion 1104.

A status display lamp, a number of times display lamp, a stored number display lamp, and a payout number display lamp are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 1130 (not shown). For example, the status display lamp turns on when a bonus game or AT (assist time) starts, and turns off when it ends. The number-of-times display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of times a bonus game or AT is executed. The stored number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of stored (credited) game medals. The payout number display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of game medals to be paid out when a small winning combination is established. When some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1010, the payout number display lamp displays alphabetic characters indicating the type of the error. For example, there are a hopper empty error, a game medal payout error, a game medal retention error, a game medal backflow error, an auxiliary storage full error, a rotating cylinder stop error, a set value error, and the like. The hopper empty error is an error when the game medal in the hopper tank 1162 is emptied. The game medal payout error is an error when the game medal is paid out at a timing different from the original one. The game medal retention error is an error when the game medal is jammed inside the medal slot 1110. The game medal backflow error is an error when the game medal advances in a direction different from the original route, such as when the game medal invades from a position different from the medal insertion slot 1110. The auxiliary storage full error is an error when the game medals in the hopper tank 1162 are full. The rotation stop error is an error when each reel does not stop at a predetermined position. The set value error is an error when the set value is out of the predetermined numerical range.

FIG. 31 is a rear view of the housing door portion 1104 that is exposed when the housing door portion 1104 is opened. A transparent window 1132 is provided substantially in the center. A sub-control device 1300, which is a so-called sub-board, is installed on the upper part to control the effect in the game. A medal selector 1150 is provided below the transparent window 1132, a medal guide path 1152 is provided on the right side thereof, and a medal return path 1154 is provided below the medal selector path 1152. When a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot described later, the medal selector 1150 distributes the medal to the medal guidance path 1152 if the medal can be accepted, and to the medal return path 1154 if the medal cannot be accepted. The medals distributed to the medal guide path 1152 are stored in the hopper tank described later through the medal guide path 1152.

FIG. 32 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the housing base 1102 that is exposed when the housing door 1104 is opened. A left reel 1160a, a middle reel 1160b, and a right reel 1160c are rotatably provided at a substantially central portion of the housing base 1102. The left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c are rotating members having a plurality of symbols printed on their outer peripheral surfaces, and each of them is rotated by the driving force of a stepping motor to rotate the symbols through the transparent window 1132. It is visually recognized by the player.

A main control device 1200, which is a so-called main board, which controls the progress of the game, is installed on the upper part of the housing base 1102. In the main control device 1200, a setting change switch 1168 is provided on the right side thereof. The setting change switch 1168 includes a button for changing the game specifications having six stages, a keyhole for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game store, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. As for the set values of the six stages associated with the different game specifications, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications are for the player. When an employee of the game store inserts the setting key into the keyhole and turns it, the setting can be changed by operating the button.

A hopper tank 1162 is provided at the lower part of the housing base 1102, and a payout device 1164 (hereinafter, also referred to as “hopper”) for paying out medals from the payout port 1108 is provided below the hopper tank 1162. On the left side of the hopper tank 1162, a power supply board 1166 that supplies electric power to each part of the slot machine 1010 is provided.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a design arrangement of reels. A string of symbols as shown in the table of the figure is printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c. Twenty symbols corresponding to symbol numbers 0 to 19 are arranged at equal intervals on each reel. When the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line among these symbols becomes the same predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination in which a predetermined combination is established, the winning of the combination is determined. On the other hand, the line in which the symbols are lined up includes a combination line that is not set as an effective line and is not treated as a winning combination even if the predetermined same symbol or a predetermined combination is stopped.

In the slot machine 1010 described above, the player awards medals by inserting one to three medals from the medal insertion slot 1110. When medals are stored as credits, the player awards one or three medals by pressing the first bet button 1112a, the second bet button 1112b, or the checkout button 1113. When the player operates the start lever 1114, the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c start rotating, and the symbol row on the reels moves at high speed in the vertical direction. When the player presses the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c in an arbitrary order, the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c is stopped in the order corresponding to the pressing order. One of the symbols is displayed at the stop position. When the combination mode of the symbols stopped on the predetermined valid line corresponds to any of a plurality of types of combinations, it is determined as "winning", and the number of medals corresponding to the types of the combination is paid out or the game state. Migration is performed.

FIG. 34 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 includes a main control device 1200 and a sub control device 1300. The main control device 1200 is electrically connected to reels 1160a to c, bet buttons 1112a and b, settlement button 1113, start lever 1114, stop buttons 1116a to c, and setting change switch 1168, and the sub control device 1300 is an effect lamp. It is electrically connected to 1124, the effect display device 1130, the speaker 1122, the cross key 1118, and the effect button 1120. The main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300 are configured to include elements such as a ROM and RAM for storing data and programs, and a CPU used for arithmetic processing, respectively, in terms of hardware, but in this figure, they are mainly software-like. I will explain the functional blocks from various perspectives.

It should be noted that each functional block included in the main control device 1200 may be configured such that one of them is mounted on the sub control device 1300 instead of the main control device 1200. Similarly, each functional block included in the sub-control device 1300 may be configured such that one of them is mounted on the main control device 1200 instead of the sub-control device 1300. However, since data transmission / reception between the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300 is in one direction from the main control device 1200 to the sub control device 1300, the entire operation is realized by data transmission / reception in such one direction. Each configuration is arranged in the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300 so as to be performed. In this way, since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control device 1200 to the sub control device 1300 is maintained, data is transmitted from the configuration included in the sub control device 1300 to the configuration included in the main control device 1200. Cannot be done, and data transmission cannot be requested. Therefore, the information generated by the main control device 1200 cannot be referred to from the sub control device 1300 unless the main control device 1200 unilaterally transmits the information to the sub control device 1300.

The main control device 1200 includes a combination lottery means 1202, a random number determination means 1204, a winning flag control means 1206, a reel control means 1208, a stop position determination table 1210, an operation order detection means 1212, a winning determination means 1214, a payout means 1216, and a special game. The control means 1218 and the setting changing means 1220 are provided.

The combination lottery means 1202 executes a combination lottery for determining a winning combination from a plurality of types of combinations when the player operates the start lever 1114, and transmits the result of the combination lottery to the sub-control device 1300. To do. The types of roles include small roles, special roles, and replaying roles, and if none of the winning combinations is decided, it will be excluded. There are multiple types of small roles, and the number of medals is paid out according to the type. Special roles include regular bonuses (first-class special bonuses, also called "RB") and big bonuses (first-class special bonuses that operate continuously are "BB", and second-class special bonuses. Those that operate continuously are also called "MB"). The replay role is also called "replay", and it is a role in which the same number of medals are inserted without inserting a new medal, and the game can be played again. The random number determination means 1204 acquires the value of the random number used for the winning combination lottery as the lottery value. The "random number" referred to in the present application does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. The winning combination lottery means 1202 determines the winning combination depending on whether or not the lottery value acquired by the random number determining means 1204 falls within any of the lottery value ranges assigned to each combination as the winning combination lottery.

The winning flag control means 1206 turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination among the plurality of flags corresponding to each combination. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a small combination, the winning combination will not be carried over, so the flag will be turned off at the end of the game regardless of whether or not there is a prize. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a special role, the winning combination will be carried over to the prize, so the flag will remain on until there is a prize, and the flag will be turned off when the prize is won. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a re-game combination, the winning combination is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends.

The reel control means 1208 controls to start the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c when the start lever 1114 is operated, and also provides information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114. It is transmitted to the control device 1300. The reel control means 1208 selects one from a plurality of stop position determination tables 1210 according to the result of the winning combination lottery. The reel control means 1208 triggers the individual pressing of the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c, and stops the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c in response to the individual pressing. While controlling, information indicating that the stop button is pressed is transmitted to the sub-control device 1300. The reel control means 1208 controls the rotation and stop of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by controlling the drive of the stepping motors provided in each of them.

Based on the stop position determination table 1210, the reel control means 1208 has the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c according to the timing and the pressing order of the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c. Determine the stop position of. The operation order detecting means 1212 detects the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are pressed. The reel control means 1208 detects the rotation positions of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by means of photosensors corresponding to the respective rotation positions.

In the stop position determination table 1210, the result of the winning combination lottery, the positions of the reels 1160a to c when the stop buttons 1116a to 1c are pressed, the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to c, and a plurality of reels 1160a to c are displayed. The correspondence relationship of which of the symbols is stopped on the effective line is determined. That is, individual stop position determination tables 1210 are prepared according to the type of small winning combination, the type of special winning combination, and the type of replaying combination. It is defined in each stop position determination table 1210. If any of the winning combinations is won, the reel control means 1208 will perform the reel control means 1208 when the pressing timing and pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1c satisfy the winning conditions based on the stop position determination table 1210 according to the winning combination. The stop positions of the reels 1160a to c are determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are aligned on the effective line. Even if any of the winning combinations is won, if the pressing timing and pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1c do not satisfy the winning conditions, the reel control means 1208 determines the stop position according to the winning combination. Based on the table 1210, the stop positions of the reels 1160a to c are determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are not aligned on the effective line. If none of the winning combinations are won, the reel control means 1208 will use the reel control means 1208 to stop the reels 1160a to c so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are not aligned on the effective line based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the combination. To determine.

In the present specification, the term "table" simply refers to data in which the correspondence between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is defined by the table structure. However, it is widely included that such a correspondence is realized by a program structure for deriving the second parameter from the first parameter. Including them, it is also referred to as "selection criteria" as appropriate as a concept that is substantially synonymous with "table". Further, when a table structure is used, the selection criteria that are substantially one type may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables, but when the term "multiple types of selection criteria" is used, the subdivisions may be used. Shows the actual number of types of tables, not the number of converted tables.

The prize-winning determination means 1214 determines that a prize has been won when the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the combinations are aligned on the effective line, and determines the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination. The payout means 1216 adds the number of payout medals determined by the winning determination means 1214 to the number of stored medals. However, when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, the excess medals are paid out by the payout device 1164. If the winning combination is a re-game combination, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are placed again. The winning determination means 1214 transmits information on winning and information on the number of medals to be paid out to the sub-control device 1300.

The special game control means 1218 controls the transition from the normal game to the special game when the special combination is won, and the transition from the special game to the normal game when the end condition of the special game is satisfied. The special game includes an RB game that shifts when the player wins the RB, a BB game that shifts when the player wins the BB, and an MB game that shifts when the player wins the MB. The RB game ends when a predetermined symbol or a predetermined combination stops 8 times on the effective line, or when a game result of 12 times is obtained. The BB game ends when the total number of medals acquired by paying out medals due to the predetermined symbol or the predetermined combination stopping on the valid line exceeds 285. The MB game ends when the total number of medals acquired by paying out medals due to the predetermined symbol or the predetermined combination stopping on the valid line exceeds 153. In addition, as a special control of the special game, the time from the operation of the stop button to the stop of the corresponding reel is shortened during the MB game, and the game start operation is performed even if the RB is not won during the BB game. It is also possible to have a control to internally shift to the RB at the same time as (lever operation).

The setting changing means 1220 determines the game specification corresponding to the set value set by the setting change switch 1168 among the six-stage game specifications, and changes the winning probability of each winning combination in the winning combination lottery by the winning combination lottery means 1202. In the 6-stage game specifications, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the higher the winning probability. Every time the setting change switch 1168 is operated, the setting value is incremented by 1 in the order of "Setting 1"-> "Setting 2"-> "Setting 3"-> ...-> "Setting 6"-> "Setting 1". Increment is circulated by returning from "Setting 6" to "Setting 1". Finally, by operating the start lever 1114, the set value selected at that time is determined, and the setting change is confirmed.

The sub-control device 1300 includes pattern storage means 1302, effect determination means 1304, and effect control means 1306. The pattern storage means 1302 stores a plurality of types of effect patterns. As the effect pattern, the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 1130 according to the progress of the game, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound pattern output from the speaker 1122, and the like are defined. The effect determining means 1304 provides information such as information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, information indicating the pressing of the stop button 1116, information indicating the result of the winning combination lottery, information on winning, and information on the number of medals to be paid out from the main control device 1200. Receive. The effect determining means 1304 becomes the pattern storage means 1302 according to the result of the winning combination lottery by the winning combination lottery means 1202, the winning situation, and the gaming state, triggered by the operation of the start lever 1114 and the stop buttons 1116a to 1c and the stop of the reels 1160a to c. Select one from multiple types of memorized production patterns. The effect control means 1306 controls the display of the effect display device 1130, the lighting of the effect lamp 1124, and the output from the speaker 1122 according to the effect pattern selected by the effect determination means 1304. The effect control means 1306 changes the display content on the effect display device 1130, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound output from the speaker 1122, and the like according to the input contents of the effect button 1120 and the cross key 1118. If the bet buttons 1112a and b and the start lever 1114 are newly operated while controlling the effect by the effect pattern, the effect control means 1306 cancels the displayed effect, and the effect determination means 1304 is used for a new game. The corresponding effect pattern is selected, and the effect control means 1306 starts the effect according to the selected effect pattern.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine 1010. First, it is assumed that none of the reels 1160a to 1c has been rotated yet (N of S1010) and no medal has been bet (N of S1012). In that state, when medals are stored as credits (Y in S1014), if any of the bet buttons 1112a and b is pressed (Y in S1016), the number of medals bet corresponding to the pressed bet button is placed. Set (S1018). If there is no credit, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped until a medal is inserted (N in S1014). Even if the bet buttons 1112a and b are not pressed in S1016, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped until the bet buttons 1112a and b are pressed (N in S1016). If a bet has already been made in S1012, S1014 to S1018 are skipped (Y in S1012).

If the start lever 1114 is operated with the bet set (Y in S1020), the winning combination lottery means 1202 executes the winning combination lottery and the advantageous game lottery (AT lottery, etc.) (S1022), and the winning flag control means 1206. Turns on the flag corresponding to the winning combination according to the result of the combination lottery (S1024), and selects the stop position determination table 1210 according to the result of the combination lottery (S1025). If 4.1 seconds have not elapsed from the end of the previous game, it waits (N in S1026), and if it has elapsed (Y in S1026), the reel control means 1208 starts rotating the reels 1160a to 1c (N) S1028), exit the routine of this flow. If there is no operation of the start lever 1114 in S1020, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped (N in S1020).

In S1010, when at least one of the reels 1160a to c is rotating (Y in S1010), and if any of the stop buttons 1116a to 1c is pressed (Y in S1030), the state of the flag indicating the winning combination, The reel stop position is determined based on the stop button pressing timing, pressing order, and stop position determination table 1210 (S1032), and the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped (S1034). If the stop button is not pressed, S1032 and S1034 are skipped (N in S1030). When all reels 1160a to 1c are stopped (Y in S1036), the winning combination is determined based on the stopped position (S1038), and if there is a winning combination, the medal is based on the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination. Is paid out (S1040). When the payout is completed, the state control process (S1042) related to the advantageous game is executed, and the transition to the advantageous game section when the transition condition to the advantageous game (AT, etc.) is satisfied, and the end condition of the advantageous game are satisfied. Control related to the end of the advantageous game section is executed. If all reels are not stopped, S1038, S1040, and S1042 are skipped (N in S1036).

As the reel stop management process, a weight time is set, a control command including information indicating that the reel is waiting to start rotating is generated, written to the command buffer, and initial values of various data used for accelerating the reel are predetermined. Store in the storage area of. It is determined whether or not all reels are rotating at a constant speed, and if it is determined that all reels are not rotating at a constant speed, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all reels is abnormal. Again, the initial values of various data used for accelerating the reels are stored in a predetermined storage area, and the confirmation of all reels is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reels are rotating at a constant speed, or if it is determined that the rotation is not abnormal, the confirmation of all reels is terminated as it is.

If the payout cannot be stored when paying out medals, the hopper payout is executed. In this hopper payout process, first, the hopper is started to be driven and waits until the payout is detected (if the payout is not detected until a predetermined time elapses, a hopper empty error occurs). If a payout is detected, the number of payouts is added, it is determined whether or not the payout is completed, and if the payout is not finished, the payout process is repeated, and if the payout is finished, the hopper drive is finished.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configurations of the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300. The main control device 1200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 1250, a main RAM 1252, and a main ROM 1254. The main ROM 1254 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 1254 into the main RAM 1252, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 1250. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). A signal indicating that a medal is inserted, a signal indicating that the bet buttons 1112a and b are pressed, a signal indicating that the settlement button 1113 is pressed, a signal indicating that the start lever 1114 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop buttons 1116a to 1c are pressed, and reels 1160a to A signal indicating the position of c is acquired by the main CPU 1250 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 1250 drives and controls an external device such as a stepping motor of reels 1160a to 1c by various drive circuits (not shown). Further, a command required for the effect control is transmitted from the main CPU 1250 to the sub control device 1300 together with the result of the winning combination lottery, the winning information, and the information indicating the operation of each button or lever.

The sub control device 1300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 1350, a sub RAM 1352, a sub ROM 1354, and an effect display control unit 1360. The sub ROM 1354 is one of the data storage means for holding the sub control program including the effect pattern data in which the effect process is defined and the display pattern data in which the effect display process is defined. It is a hardware configuration that functions as. A sub control program including effect pattern data and display pattern data is read from the sub ROM 1354 into the sub RAM 1352, and the effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 1350. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown), and is connected by bidirectional communication capable of transmitting and receiving signals to each other. For example, when a command is transmitted from the sub CPU 1350 to the effect display control unit 1360, the command is transmitted a plurality of times, and the effect display control unit 1360 sends an acknowledgment (ACK) to the sub CPU 1350 as soon as the command is appropriately received at least once. By replying, communication errors due to noise etc. are avoided. If the reception order of a plurality of commands is different from the usual one, the effect display control unit 1360 ignores the ACK without returning it, and returns only to an appropriate command. A signal from an external device such as the effect button 1120 is acquired by the sub CPU 1350 via various interfaces (not shown), and a command corresponding to the effect display control unit 1360 is transmitted according to the reception of the signal or the number of receptions. The sub CPU 1350 controls an effect by audio output by driving an external device such as a speaker 1122 by various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data. Further, the sub CPU 1350 transmits the display pattern data to the effect display control unit 1360. The sub CPU 1350 and the effect display control unit 1360 have a hardware configuration that functions as the effect determination means 1304 and the effect control means 1306 as shown in FIG. 34. In the prerequisite technology, an example in which the sub-control device 1300 includes the effect display control unit 1360 will be described, but the sub-control device 1300 and the effect display control unit 1360 do not need to be integrated as a substrate and are separated. They may be formed as separate substrates connected to each other.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect display control unit 1360. The effect display control unit 1360 includes a control CPU 1362, a control RAM 1364, a data ROM 1366, and a display control circuit 1370. The data ROM 1366 is one of the data storage means for holding the material data such as the effect image data, the motion data, and the object definition data of the three-dimensional image used for the effect display in a data-compressed state, and the pattern storage as shown in FIG. It is a hardware configuration that functions as means 1302. The effect image data is an image used for the effect display as an effect object indicating a winning determination result or the like, and is, for example, a material image such as a sprite image used for various effects and a moving image used for various effects. The motion data is data in which the motion is defined when the motion is added to the images used for various effects at a predetermined timing. Object definition data is data in which the shape of a three-dimensional object is defined.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 1350, material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data specified in the display pattern data is read from the data ROM 1366 to the control RAM 1364, and the material data is read. The effect display used is executed by the control CPU 1362. As a result, commands and material data related to the effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 1362 to the display control circuit 1370, and the display control circuit 1370 controls the display. When a signal indicating the operation of the new bet buttons 1112a, b or the start lever 1114 is received during the effect display, the sub CPU 1350 determines a new effect pattern and sends a command indicating the new effect display to the control CPU 1362. .. The sub CPU 1350 and the display control circuit 1370 have a hardware configuration that functions as the effect determining means 1304 and the effect control means 1306 as shown in FIG. 34.

The display control circuit 1370 includes a decoder 1374, a drawing memory 1376, a drawing circuit 1378, a frame buffer 1380, and a display circuit 1382, each of which is connected via a bus 1372. For convenience, bus 1372 in this figure comprehensively shows buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

Material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data sent from the control CPU 1362 are stored in the drawing memory 1376, and the compressed data among the data is decoded by the decoder 1374. The drawing memory 1376 is used as a work area when decoding the effect image data or motion data by the decoder 1374, or is used as a work area when executing drawing processing or image processing by the drawing circuit 1378. ).

The drawing circuit 1378 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 1376 to execute commands sent from the control CPU 1362 in order to generate a display image, and the generated display image is used as a frame of a moving image as a frame buffer. Store in 1380. The frame buffer 1380 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 1130. The frame buffer 1380 and the drawing memory 1376 may be formed by forming a single VRAM and sharing the area.

The display circuit 1382 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 1380 to the effect display device 1130 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 1380 has, for example, a memory area for two frames, and while the display circuit 1382 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 1378 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for another frame.

The slot machine 1010 is powered by a power supply board 1166 that functions as a power supply. A power switch and a reset switch are connected to the power supply device, and signals from each of these switches are transmitted to the main CPU 1250. The power switch is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device to the slot machine 1010. The reset switch is a switch for resetting each circuit or the like mounted on the main control device 1200 when an error occurs in the slot machine 1010 or the like. The electric power from the power supply device is supplied to the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300. On the power supply path from the power supply device to the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300, a power supply monitoring means for monitoring the supply voltage and detecting a power failure when the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage is provided. The power supply monitoring means determines that the power supply is cut off when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage, and outputs a power supply cutoff detection signal to the main CPU 1250 or the sub CPU 1350. The reference voltage value when detecting the power failure of the main control device 1200 is set to a value higher than the reference voltage value when detecting the power failure of the sub control device 1300, and is set before the sub control device 1300. The main control device 1200 executes a process programmed to be executed when the power is cut off (power cutoff process).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a main program control process of the main control device 1200 in the slot machine 1010. In the game control process executed by the main control device 1200, first, the game start process is executed (S1100), the game medal management process is executed (S1102), and the number of bets matches the specified number as the start conditions, and When the operation of the start lever is accepted (Y in S1104), the lever reception processing is executed (S1106), and when at least one of the start conditions is not satisfied (N in S1104), the process returns to S1102. Following S1106, the combination determination process is executed (S1108), and whether or not to execute the freeze (effect) as the freeze lottery process and the effect mode during the freeze are determined (S1110). Further, the advantageous game lottery, which is a lottery related to the transition to the advantageous game section, is executed according to the combination lottery result and the current game state (S1112). A reel stop management process such as waiting for a weight time is executed (S1114), and a stop display symbol determination process is executed to determine whether or not a game combination has been established (S1116). Next, the game medal payout process is executed (S1118), the game end process is executed (S1120), the process returns to S1100, and the flow of this figure is repeated.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the main control device 1200. In this timer interrupt process, processing such as reading each game operation signal output, detecting (confirming) the signal level, and transmitting each control command in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by the player is performed. It is performed every fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). First, interrupt initial processing (register save, interrupt prohibition, etc.) is executed (S1200), it is determined whether or not a power failure is detected, and if a power failure is detected (Y in S1202), the power supply is supplied. The disconnection process is executed (S1204). In the power off processing, registers are saved, stack pointers are saved, interrupt states are saved, and the like. In addition, information on the combination determination result and information on the RT game state stored in a predetermined storage area, checksum calculation and storage, and the like are processed. If no power failure is detected (N in S1202), timer measurement is executed (S1206). The timer measurement measures the elapsed time or the like of an arbitrary timer set in the game control process. Next, control of the display lamp (update of the display value in the display lamp based on the control data output to the output port, etc.) is executed (S1208), and further, reading of the input port is executed (S1020). In reading the input port, the signal level of each game operation signal input to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, reel drive control (S1212) for controlling acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, and the like of reel rotation is repeated until all reels are completed (S1214). Next, a port output process for exciting output of the reel, hopper, blocker, etc. is executed (S1216), and a control command transmission process is executed (S1218). The outer end signal data stored in the predetermined storage area is read out, the outer end signal is output (S1220), the interrupt end processing (register return, interrupt permission, etc.) is executed (S1222), and the interrupt return. To do.

As another control process executed by the main control device 1200, there is a main control power-on process. The main control power-on process is a process performed when the power supply to the main control device 1200 is started (when the power is turned on). The temporary stack pointer is set, the checksum is calculated, and the check is performed, and the power return process is executed. It will be processed so that it can be done. The stack pointer is returned and the interrupt is activated, and the game is played based on the information on the combination determination result and the information on the RT game state stored in the predetermined storage area when the power is turned off.

(First Example)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-mentioned prerequisite technology. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technique will be described with the same reference numerals.

Further, in the following description, the process of displaying the effect image on the effect display device 60 will be described as the operation of the effect determination means 303, but as described above, the effect determination means actually realized by the sub CPU 310. The effect 303 (sub-main) transmits a command related to the effect image to be displayed to the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) realized by the control CPU 320, and the effect control means 304 controls the display control circuit 326 to control the effect image. Is displayed on the effect display device 60. Therefore, the operation described with the effect determining means 303 as the main body in the following description may be expressed with the effect control means 304 or the display control circuit 346 as the main body. In the following description, the configuration for displaying an image can be appropriately replaced with a configuration for outputting the information indicated by the image by voice.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technology, includes a plurality of starting winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, a plurality of holding lamps, and one large winning opening. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technology, changes the second special symbol 52 (hereinafter, also referred to as “special symbol 2”) with the first special symbol 51 (hereinafter, also referred to as “special symbol 2”). Priority is given to the fluctuation of "Special Figure 1" (hereinafter, also referred to as "Special Figure 1") (Special Figure 2 priority digestion). On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technology in that it has a function of a small hit V.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery is executed, and the determination result of the lottery is determined. When it becomes a big hit, a special game in which the big winning opening 20 repeatedly opens is started. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first winning or losing lottery or the second winning or losing lottery is a predetermined result called a small hit, a small hit game in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time is executed. This small hit game is distinguished from a big hit because it has only one unit game that is repeated a plurality of times in the case of a big hit.

When a small hit game is being executed, when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening enters a specific area called the V zone in the big winning opening, the special electric accessory is continuously operated to execute the big hit game. A special game is executed in which the condition device for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory is activated, the ball is promoted from a small hit to a big hit, and the big winning opening is opened for a long time. So-called small hit V is generated. That is, in the special game control means 260, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game is a specific area inside the big winning opening 20. A special game is executed when passing through. Therefore, the small hit game in the first embodiment has substantially the same operation as the conventional type 2 pachinko game. The difference between the model that adopts the small hit V and the second type pachinko game is that in the small hit V, the stop display mode of the special symbol that triggered the execution of the small hit game (so-called one type of hit type) The point is that the condition device (continuous operation device for the accessory) that operates when the ball enters a specific area can be made different, and the profit obtained by one V winning can be changed.

When the special game is completed, the game shifts to a specific game called a variable time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction") with a predetermined probability (100% in the first embodiment). The time reduction is continued until a new big hit occurs or the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number after the end of the special game. The time reduction of the first embodiment is a state in which the ease of entering the ball into the second starting winning opening is higher than that of the normal state, and corresponds to the easy-to-enter state in the prerequisite technique, and is also called an electric chew support. The time reduction includes (1) shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, (2) probabilistic change of the normal symbol, (3) shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and (4) extending the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is an entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12 changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.

Further, as will be described later, in the winning / failing lottery triggered by entering the ball into the second starting port 12, the probability of being judged as a small hit is set high. Therefore, a small hit is likely to occur during a short time when the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is increased, and the possibility of a small hit V is also increased. It should be noted that the big hit compared with the small hit V, and the big hit in which the special game is started when the symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the manner indicating the big hit is also referred to as a "design big hit" below. In a normal game in a normal state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to enter the ball into the second starting port 12 except for the situation of chance production (first hit of the normal symbol) described later, so first enter the first starting port 11. Make a ball, get the symbol jackpot of special figure 1, and shift to a shorter time. Then, in a short time, the ball is entered into the second starting port 12 to obtain a small hit V or a symbol big hit, and the time reduction continues even after the end of the special game, so that the small hit V and the symbol big hit are continuously aimed at. It becomes. In the pachinko gaming machine that adopts the small hit V as in the first embodiment, the big hit that develops from the small hit that is not affected by the set value when the setting function is installed is the main game purpose in the specific game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the setting difference of the game playability during the specific game as compared with the specific game (probability change state) in the model having the probability change function related to the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol such as the premise technology. Specifically, in the case of a model that adopts a small hit V (small hit probability 1/100) when performing a specific game that continues 100 times, there is a possibility that a big hit can be obtained from the small hit during the specific game. Although it is 63%, in the case of a probabilistic machine such as the prerequisite technology (probability during probabilistic change: setting 1 = 1/100, setting 6 = 1/80), the probability of becoming a big hit during probabilistic change is 63% (setting 1) ~. It changes significantly to 71% (setting 6).

FIG. 40 shows the main game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. As described above, in the normal state (during the normal game in the normal state), the ball is entered into the first starting port 11 to aim at obtaining the symbol jackpot according to the special figure 1. The symbol jackpot of the special figure 1 is a so-called first hit, and includes a 15R jackpot to which 9 time reductions are given, a 4R jackpot to which 9 time reductions are given, and a 4R jackpot to which 1 time reduction is given. One of these plurality of types of jackpots is assigned based on the type of jackpot symbol.

When the time saving 9 times is given, the game shifts to the normal game in the time saving state after the end of the special game, and the time saving state is the case where a big hit (including both the symbol big hit and the small hit V) occurs, or the normal game. It means that the variation of the special figure 2 in FIG. 2 is terminated when it is executed 9 times. In addition, when one time reduction is given, the game shifts to the normal game in the time reduction state after the end of the special game, and when a big hit occurs in the time reduction state, or the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the normal game is executed once. It means to end when it is done. It should be noted that the time saving end condition described here is described on the assumption that a preferable game is performed in order to obtain a ball in the design of the gaming machine, and the detailed ending condition will be described later.

In the case of a big hit in which 9 times of time reduction is given, after the special game is completed, the game is shifted to the normal game in the time reduction state, and while the change of special figure 2 is executed 9 times and the symbol change of 4 pending pieces remaining at the end of the change. The rush effect is displayed while (typically four fluctuations in Special Figure 2) is executed. In addition, in the case of a big hit in which one time reduction is given, after the end of the special game, the game is shifted to the normal game in the time reduction state, and while the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 is executed once and for the four holdings existing at the end of the special game. The chance effect is displayed while the symbol variation (typically, the four variation of the special figure 2) is executed. If no big hit occurs due to the symbol fluctuation during the time reduction and the symbol fluctuation for 4 pending items, it returns to the normal time.

In the symbol fluctuation during the time reduction, or in the four symbol fluctuations after the time reduction ends, the small hit V (special figure 2 small hit V) and the special figure triggered by the change result of the special figure 2 becoming a small hit. 2 symbol jackpots or special symbol 1 symbol jackpots can occur. Special Figure 2 Small hit V is divided into 15R big hit, which is given 9 times of time saving, 10R big hit, which is given 9 times of time saving, and 5R big hit, which is given 9 times of time saving. The special figure 2 symbol jackpot is a 5R jackpot that is given 9 times in a short time. The special figure 1 symbol jackpot is divided into either a 15R jackpot that is given 9 times of working hours and a 4R jackpot that is given 9 times of working hours. When these big hits are finished, the game returns to the normal game (rush effect) in the time saving state, and the aim is to acquire the big hit again by the symbol change during the time saving or the symbol change four times after the time saving.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment can open the normal electric accessory 90 for a long time in the normal game in the normal state when the normal symbol hits. Then, the chance effect (normal electric opening effect) is displayed even during the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and during the symbol change of the special figure 2 held during that period. In the variable effect related to the special figure 2 hold that occurs during the normal game in the normal state, since it is a big chance to acquire the small hit V, the special effect that looks different from the variable effect of the special figure 1 executed in the same state. Is to execute. Even during the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 2 hold, the special figure 2 small hit V, the special figure 2 symbol big hit, or the special figure 1 symbol big hit may occur.

FIG. 41 shows the basic structure of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment on the front side. The first starting port 11 is the lower center of the game area 81, and is provided at a lower position of the center decoration 64. The first operating port 31 is provided at an upper position of the first starting port 11. The first starting port 11 and the first operating port 31 allow a game ball launched with a first strength (relatively weak strength in the first embodiment, in other words, left-handed) to enter or easily enter. It is provided at the position. On the other hand, the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 20, and the second operating port 32 are launched with a strength different from the first strength (relatively strong strength in the first embodiment, in other words, right-handed). It is provided at a position where the ball can enter or is easily entered. In the first embodiment, the left-handed game ball is prevented from entering the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 20, and the second operating port 32, and the right-handed game ball is referred to as the first starting port 11. A game nail and a windmill are arranged in the game area 81 so as not to enter the first operating port 31, and a flow path of the game ball is set.

Inside the big winning opening 20, a specific area is provided in which a small hit development big hit is generated by the passage of the game ball, and the specific area passage detection device 504 sets the specific area when the game ball passes through the specific area. Detect that. The specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 controls a switching member that switches the state of the specific area between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass and an open state in which the game ball can pass. The specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 controls the switching member so as to open the specific area when the result of the winning / failing lottery (which can be said to be the result of the winning / failing determination) is a small hit according to the control of the opening / closing control means 275. When a ball entering a specific area is detected, a decision is made to shift to a special game. If the ball entering the specific area is not detected, the game returns to the normal game after the small hit game is completed.

The special game according to the first embodiment includes a first special game (symbol big hit) executed when the symbol at the time of stopping becomes a big hit, and a small hit after the symbol at the time of stopping becomes a small hit. There is a second special game (small hit V) that is executed when it develops into a big hit. The first special game is the same as the special game shown in the prerequisite technique, that is, it is triggered by a symbol jackpot. The second special game is a special game that accompanies the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, triggered by the fact that the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game (also referred to as "V winning"). Is.

A status display lamp 502 for indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 500 is provided at the lower right position on the outside of the gaming area 81. The status indicator lamp 502 is composed of, for example, two lamps, and the first lamp indicates whether or not the time-saving state (in this embodiment, usually accompanied by an easy-to-enter state of the electric accessory), and the second lamp. The lamp indicates whether or not the game is in a game state in which a right-handed hit should be made (a state in which a normal electric accessory is easy to enter or a state in which a special electric accessory is operating). The first lamp is turned on when the normal game is in the time saving state, and is turned off when the normal game is in the normal state. The second lamp is turned on in the game state in which the player should hit right, that is, in the time saving state, the small hit game state, or the special game state, and is turned off in the normal state. Therefore, the second lamp of the status display lamp 502 functions as a so-called right-handed indicator lamp, and indicates whether or not the game state is such that right-handed strike should be performed in a certain display mode.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the probability of the symbol jackpot of the special figure 1 and the probability of the symbol jackpot of the special figure 2 are both 1/319. Since the pachinko gaming machine 500 does not have a probability fluctuation function for special symbols, the probability of a symbol jackpot does not change, and a lottery is always performed with a constant probability for each probability determined by the set value. Further, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, and the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is 1/10. As a modification, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 may be larger than 0 (for example, 1/500), but is set to a value smaller than at least the small hit probability of the special figure 2.

Further, in the small hit game, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the large winning opening 20 for a predetermined time (for example, 1.6 seconds) of 1.8 seconds or less, and during that time, the specific area inside the large winning opening 20 is also open. Control to be. The large winning opening 20 preferably adopts a slide type attacker type (a type in which the game ball can roll on the lid member of the large winning opening and can enter the ball when the lid member is opened), and further, the large winning opening The flow path on the upper part of the 20 or in the vicinity of the large winning opening 20 is configured such that a plurality of game balls stay in the vicinity of the entrance (lid portion or the like) of the large winning opening 20, for example, in a zigzag shape. Further, the opening pattern of the large winning opening 20 is such that the opening of 0.124 seconds is repeated 13 times with a predetermined closing time in between, and even if the player's launch is delayed, the game ball is inserted. It is preferable to design it so that it can be used. As a result, when the large winning opening 20 is opened for a short time in the small hit game, it is possible to generate a ball entering the large winning opening 20 and a small hit V with a high probability. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is configured so that if a small hit occurs, a substantially small hit V can be obtained.

FIG. 42 shows the breakdown of the jackpots in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. The symbol jackpot of the special figure 1 includes a 15R jackpot of 9 time reductions, a 4R jackpot of 9 time reductions, and a 4R jackpot of 1 time reduction, and the distribution probabilities are 1%, 49%, and 50%. It should be noted that the 4R jackpot with one time reduction during the time reduction has the same control as the 4R jackpot with nine time reductions. Therefore, in the big hit during the time reduction, all the time reduction 9 times are given. The symbol jackpot of special figure 2 is a 5R jackpot of 9 times in a short time. The small hit V of the special figure 2 includes a 15R big hit of 9 times of time reduction, a 10R big hit of 9 times of time reduction, and a 5R big hit of 9 times of time reduction, and the distribution probabilities are 60%, 10%, and 30%. In this embodiment, the maximum number of time reductions is set to 9, but the lottery with a small hit probability of 1/10 can be performed 9 times, and the large hit probability based on the small hit or the symbol big hit during the time reduction is Although it is set to about 61%, as a premier hit, a small hit V and a symbol big hit that will be a time saving of 100 are provided to substantially guarantee the next continuation (with a probability of about 99.9%, the next small hit during the time saving). It may have a gaming state that gives the player a sense of security that he / she can win, including the case where a hit and a big hit of a symbol can be obtained).

1. 1. Composition related to time saving and open lottery (ordinary design lottery):
There are three types of open lottery results: out, first hit, and second hit. The first hit is a hit that accompanies the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 for a long time, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 1/590 (special symbol variation conversion). The second hit is a hit accompanied by the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 for a short time, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 3/590. In the time saving state, the winning probability of the first hit is about 10/11, and the winning probability of the second hit is 0.

In the normal game in the normal state, the open / close control means 275 has a plurality of game balls when the open lottery is the first hit (winning probability 1/590) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the first hit. The normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a predetermined time (hereinafter, also referred to as "long opening time") set to be equal to or longer than the time interval in which the ball is fired, in other words, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting port 12. The normal electric accessory 90 is controlled to be in the open state so as to be. Here, the time interval (the shortest time interval) in which the two game balls are continuously fired may be 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds. The long opening time is less than 6 seconds, and is a value equal to or greater than the time interval in which the upper limit of the number of reserved balls (4 in the first embodiment) of the special figure 2 (second winning / failing lottery value) is launched. You may. Further, the long opening time may be a value equal to or longer than the time expected to be required from the start of launching the game ball to the increase of the special figure 2 hold from 0 to 4. The long opening time in the first embodiment is 5.9 seconds.

The opening / closing control means 275 is the above-mentioned length even when the open lottery is the first hit (the winning probability is 10/11) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode indicating the first hit in the normal game in the time saving state. During the opening time, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened. The long opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the normal state and the long opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the short time state may be different, but in each time, a plurality of (preferably 4) games are played. It is set to a value greater than or equal to the time interval at which the ball is fired. In this way, by opening the normal electric accessory 90 for a long time with the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, it is possible to provide the player with a chance to accumulate a plurality of special figure 2 holds even in the normal state. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a chance to acquire a small hit V multiple times. For example, in the game flow of FIG. 26, it is possible to provide a route that shifts to a continuous villa state from a normal time through a hit of a normal symbol.

When the result of the open lottery is the second hit, the opening time (“short opening time”) of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is shorter than the long opening time, and the maximum number of balls entering the second starting port 12 is It may be set to the time when one or two can be used. Further, the short opening time may be set to a time when it is practically difficult to enter the ball into the second starting port 12.

The operation termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is that the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened for a predetermined time, or the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 is the special figure 2 (here, the second winning / failing lottery value). It means that the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces (4 pieces in the first embodiment) has been reached. The opening / closing control means 275 (1) reaches a long opening time (in the case of the first hit) or a short opening time (in the case of the second hit) after controlling the ordinary electric accessory 90 to the open state. When at least one of the above and (2) the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 has reached four is satisfied, the normal electric accessory 90 is controlled to the closed state. In other words, the state of the normal electric accessory 90 is switched so that the ball cannot enter the second starting port 12 (difficult as a modification).

The long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in a normal game that does not go through a big hit (time reduction) is an exceptional game flow (probability 1/590). Due to the above operation end condition, it is possible to suppress excessive occurrence of small hit V in a normal game that does not go through a big hit (time reduction), which is an exceptional game flow, and it becomes easy to stabilize the ball output rate within the design range. .. In addition, it prevents the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 from exceeding the assumed value of 4 times when the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a long time in the normal state, and the ball ejection rate is based on the assumption of 4 fluctuations in Special Figure 2. Will be easier to achieve.

The conditions for ending the time reduction are (1) that a big hit or a small hit has occurred, and (2) the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is 9 times (when 9 times of time reduction is given) or 1 time (when 1 time reduction is given). It has been reached, (3) the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 has reached 7 times, and (4) the total number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 15 times (when the time reduction is 9 times) or 7 times. It is satisfied when any of the things that have been reached (in the case of granting once in a short time) are established. The specific game control means 270 shifts the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the time reduction, and counts the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 during the time reduction individually. When the above-mentioned end condition is satisfied, the specific game control means 270 ends the time reduction. When any of the above (2), (3) and (4) is satisfied, the specific game control means 270 returns the game state of the normal game to the normal state.

In this way, by setting each of the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 as the end condition of the time reduction, the value of one time reduction can be guaranteed. That is, by the time the fluctuation of the special figure 1 reaches 7 times, it can be expected that the ball enters the long open second starting port 12, and if the ball enters the second starting port 12, the special figure 1 Special figure 2 fluctuates with priority, and a small hit (and a small hit V) can be obtained with a high probability. The number of fluctuations of special figure 1 under the time saving end condition is 7 times, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved numbers (4 pieces) of special figure 1 that may exist at the end of the special game, and the first start that may occur when the player accidentally hits the left This is the total of insurance (3 pieces) for entering the ball into the mouth 11.

As will be described later, since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 during the time reduction is only the ultra-shortening fluctuation, the number of insurances is increased in the first embodiment. As a modification, if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 during the time reduction is longer, the number of insurances may be smaller (for example, one).

When the time saving end condition is satisfied due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the specific game control means 270 is displayed at the time of the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 in the change (in other words, at the end of the fluctuation time). End the time reduction and return the game state to the normal state.

Here, the open lottery (in other words, the normal symbol lottery) is continuous for one symbol fluctuation time (that is, one fluctuation time of special figure 2) triggered by entering the ball into the second starting port 12 in a short time. It is set to a value equal to or longer than the time during which the hit of a normal symbol can occur twice or more when executed. In other words, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects, as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 during the time reduction, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is defined to be at least the time during which the normal symbol can be hit twice or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern table is configured so that, as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 during the time reduction, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is defined is at least the time during which the hit of the normal symbol can occur twice or more. May be good.

As described in the prerequisite technique, for example, one fluctuation time of a normal symbol in a short time may be 2 seconds. In this case, the time during which the normal symbol can be hit twice or more is about 10 seconds (two fluctuation times of the normal symbol + one operation time of the normal electric accessory). In the first embodiment, the one-time fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the time saving is set to a predetermined time of 10 seconds or more. As a modification, the one-time fluctuation time of the special figure 2 may be set to a time longer than the long opening time (5.9 seconds in the first embodiment) when the normal symbol is the first hit.

Here, in the case of the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal time, the special figure 2 fluctuates up to four times. This is because when the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces) of the number of reserved balls shown in FIG. 2, the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 is completed. On the other hand, in the normal game after the end of the time reduction 1 time 4R jackpot, the special figure 2 fluctuates up to 5 times between the time reduction 1 time and the time reduction 4 times. The ordinary electric accessory 90 opened by the first hit of the ordinary symbol in a short time is temporarily closed when the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces) of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. .. However, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the time during which the hit of the normal symbol can occur more than once, the first hit of the second normal symbol occurs and the ordinary electric accessory 90 is released, and the second This is because it is possible to further enter the ball into the 2 starting port 12 (typically, the special figure 2 hold is increased by 1).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the chance of passing through the big hit given once in a short time is more advantageous to the player than the chance based on the normal symbol hit in the normal time. Even if the time reduction is the minimum once, by increasing the possibility of acquiring a small hit V than when hitting a normal symbol in normal times, it is possible to raise the awareness of the player who is trying to acquire a big hit. , Can reward the player who won the jackpot.

In the first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252, when the time reduction ends at the time of the stop display of the special symbol change in which the winning / failing lottery result is out of order, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is set to a predetermined special figure. Increase the fixed time of special symbols when displaying fixedly for a fixed time. In other words, the next symbol change based on the held winning / failing lottery value (typically the second winning / failing lottery value) is not started from the end of the time reduction until a specially long set special figure fixed time elapses. The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 determine whether or not the special symbol has a fixed display timing. (1) The specific game control means 270 has completed the time reduction (big hit symbol, small). Judgment is made by detecting (except when the time reduction ends due to the stop of the winning symbol). As a modification, (2) the determination may be made by counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure 2) in the time saving. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the time saving end conditions are independently set for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 variation may be executed at normal times. Therefore, the method (1) is used. More suitable.

When the result of the winning / failing lottery in the first embodiment is incorrect, the fixed time of the special figure at the end of the time reduction is 6 seconds. Therefore, even if the normal symbol hits immediately before the end of the time reduction, the opening (5.9 seconds) of the normal electric accessory 90 ends before the lapse of the special figure fixed time. As a result, the number of special figure 2 hold increases more than expected (as a situation, if there is no special figure fixed time of 6 seconds, when the fluctuation of special figure 2 starts during the operation of the normal electric accessory, special figure 2 Since one free space is created for holding, it is possible to suppress the unintended fifth variation of Special Figure 2 after the end of the time reduction), that is, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the small hit V beyond the design range. ..

The production determination means 303 executes the advance notice lottery when the result of the open lottery is wrong or the second hit, and the first hit occurs according to the result of the advance notice lottery and is in a chance state (the head of the ordinary electric accessory 90). Display a notice effect (also called "Gase notice effect") that makes you expect to enter (open). For example, the effect determining means 303 may display the Gase notice effect with a predetermined probability when the result of the open lottery is off or the second hit. In the first embodiment, the above-mentioned Gase notice effect is not displayed based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special figure.

When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the first hit (long open) during the change of the special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state, the effect determining means 303 is the effect corresponding to the change of the special figure 1. The general electric opening effect (corresponding to the hold charge effect described later) is displayed in an manner corresponding to the execution state of the decorative symbol 61 (variation effect, etc.). The Fuden opening effect includes a notice effect (hereinafter, also referred to as "rush effect") that suggests the entry into a chance state. In addition, the Fuden opening effect includes a notice effect (hereinafter, also referred to as "right-handed navigation") that encourages right-handed strikes. The right-handed navigation may be a content that encourages the player to launch a game ball aiming at entering the second starting port 12, or may be a content that prompts the player to save the hold of FIG. Here, if the normal electric accessory is activated immediately after the stop display of the normal symbol, there is a risk that the player will not be able to sufficiently hold the hold even if he / she starts right-handed by looking at the "right-handed navigation". , Set a longer time such as the normal symbol fixed time and the normal electric accessory operation start demonstration time until the normal electric accessory is opened after the stop display, and use that time to "right-handed navigation" It is preferable to produce a production. In addition, it is said that the execution start timing of the normal electric opening effect is stopped and displayed in a manner in which the normal symbol indicates the first hit, but if the right-handed strike is not executed, the normal electric accessory (special figure 2 starting port) is displayed. On the other hand, since it becomes difficult to insert the game ball, it may be possible to execute the game from a predetermined timing before the stop display (for example, the remaining 5 seconds of the normal symbol fluctuation time when the normal symbol is the first hit). At the timing of, the normal symbol winning effect, which is a success pattern, is executed for the above-mentioned Gase notice effect, and the right-handed guidance effect is performed so that the player understands the situation in which the player should hit right in the remaining 5 seconds).

If the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the normal time (during the non-time saving game) is not reaching or the normal reach is established, the effect determining means 303 rushes together with the display of the variation effect (for example, overlaid on the variation effect). The effect may be displayed and the right-handed navigation may be displayed in a relatively large size. On the other hand, if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is in the process of establishing super reach, the right-handed navigation may be displayed in a relatively small size without displaying the rush effect. That is, the effect determining means 303 may be displayed with the priority of reach unestablished or normal reach <general electricity opening effect <super reach. It should be noted that the first hit of the normal symbol can be established even while the change of the special symbol is not executed in the normal state. Therefore, even if the variable effect is not being displayed, the normal electric opening effect can be displayed. As for the display priority, in the drawing process for the effect display device 60, the one displayed overlaid on the foreground is treated as a high priority, the one having a large size of the effect display area is treated as a high priority, and the like. Any display mode, such as a composite, which is intended to be visually recognized by the player with priority, may be used.

2. Configurations related to multiple variable pattern modes:
FIG. 43 shows a plurality of types of variation pattern modes. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment includes a plurality of types of variation pattern modes in which the selection tendency of the variation patterns of the special figures 1 and 2 is different. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation patterns of the special figures 1 and 2 are determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern tables that are different for each fluctuation pattern mode. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the mode N is referred to as a mode N table.

The main board 200 of the first embodiment stores a mode 0 table to a mode 7 table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 selects one of the mode 0 table to the mode 2 table according to the gaming state, and determines the variation pattern of the special figure 1 with reference to the selected variation pattern table. The second variation pattern determining means 232 selects one of the mode 0 table and the mode 3 table to the mode 7 table according to the gaming state, and determines the variation pattern of the special figure 2 with reference to the selected variation pattern table. .. In other words, after the special game is completed, the mode states of the fluctuation pattern tables of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are individually switched according to the number of fluctuations of each. By doing so, among the time-saving end conditions provided for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, in particular, refer to the timing when there is acceptance that you want to produce a special effect such as the final change of the time-saving game of Special Figure 2. It is possible to solve the problem that the table to be sought shifts due to the execution of the change shown in FIG.

The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the mode 1 table for 7 fluctuations in special figure 1 after the 4R big hit (after the end of the special game) once in a short time, and then selects the fluctuation pattern in the mode 0 table. The fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 1 is selected with reference to the reference. Further, in the case of the big hit (15R, 10R, 5R, 4R) of 9 times in a short time, the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 refers to the 7 fluctuations of the special figure 1 after the end of the special game, and the fluctuation pattern with reference to the mode 2 table. After that, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 is selected with reference to the mode 0 table. The 7 fluctuations in Special Figure 1 after the end of the special game correspond to the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1, which is the condition for ending the time reduction. Both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table define a fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortening fluctuation (about 3 seconds in the first embodiment). In other words, both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table are set so that the ultra-shortening variation is selected.

When the variation pattern of mode 1 or mode 2 is selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231, the effect determining means 303 displays an effect indicating that the rush effect (effect mode of the time-saving game) is being prepared. May be good. Further, the effect determining means 303 may select a variable effect pattern (and a notice effect pattern, the same applies hereinafter) for displaying the dummy round effect, and display the dummy round effect. The dummy round effect may be content that makes it appear as if the special game is currently in progress, or it may be content that makes it appear as if the final round of the special game is continuing. When the variation of the special figure 1 in the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is a hit, it may be possible to select "hit notification effect variation (10 seconds)" other than "ultra-shortening variation". It is preferable that the decorative symbol display on the effect display device 60 regarding the variation of the special figure 1 selected by the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is executed so as to be inconspicuous in a corner portion of the display area or the like. If the mode 1 table or mode 2 table fluctuates for the fifth time, etc., the player may have left-handed without understanding the gameplay, so a dedicated right-handed guidance effect is displayed. It may be a thing.

As a modification, at least one of mode 1 and mode 2 may not be provided. When Mode 1 and Mode 2 are provided, the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 will occur when the villa is left-handed when the consecutive villa is finished due to the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 (except when the time reduction is finished due to the 7 times fluctuation of Special Figure 1). This is because there is a possibility of ultra-shortening fluctuation. Further, as another modification, when the mode 1 and the mode 2 are provided, a dedicated effect corresponding to the ultra-shortening change of the special figure 1 is provided, and the effect determining means 303 is used in the change of the special figure 1 after the end of the consecutive villa state. The special effect may be displayed.

The second variation pattern determining means 232 selects the variation pattern of the special figure 2 with reference to the mode 3 table for the first variation of the special figure 2 after the 4R big hit of one time reduction, and then refers to the mode 0 table. Then, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is selected. Since the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the normal state is a chance to acquire the small hit V, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 in the mode 0 is a fluctuation pattern for chance production. When the variation pattern for chance effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the chance effect and displays the chance effect.

Further, the mode 3 table is set so that a variation pattern for chance production is selected. Chance production includes hold charge production. The hold charge effect is an effect that encourages the accumulation of the hold of the special figure 2. The hold charge effect may be (1) a content that prompts the player to shoot a game ball aiming at the second starting port 12, (2) a content that prompts a right-handed strike, and (3) a right-handed strike. If you do not do this, the content may suggest that it will be disadvantageous. When the variation pattern for chance effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the chance effect, and selects the opportunity effect (hold charge effect) as the special figure variation effect. Including) is displayed.

The fluctuation pattern of the mode 3 table is a new launch of the game ball in a short time-passing the operating port-open lottery, normal symbol fluctuation-normal symbol hit-normal electric accessory 90 fluctuation time longer than expected to be required to open. To specify. Here, if there is a deviation in the open lottery, it is preferable that the fluctuation time of the open lottery and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set to 2 fluctuations or more as insurance. The reason for designing in this way includes "when there is a game ball of 4 balls (upper limit of the number that can be held in Special Figure 2)" in the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and mode 3 This is because four hold of special figure 2 cannot be stored unless the ordinary electric accessory 90 is operated at least once while the table is fluctuating. If the fluctuation in the mode 3 table is a small hit or a big hit, the game will be in a time-saving game state even after the special game, so that the effect of notifying the hit immediately is displayed, which is shorter than the above time. Or may include what is executed.

The second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 refers to (1) mode 4 table once, (2) mode 5 table once, and (3) mode 6 table 7 times in the case of a big hit of 9 times. (4) The mode 7 table is referred to four times, and the fluctuation patterns for the 13 fluctuations of the special figure 2 are selected for the four holds during the time reduction and after the time reduction ends.

The mode 4 table defines a fluctuation pattern for the big hit end demonstration effect as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 initial fluctuation in the time saving. When the variation pattern for the jackpot end demo effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the jackpot end demo effect and displays the jackpot end demo effect. The jackpot end demo production shows the end of the jackpot (current number of consecutive villas, cumulative total number of balls, etc.), content indicating the entry into a shorter time, content prompting right-handedness, production mode selection screen for rush production (normal) Character selection such as type, more notice type, and one-shot notification type) may be included. The reason why the big hit end demo effect is displayed by the first change of the special figure 2 in the time saving is to encourage the right-handed hit and to save the special figure 2 hold. As another effect, it becomes easy to hide the special figure 1 change executed before the special figure 2 change, and it becomes easy to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot seen by the player to the start of the special figure 2 change.

When the effect determining means 303 receives a command (not information including the fluctuation pattern of the mode 4 table) instructing the execution of the jackpot end demo from the main board 200, the effect determining means 303 receives a round effect (for example, the effect of the final round of the special game). May continue. In this case, if the player stops firing the game ball in the final round, the special figure 2 hold does not occur, and there is a possibility that the end demo (special figure 2 variation production by the mode 4 table) does not occur forever. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 produces a content that prompts a right-handed strike, in other words, a content that prompts a launch aimed at the second starting port 12, after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the command instructing the execution of the jackpot end demo. You may display the effect of. In particular, it is the first hit (big hit during non-time reduction), and when shifting to the game state of 9 times reduction corresponding to the rush effect, there is often no hold of special figure 2, so only at the first hit The end demo effect may be executed at the actual jackpot end demo time of the main board 200. In that case, the mode 4 table is omitted and the number of mode 6 tables is increased by one. In addition, when the fluctuation in the mode 4 table is a big hit or a small hit, the number of rounds (out) acquired in addition to the number of rounds (number of balls) of the previous special game is changed to (or in addition to) the big hit end demo. It may have a device that notifies the number of balls) and notifies the effect that two big hits and small hits are continuous. In addition, it is possible to change the hit fluctuation of the mode 4 table from the end demo production without discomfort by executing the effect of notifying in advance that the hit is also included in the hold at the start demo of the big hit and the small hit. However, at that time, in the production of the start demo, by setting the subsequent hit type to non-notification, it is possible to execute the notification production of the hit type when the actual fluctuation of the subsequent hit is executed. Even during a big hit, you can wait with a sense of expectation without knowing how many balls will be added.

The mode 5 table to the mode 7 table may include a plurality of types of effects (first fanning effect, second fanning effect, third fanning effect, ..., normal effect, etc.), and the selection probability of each effect. It may be a table in which different values are set for. By separating the variation pattern table, the appearance frequency of the effect can be changed, and for example, it becomes easy to avoid the end of the consecutive villa state without the fanning effect even once. As a modification, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 2 may be determined from one variation pattern table for the second variation when the time reduction is given 9 times to the 4 variation after the time reduction is omitted. Further, when the fluctuation time of the mode 5> the fluctuation time of the mode 6, the order of the mode 5 and the mode 6 is exchanged in order to secure a long fluctuation time of the final fluctuation in the time saving and to store the hold of the special figure 2 up to the upper limit. You may.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment does not provide a variation pattern table dedicated to the final variation for notifying the player of the ball output at the time-saving game end timing, which is often seen in general pachinko gaming machines. The final variation in this embodiment is the variation in which the special figure 2 hold after the end of the time reduction becomes 0 (mainly the fourth variation after the end of the time reduction), and is typically the final variation of the special figure 2 in the continuous villa state. .. The reason is that the small hit probability of Special Figure 2 is as high as 1/10, so it is better not to make a difference from other fluctuations during the rush up to that point. In addition, if a fluctuation pattern table dedicated to the ball output display is provided, it is normal in irregular situations such as when the time reduction ends due to the special figure 1 fluctuation or when there are only three special figure 2 holds at the end of the time reduction. There is a possibility that the ball ejection notification effect will be displayed (original chance effect) during the special figure 2 fluctuation accompanying the normal symbol hit. In order to avoid this, it is preferable not to provide a fluctuation pattern table dedicated to ball ejection notification.

Here, the configuration of the ball ejection notification will be described. The effect determining means 303 is (1) when the change of the special symbol that triggers the end of the time reduction ends as a result of deviation, or (2) the second winning / failing lottery value remaining after the end of the time reduction (that is, special figure 2 hold). When the fluctuation based on is ended as a result of deviation, the effect related to the ball output up to that point (hereinafter referred to as "ball output notification effect") is displayed for a predetermined time. The display time of the ball ejection notification effect may be, for example, 5 seconds. The above (1) and (2) are cases where the effect state to be controlled by the effect determining means 303 returns from the time saving state (rush effect) to the normal time. Further, the above (1) is a case where the hold of the special figure 2 does not exist at the time when the final fluctuation of the time reduction is completed. When the fluctuation of the above (1) or (2) becomes a big hit (including a small hit V), the ball ejection notification effect is not executed until the end of the next time reduction.

The ball-out notification effects are (1) ball-out during special games, (2) ball-out during small hit games, and (3) ball-out during short hours (special figure 2 prizes from winning openings such as the start opening and general winning opening). Regarding (sphere), the content that notifies only (1), the content that notifies (1) + (2), the content that notifies (1) + (3), or the content that notifies (1) + (2) + (3) It may be the content to be notified. The notified ball payout may be the total payout during this consecutive villa period when one or more special games are continuously executed with one or more time reductions in between. In addition, the reported balls are the total of the first hits in FIG. 26 and the balls in the consecutive villa state, in other words, the balls released from the occurrence of the first hit in the normal time to the return to the normal time after the consecutive villa state. It may be a total.

Further, the number of balls to be paid out may be the number of game balls paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 500 (the number of prize balls), and the number of out-of-game balls is subtracted from the number of game balls paid out. It may be a number (so-called net increase). The effect determining means 303 may acquire the number of game balls to be paid out from the payout control board 155, or may obtain the number of out balls from the out detection device 39 to count the number of balls to be paid out.

When the special symbol (that is, special figure 1) indicating the result of the hit / fail determination based on the ball entering the first starting port 11 is changing, the effect determining means 303 outputs the ball in a manner higher in visibility than the variable effect. Display the notification effect. Specifically, the effect determining means 303 may temporarily hide the variable screen of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 except when the decorative symbol 61 is stopped and display, and display the ball ejection notification effect. .. Further, the effect determining means 303 may display the ball ejection notification effect in an area different from the variation display area (stop display area) of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1. Further, when displaying the ball ejection notification effect, the effect determining means 303 may display the special figure 1 variation on a screen smaller than the normal screen (wipe or the like) or a screen smaller than the display screen of the ball ejection notification effect. Good.

According to this aspect, the variable effect related to the special figure 2 having a relatively high probability of a small hit is displayed without being hindered by the ball ejection notification effect, and the time saving effect mode (rush effect) is terminated according to various situations. In that case, it is possible to notify the ball ejection at a suitable timing and mode. In addition, when the effect determination means 303 has not executed both (1) the variation of the special figure 1 and the variation of the special figure 2 for a predetermined time after the end of the time reduction, or (2) the variation of the special figure 1 is started. (Except when 10 minutes or more have passed after the end of the rush effect), the ball ejection notification timing may be determined and the ball ejection notification effect may be displayed.

3. 3. Composition related to chance production:
The effect determining means 303 is in special figure 2 variation when the variation pattern mode of special figure 2 is mode 0 (in other words, when the special figure 2 variation pattern of mode 0 is selected by the second variation pattern determining means 232). , Display the chance production. The chance effect is displayed at the time of special figure 2 hold occurrence when (1) the normal symbol is the first hit in the normal time of FIG. 26. In addition, (2) is displayed during the remaining hold (special figure 2 hold) digestion after the end of the time reduction after the 4R jackpot of one time reduction. In either case, 4 fluctuations in Special Figure 2 are assumed.

It should be noted that the gaming state of the main board 200 is the same (normal state) during the above (1) and (2), after the big hit of 9 time reductions, and during the remaining hold (holding in Special Figure 2) after the end of the time reduction. However, since the fluctuation pattern modes are different (different fluctuation patterns are selected from different fluctuation pattern tables), the former and the latter display different effects. The former is a chance production and the latter is a rush production.

When the normal symbol hits the first hit (long open) in the normal state, the effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the above-mentioned hold charge effect. The effect determining means 303 may display the hold charge effect for the time when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is controlled to be in the open state. The hold charge effect may include an effect of notifying the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (a general electric opening effect). In addition, the hold charge effect may include an effect (chance rush effect) that foretells the entry into the chance effect.

The hold charge effect and the chance rush effect have a high priority among the image effects displayed by the effect determination means 303 (for example, error display, right-handed display, decorative symbol at the time of stop display, hold number display, etc. The priority is lower than the information required for the game, and the priority is higher than other notice effects that are changing). This is because, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the presence or absence of the acquisition of the small hit V has a great influence on the ball output, and it is important to save the special figure 2 hold in order to acquire the small hit V. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is provided with an accessory (referred to as a "special accessory" here) having a high probability of a jackpot expectation (for example, about 70%) when operated in a specific mode, the special accessory May be prioritized over the hold charge effect and the chance rush effect. In addition, during the hold charge effect and the chance entry display, the effect of activating a character other than the special character (a character with a lower expectation of a big hit than the special character) may be canceled.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation is started during the hold charge effect display in the normal time, the effect determination means 303 changes to the special figure 2 change after the display of the hold charge effect is finished (after the operation of the normal electric accessory 90 is finished). The variable display of the corresponding decorative symbol 61 is started. In this case, the effect determining means 303 may start the variation of the decorative symbol 61 based on the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special figure 2 from the middle. Further, the effect determining means 303 may display the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 in an area different from the display area of the hold charge effect during the hold charge effect display, and may display it in a smaller area than usual. It may be displayed in an area smaller than the display area of the charge effect (wipe display, etc.).

As described in relation to FIG. 43, during the time reduction after the end of the 4R jackpot of one time reduction, the hold charge effect is displayed at the first variation of the special figure 2. The effect determining means 303 does not display the effect related to the deviation variation of the special figure 1 during the time saving (the decorative symbol 61 is displayed small so that it can be identified that it is changing). This is because the special figure 1 fluctuation during the time reduction is fixed at 3 seconds for the purpose of immediate digestion, and important contents directly related to the ball ejection are not displayed.

The effect determining means 303 is reserved in both the case where the normal symbol is the first hit (long open) in the normal state, the time is shortened after the end of the 4R jackpot of one time reduction, and the first change in the special figure 2 Display the charge effect. However, the former is a production during the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and the latter is a production during the fluctuation of Special Figure 2. Since the special figure 1 may fluctuate in various patterns while the ordinary electric accessory 90 is open, the effect determining means 303 displays the hold charge effect and changes the special figure 1 (including the deviation variation). The variation effect of the corresponding decorative symbol 61 is displayed smaller than the hold charge effect (wipe display, etc.).

The display priority of the hold charge effect in the normal state is set according to the status of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1. For example, the effect determining means 303 displays the hold charge effect in a form with relatively high visibility unless the variation pattern of the special figure 1 has a high importance such as super reach, and the effect determines the effect of the decorative symbol 61. May be displayed in a mode with relatively low visibility. High visibility means that the display size is large, the colors are conspicuous (brightness, saturation, etc.), effects are added, and the images are drawn in front of other effects. May include. When the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 has a high importance such as super reach, the display priority is reversed and the hold charge effect is displayed small (simply reduced) in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. The form may change, such as by simplifying the display), and the super reach effect corresponding to the variation in Special Figure 1 may be displayed in a large size.

The effect determining means 303 is reserved in both the case where the normal symbol is the first hit (long open) in the normal state, the time is shortened after the end of the 4R jackpot of one time reduction, and the case of the first change in the special figure 2. The charge effect is displayed, and after the hold charge effect is completed, the chance effect is displayed as the variable effect shown in Special Figure 2. The effect determining means 303 basically advances the chance effect based on the player's button operation, but a dedicated effect is also provided when the button is not operated. For example, when a player operates a button, the chance effect develops into a reach effect via a plurality of advance notices such as notice 1, notice 2, and notice 3. On the other hand, when the player does not operate the button, the chance effect develops into a reach effect via a plurality of notices such as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, etc., but the above notice 4 is not a button. It is a dedicated effect during operation and is not displayed when the button is operated. The effect determining means 303 may draw the effect lottery of the notice 4 when there is no operation when the valid period of the button has elapsed, or draw lottery for both the effects to be executed when the button is operated at the start of the fluctuation and when there is no button operation. As a specification to be performed, a suggestion effect (for example, a special button image display or a mini character icon display) in which the notice 4 appears without any operation may be executed during the button validity period.

The effect determining means 303 displays the hold charge effect both in the case where the normal symbol hits the first hit (long open) in the normal state and in the case of the first change of the special figure 2 in the time saving, but the hold charge is displayed. With respect to the special figure 2 hold that occurred during the display of the effect, whether it is a hit or a miss is detected (so-called look-ahead) based on the preliminary determination information (preliminary hit / miss determination information in the first embodiment). In the normal state, the effect determining means 303 pre-reads the presence or absence of the symbol big hit and the small hit, while in the time saving state, it pre-reads only the presence or absence of the small hit. This is because the symbol big hit of the special figure 2 in the time saving state has a lower profit than the small hit V.

As described in the prerequisite technique, the effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display a hold lamp image showing the number of holds in the special figure 1 and the number of holds in the special figure 2 at the lower part of the screen. The effect determining means 303 displays the pre-reading result as a pending change. For example, when a certain special figure 2 hold is a small hit (or a symbol big hit) as a result of pre-reading, the effect determining means 303 performs a small hit (or a symbol big hit) from the normal mode to the hold lamp image corresponding to the special figure 2 hold. ) Is changed to a special mode. For example, when the hold lamp image indicates a present box, the shape and color of the present box may be changed.

Further, the effect determining means 303 may further execute the look-ahead of the special figure 1 hold. When the first hit of the normal symbol occurs while the pre-reading of the special figure 1 hold is being executed, the effect determining means 303 cancels the pre-reading result up to that point and the pre-reading effect that has been executed so far, and the hold charge effect. May be displayed. As an exception, the look-ahead effect that changes the lottery mode of the variable effect pattern, such as the transition of the effect zone that changes the effect tendency (type of characters appearing, world view, etc.), may be executed as it is.

Further, even if the effect determining means 303 detects a symbol jackpot by pre-reading the special figure 1 hold, if it becomes a jackpot due to fluctuations in other holds before the jackpot hold, the subsequent jackpot hold will be made in the future. The effect of notifying the jackpot is not executed. If a small hit V occurs from the first hit of a normal symbol while the big hit of special figure 1 is confirmed, the special figure 1 big hit is digested and the number of time reductions is reset without accumulating the special figure 2 hold during the time reduction. Because it becomes possible. For example, there will be a strategy that increases the possibility of a new small hit V by changing the time reduction from 1 time to 9 times.

4. Composition related to the state of consecutive villas:
The consecutive villa state is a mode in which a direct transition is made at 50% of the special figure 1 big hit in the normal time, and a direct transition is made at the small hit V after the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal time. When the time is shortened in the consecutive villa state, typically, the time reduction is 9 times + the remaining hold is 4 times, and the special figure 2 lottery with a small hit probability of 1/10 is executed 13 times in total. Since the probability of winning a small hit or a big hit during the 9 times of shortening the time is about 61%, and the probability of winning a small hit or a big hit with the remaining 4 times of holding is about 34%, the probability that the consecutive villa state will continue is It is about 75%.

The effect determining means 303 displays a big hit end demo and a hold charge effect (right-handed navigation) according to the fluctuation pattern of the mode 4 at the time of the first change of the special figure 2 in the time saving of the consecutive villa state. The effect determining means 303 is special when the change of the special figure 1 is executed before the first change of the special figure 2 (when the special figure 2 hold is 0) and the special figure 1 is a big hit in the short time in the continuous villa state. During the final round production of the game (or during the end demo production), a predetermined character (special character, etc.) may be operated to output an effect that makes the jackpot appear to be extended. As another aspect, whether the jackpot is extended by the appearance of the special game, such as the effect determining means 303 suspending the round effect of the special game and rewinding and playing it during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 which is the jackpot. You may make it look like. It should be noted that the same effect can be executed even when the special figure 2 fluctuation in the mode 4 table is a small hit or a big hit.

The effect determining means 303 displays a rush effect as a variable effect of the special figure 2 during the time reduction in the continuous villa state. The rush effect is designed on the assumption that the maximum number (4) of special figure 2 hold will remain at the end of the time reduction. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the expectation of small hit V is high even with the remaining hold after the end of the reduced working hours (small hit probability 1/10), so it is important that four special figure 2 holds are accumulated at the end of the reduced working hours. .. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 displays the hold charge effect even in the special figure 2 variation of the final (9th) inning in the short time in the consecutive villa state.

The hold charge effect in the special figure 2 final variation of the time saving is also the content of prompting the launch of the game ball aiming at the second starting port 12 as in the hold charge effect in the first change of the special figure 2 of the time reduction. The effect determining means 303 may display the hold charge effect in the final variation of the special figure 2 in which the time is shortened, superimposed on the corner of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61. In the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving is 10 seconds or more, it is sufficient to display the hold charge effect only for the final fluctuation (the initial fluctuation is not included), but the special figure for a short time in the final fluctuation. When a specification in which 2 fluctuations can be selected is adopted, the hold charge effect may be displayed from the 7th fluctuation or the 8th fluctuation.

It is assumed that a player who is accustomed to a type 1 type 1 gaming machine that does not have a small hit V is likely to make a stop during a long fluctuation of a short time, but at least by displaying a hold charge effect in the final fluctuation. , It is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to obtain a very large profit of small hit V.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the final variation (9th variation) of the special figure 2 in the time saving is set to have a long symbol fixing time. The symbol fixed time is the time during which the stop display is continued from the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and is the time for delaying the start of the next symbol variation based on the reserved lottery value. The symbol fixing time of the special figure 2 final variation in the time reduction is set to be equal to or longer than the opening time (6 seconds) of the ordinary electric accessory 90 accompanying the first hit of the ordinary symbol, and is set to 6 seconds in the first embodiment. The symbol fixing time at other time points may be shorter than the symbol fixing time of the special figure 2 final variation in the time reduction, and may be, for example, 1 second or 0.5 second.

On the other hand, as described above, the specific game control means 270 uses the special figure 2 when the time saving end condition is satisfied due to the change in the special figure 2, and here, when the number of changes in the special figure 2 reaches nine times. The time reduction is ended when the stop display of 2 is displayed. In other words, the time reduction is completed before the symbol fixed time shift. Therefore, even if the normal symbol becomes the first hit immediately before the end of the time reduction, the long opening of the normal electric accessory 90 ends within the symbol fixed time. Then, in the special symbol fixed time, since the time saving state has ended, the probability that the normal symbol will be the first hit even if it newly starts to fluctuate is as rare as 1/590. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of +1 special figure 2 hold for 4 special figure 2 hold at the end of the time reduction. This is because when the special figure 2 hold of +1 occurs, the possibility of a small hit is increased more than the design, and it is not preferable, and the chance effect is displayed immediately after the rush effect. If the normal symbol becomes the first hit at 1/590 after the end of the time reduction, the hold charge effect, which is the normal electric opening effect, may be executed as in the normal time. In such a case, the hold charge effect may be executed. In the case where the variation of the special figure 2 that is additionally generated after the four variation for the rush effect is the variation of the mode 0 table, the chance effect is continuously executed after the rush effect. Although the effect data increases, if it is possible to provide a variation effect pattern for the rush effect even for the variation pattern of the mode 0 table, the effect determination means 303 has continuity with the rush effect. May be determined and controlled so that the rush effect is continued even when the mode 0 table fluctuates.

The rush effect of the first embodiment is displayed in the same manner before the end of the time reduction and after the end of the time reduction. For example, the effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern corresponding to the rush effect having the same or similar contents in both the mode 6 variation pattern and the mode 7 variation pattern. Display a rush effect with the same or similar content. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player misunderstands that the time is during the time reduction (the state where the right side is advantageous) even though the time reduction is completed (the state where the left strike is advantageous).

The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display an image (referred to as a “right-handed recommended image”) of the content that encourages the player to strike right during the short time. The effect determining means 303 is a symbol from the 10th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush effect (that is, the 1st variation of the special figure 2 after the end of the time reduction) or after the 9th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush effect. From a fixed time, instead of the right-handed recommended image, an image (referred to as "left-handed recommended image") that urges the player to left-handed may be displayed.

However, since the production content is the same before the end of the time reduction and after the end of the time reduction, if left-handed is strongly recommended, it may cause confusion for the player, and after the end of the consecutive villa state, the ball ejection notification effect is displayed. Therefore, it is not desirable to store the special figure 1 hold in advance. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 may display the left-handed recommended image smaller than the right-handed recommended image. Further, the effect determining means 303 may display the left-handed recommended image instantaneously or for a short time, or may display it temporarily or at predetermined time intervals.

Further, the effect determining means 303 hides the right-handed recommended image from the 10th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush effect or from the symbol fixing time after the end of the 9th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush effect. , The left-handed recommended image may also be hidden. In this case, left-handed operation may be recommended only in the lighting mode of the status display lamp 502. It is desirable that the timing for starting the display of the left-handed recommended image to be conspicuous is at the same time as the ball ejection notification effect or after the ball ejection notification effect. At this time, when the variation of the special figure 1 is executed, it is preferable to display the left-handed recommended image at the timing when the decorative symbol stops and the timing does not overlap in order to notify the game result. ..

The variable effect pattern for the rush effect can include (1) pseudo-variable effect 4 to 8 times (minimum 4 times), (2) notice effect, and (3) reach effect (only some variable effect patterns). , (1), (1) + (2), (1) + (2) + (3), the variation effect corresponding to one variation of the special figure 2 is completed. Generally, in the small hit high probability symbol (special figure 2) in the small hit V spec, only the look-ahead information regarding the hit / fail can be notified in advance. Further, regarding the reserved lottery value, the symbol and the fluctuation pattern are unknown until the time when the symbol change based on the lottery value is executed. On the other hand, the player is accustomed to the continuous look-ahead effect including the design and the variation pattern in the conventional model, and may feel uncomfortable without such a look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the degree of expectation is displayed by a pseudo look-ahead effect during a pseudo-variation effect that is similar in appearance to the look-ahead effect of the conventional model. In the pseudo-variation effect, the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is stopped (temporarily stopped) for a time (0.5 seconds, etc.) less than a predetermined reference value, and then the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 is restarted. Although it is a variation of the number of times, it is a content that makes it appear that the variation is made multiple times. Along with the temporary stop and re-variation of the pseudo-variation, (2) a notice effect and (3) a pseudo look-ahead effect that suggests the execution expectation level and the execution content of the reach effect are performed. As an example of the pseudo look-ahead effect, there is a chance that a combination of decorative symbols categorized into the same type (color, form, character, etc.) will be temporarily stopped. There is an effect step-up look-ahead that transitions to a high-expected one with each re-variation.

The effect determining means 303 corresponds to the change in the immediately preceding special figure 2 according to the advance hit / fail determination information of the lottery value corresponding to the next symbol change as a look-ahead effect in the original meaning that affects the next symbol change. The zone transition symbol stop look-ahead effect may be displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation effect. The zone transition symbol stop look-ahead effect is a content that announces that the next symbol change will be displayed in the high expectation effect mode. In addition, the effect determining means 303 displays the zone transition symbol stop look-ahead effect by this change when the hit or miss of the next change is a small hit or a miss (executes a gap) in the special figure 2, while the next time. If the correctness of the fluctuation is the symbol jackpot of Special Figure 2, it is not necessary to execute the zone transition symbol stop look-ahead effect in this fluctuation (because of low profit). In addition, even if the next fluctuation is a small hit, if this fluctuation develops to (3) reach production, the result of the fluctuation (the mode of stopping the decorative symbol) is being paid attention to, so the zone Look-ahead effects that use transition symbols may be excluded from the lottery. Therefore, this look-ahead effect determines whether or not the next hold is appropriate for each change start of the special figure 2, and controls to execute the look-ahead lottery according to the type of the change change pattern to be started. On the contrary, when the final stop symbol of the fluctuation is the zone transition symbol despite the reach fluctuation, a method of notifying that the next fluctuation is confirmed may be adopted.

The effect determining means 303 hides the hold lamp image during the rush effect. This is because if the number of hold lamps is notified by the hold lamp image, the significance of the above-mentioned pseudo fluctuation effect is impaired. On the other hand, the effect determining means 303 displays the remaining number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 during the rush effect (during the time reduction). For example, in the second variation of the special figure 2 (the first variation of the start of the rush effect) in the time saving, since the remaining number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is eight times, "8 + EXTRA" is displayed and the special figure 2 is displayed. "7 + EXTRA" is displayed on the second fluctuation. "Extra" indicates the change due to the remaining hold of Special Figure 2 after the end of the time reduction. It should be noted that the effect determining means 303 "extras" when the special figure 2 hold that is digested after the end of the time reduction actually occurs, for example, when the hold 4 occurs after the sixth variation of the special figure 2 in the time reduction. May be displayed. The display of the remaining number of fluctuations may be a number including the current fluctuation, or may be any of the number of fluctuations until the end of the time reduction excluding the current fluctuation. Further, the remaining number of times display may not be directly expressed as "remaining N times", but may be expressed as a roundabout expression such as "Nth day / 8th day + EXTRA". At this time, time elapses such as N day (morning), N day (noon), N day (night), N day AM 10:00, N day PM 2:00, N day PM 8:00, etc. Along with the display, the above (1) pseudo-variation period, (2) notice effect period, and (3) reach effect period may be displayed separately. Furthermore, when the time portion (and hour portion) of the above 12-hour notation is advanced for each pseudo-variation and the doublet "Nth day PM 5:55" is reached at a certain timing, the degree of expectation of hitting is achieved. A method of notifying that the value is high or that the hit is confirmed may be adopted.

5. Configuration related to game waiting demo:
The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display an image of a predetermined game standby demo when the variation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not made in the predetermined standby demo transition time. The game standby demo may be a video showing the theme, motif, story, outline, etc. in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 500.

The standby demo transition time is set longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the normal figure holding means 242 holds the normal figure lottery value up to the upper limit. In the first embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved numbers of the general drawing lottery value is 4, the maximum fluctuation time (in the normal state) of one fluctuation when the normal symbol is off or the second hit is 10 seconds, and the first The maximum time of one fluctuation in the case of hit is 15 seconds (in the normal state). In this case, the longest time when the first hit (long opening) of the normal symbol is notified at the latest when the normal symbol lottery value is held up to the upper limit and the change of the special symbol is not executed. Is 45 seconds (10 seconds x 3 holds + 15 seconds x 1 hold). Therefore, the standby demo transition time is set to be longer than 45 seconds, for example 60 seconds.

As described above, when the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a long time due to the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, the effect determining means 303 of the game ball aiming at the second starting port 12. Display the hold charge effect that prompts the launch. By setting the standby demo transition time longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the normal symbol lottery value is held up to the upper limit, the normal symbol becomes the first hit during the display of the game standby demo and is normally electric. It is possible to prevent the accessory 90 from being opened for a long time, in other words, it is possible to avoid displaying the hold charge effect while the game standby demo is being displayed. This makes it easier to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to obtain the small hit V without noticing the hold charge effect. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the first hit of the normal symbol has a great influence on the game playability, it is preferable to treat the variable display of the normal symbol as a state in which the game is in progress. It is possible to prevent the progress state of the game based on the variable display from being mistakenly recognized as non-game by the display of the game standby demo.

As a modification, in the effect determining means 303, the entry of the game ball into either of the plurality of winning openings or the entry openings provided in the game area 81 has not been detected in the above-mentioned standby demo transition time, and If the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not changing, the image of the game standby demo may be displayed. The plurality of winning openings or ball entrances include a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating opening 31, a second operating opening 32, and a general winning opening 33. The presence or absence of a ball may be detected by sensors (first start winning detection device 16, second start winning detection device 17, etc.) provided in each of the winning opening and the winning ball opening. This modification also has the same effect as that of the above embodiment.

As another modification, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the first starting port 11 and the first operating port 31 are provided close to each other in the vertical direction, and the game ball passing through the first operating port 31 is almost certainly (or 100%). ) The game area 81 (game nail, windmill, etc.) may be configured so as to enter the first starting port 11. Further, the game area 81 may be configured so that the game ball entering the first starting port 11 is limited to the game ball that has passed through the first operating port 31.

in this case,
Average fluctuation time related to digestion of 4 holdings of special symbol (here, special figure 1) + standby demo transition time> The standby demo transition time may be set so as to be the maximum fluctuation time of 4 holdings of normal symbols. For example, if the maximum fluctuation time of 4 holdings of a normal symbol is 45 seconds and the average fluctuation time of 4 holdings of a special symbol is 20 seconds, the standby demo transition time is longer than 25 seconds (for example, 30 seconds, etc.). ) May be set. This modification also has the same effect as that of the above embodiment.

The present invention has been described above based on the first embodiment. The first embodiment is an example, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. An example of modification is given below.

Modification 1 will be described. As partially described in the first embodiment, the effect determining means 303 displays a hold charge effect when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is released due to the first hit of the ordinary symbol in the normal game in the normal state. You may. Then, while the hold charge effect is being displayed, the effect determining means 303 may reduce the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 (wipe display). For example, the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the hold charge effect. Further, the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the display size when the hold charge effect is not executed.

In the first embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the normal game during the time reduction is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state (3 seconds in the first embodiment). ) Is fixed. In the first modification, the effect determining means 303 continuously displays the jackpot end demo and the hold charge effect from the end of the final round in the special game to the end of the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the time saving. The effect determining means 303 hides the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 while displaying the hold charge effect in the normal game during the time reduction.

During the time saving, the effect determining means 303 hides the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1, and only the stop mode that is the result of the variation effect is a simple symbol (smaller than the normal decorative symbol 61). It may be indicated by a symbol). Alternatively, only the result of hit or miss may be shown by a simple symbol. Further, when the symbol jackpot of the special figure 1 occurs during the time saving, the effect determining means 303 may notify the symbol jackpot by the operation of the special accessory described in the first embodiment.

As described above, the effect determining means 303 of the modified example 1 further reduces the visibility of the variable effect of the special figure 1 during the time saving as compared with the case where the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened due to the first hit of the ordinary symbol in the normal time. Display it. In this way, when the variation effect of Special Figure 1 is relatively insignificant, the player can benefit from the hold charge effect, etc. by displaying or hiding the variation effect in an inconspicuous manner. Other renditions that are more important to the acquisition can be emphasized and presented.

A modified example 2 relating to the second starting port 12 will be described. FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the starting port unit 510. The starting port unit 510 is a component in which the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, and a plurality of general winning openings 33 are integrated. The start port unit 510 is provided at a position below the center decoration 64. That is, the second starting port 12 of this modification is provided in the lower center of the game area 81. FIG. 45 is a top view of the starting port unit 510, with the bottom being the front.

FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the starting port unit 510, and specifically, is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 45. The left-handed flow path 512 is a flow path that guides the left-handed game ball to the left out port 514. The right-handed flow path 516 is a flow path that guides the right-handed game ball to the right out port 518. It is a right-handed game ball, in other words, a game nail, a windmill, etc. in the game area 81 are set so that only the game ball flowing through the right flow path of the center decoration 64 can flow into the right-handed flow path 516. ..

The slide plate 520 functions as a normal electric accessory 90, and in this modified example, functions as a guiding member that guides the game ball that has flowed into the right-handed flow path 516 to the second starting port 12. When the slide plate 520 is retracted, the game ball (game ball 524 in FIG. 46) flows from the right-handed flow path 516 into the right out port 518 and does not flow into the second starting port 12. The blocking member 522 is interlocked with the slide plate 520 and projects so as to close the entrance of the second starting port 12 when the slide plate 520 is in the retracted state. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 12. Further, the blocking member 522 is in the retracted state when the slide plate 520 is in the protruding state, and opens the entrance of the second starting port 12.

When the normal symbol hits, the open / close control means 275 of the first embodiment controls the normal electric accessory 90 to the open state, but the open / close control means 275 of the present modification puts the slide plate 520 into the protruding state. It controls and controls the blocking member 522 to the retracted state. As a result, the entrance of the right out port 518 is closed, the entrance of the second starting port 12 is opened, and the game ball that has rolled in the right-handed flow path 516 flows into the second starting port 12. According to this start port unit 510, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the second start port 12 when hitting a normal symbol, and it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second start port 12 in other situations.

Modification 3 will be described. The effect determining means 303 does not perform the hold charge effect (general open effect) when the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) during the hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 (typically at the time of the first hit). It may be displayed. This is to display the hold charge effect in the special figure 2 fluctuation during the time reduction after the big hit. If the special figure 2 hold is stored first, the special figure 1 hold is likely to remain at the end of the consecutive villa state due to the special figure 2 priority digestion, but the special figure 2 hold is displayed at the end of the consecutive villa state. This is because it is better not to carry out the fluctuation of FIG. 1 as much as possible. According to this configuration, if the first hit of the normal symbol is stopped and the hold charge effect is not displayed during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the big hit of the symbol of the special figure 1 is confirmed. In the normal case immediately after the end of the consecutive villa state, if the pre-reading of the special figure 1 hold is prohibited, it can be said that it is difficult to display the important effect related to the special figure 1 fluctuation during the ball ejection notification effect. The hold charge effect may be displayed during the hit fluctuation, and the special figure 2 hold may be accumulated. In addition, the timing at which the normal symbol becomes the first hit is not during the hit fluctuation of the special figure 1, and the hit confirmation notification is given in the look-ahead of the special figure 1 (for example, the premier hold display, and the number of time reductions after the big hit is indefinite). Even when is being executed, it may have a prohibition pattern that prohibits display. By doing so, before the hit confirmation hold of Special Figure 1 is exhausted, when the small hit or big hit of Special Figure 2 shifts to the rush state, the hit of Special Figure 1 can be shortened 9 times. This is because

Modification 4 will be described. When the consecutive villa state (time reduction + 4 hold) ends in an irregular manner, specifically, when the time reduction ends with 7 fluctuations in special figure 1 or the hold of special figure 2 at the end of the time reduction is 3 In the case of the number or less, the fluctuation pattern mode of the special figure 2 at the normal time can be used for the rush effect (modes 3 to 7). In this case, when the first hit of the normal symbol occurs in the normal time, the variation pattern for the rush effect or the variation pattern for the hold charge effect is selected in the subsequent special figure 2 variation, and an unintended effect is displayed by design. There is a possibility of doing it.

In order to deal with this, the effect determining means 303 rushes in the normal game in the normal state after the special figure 1 changes a predetermined number of times after the time reduction shift or the time reduction end (for example, after the special figure 1 change ends 10 times after the time reduction shift). When the variable effect pattern for the effect is selected, the variable effect pattern for the chance effect may be selected as an alternative to display the chance effect. Alternatively, the effect determining means 303 may display an irregular effect / display by telop or the like while displaying the rush effect under the above circumstances.

Modification 5 will be described. As described above, the time saving game may end with any of the fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation pattern table of the special figure 2 is in the mode 6 selection state, the special figure 1 When the time saving game ends based on the fluctuation, and when the time saving game ends based on the fluctuation of special figure 2 when the special figure 1 is in mode 2, a small hit is further won and the ball enters a specific area. If not, the mode of the variation pattern table of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be controlled to be “0”. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the rush effect pattern from being selected by holding the special figure 2 generated from the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal state.

A modification 6 will be described. Since the rush effect of the first embodiment has a fixed time reduction of 9 fluctuations and 1 fluctuation is a relatively long time (10 seconds or more), it is assumed that the player makes a stop (launch stop). Therefore, in the modified example, the number of time reductions in the continuous villa state is made indefinite (for example, it is determined from 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 9 times, 13 times, etc. It may be a short time (about 5 seconds). In this way, it is possible to suppress the stoppage by setting the specifications so that there is a risk that the special figure 2 hold cannot be stored in the case of the stoppage.

Modification 7 will be described. It may be configured so as to easily create the fifth variation of Special Figure 2 after the end of the time reduction. For example, (1) the opening end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90 may be set to the holding upper limit number + N (N is a positive integer) in FIG. Further, (2) the symbol fixing time at the end of the time reduction may be set to the same length as the normal time or a shorter length than the normal time. In addition, (3) the ball entry sensor (second start winning detection device 17) of the second start port 12 is arranged at a position away from the entrance of the second start port 12, and the fourth time of the special figure 2 after the time reduction is completed. After the end of the fluctuation and after the end of the fixed time (after the start of the next fluctuation), a new special figure 2 hold may be likely to occur. Further, the above (1) to (3) may be combined. In the case of the configuration of the modified example 4, instead of the priority digestion of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be drawn in parallel, or may be drawn in the order of winning.

Modification 8 will be described. When the effect determining means 303 detects by look-ahead that there is another small hit in the remaining hold when the symbol that wins the small hit fluctuates (when the small hit V fluctuates, hereinafter "current fluctuation"), the effect fluctuates this time. The big hit effect of the small hit V accompanying the above (for example, a special game effect) may be displayed with a special big hit effect having a content different from the normal big hit effect. The special jackpot effect may include content for notifying that it has been confirmed that two 15R jackpots will occur. When the modified example 7 is adopted, the small hit V in the special figure 2 may be only the 15R big hit.

Further, even when the small hit V in the special figure 2 is distributed to a plurality of types of big hits as in the first embodiment, the big hit effect notifies that the small hit V due to the fluctuation this time is the maximum profit, and after the big hit is completed. It is also possible to display a continuous effect that makes it look as if the big hit is continuing, and to display a big hit effect that makes it look like an extra hit at the next small hit V. In this case, the number of rounds of the next small hit V (additional amount per extra) is unknown at the time of the previous small hit V and cannot be notified. The additional amount (number of rounds) per extra may be notified at the start of the symbol fluctuation related to the small hit V of.

A modification 9 will be described. Here, a specific example of the production will be described. (A) and (b) of FIG. 47 are a chance effect in a normal state (an effect displayed in a normal game in a normal state with a long opening of a normal symbol, and can be said to be a normal electric opening effect, a rush effect, and a hold charge effect. .) Is shown as an example. FIG. 47A shows an aspect of the chance effect 530 when the variation effect of the special figure 1 is not a predetermined content having a high expectation such as super reach. In the chance effect 530 of FIG. 47 (a), the content for urging right-handed stroke and the special figure 2 hold image 532 showing the number of holds of special figure 2 (two in the figure) are displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the variation effect 536 of the special figure 1 which was displayed large in the center of the screen before the display of the chance effect 530 is reduced to the wipe 534 which is a small area at the corner of the screen and displayed. In addition, even when the fluctuation effect of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not executed, the normal standby screen is wiped and displayed, and even if the change of special figure 1 and the change of special figure 2 are started, the chance effect is produced. The fluctuation effect is displayed as it is on the wipe screen until is completed.

FIG. 47B shows a display mode of the chance effect 530 when the variation effect of the special figure 1 is a predetermined content having a high degree of expectation such as super reach. In the figure, the variation effect 536 of the super reach including the super reach object 538 such as the battle image of the character is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the chance effect 530 is displayed small on the wipe 534 in the corner of the screen. The proper use of the chance effect in the normal time is shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), but the timing of determining the proper use is determined according to the mode of the variable effect executed at the start timing of the chance effect. For example, in a fluctuation in which the fluctuation effect of Special Figure 1 becomes super reach, before the transition to super reach, the fluctuation effect is executed with the wipe display shown in FIG. 47 (a), and even after the transition to super reach, the wipe screen is displayed as it is. Is a specification that continues to display (a specification that returns to the super reach screen when the chance production ends, that is, when the operation of the normal electric accessory 90 ends). In addition, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the specification may be changed from the aspect of FIG. 47 (a) to the aspect of FIG. 47 (b) at the timing of shifting to the high expectation effect such as super reach. It is possible to change the mode of chance production depending on whether or not a high expectation pattern such as super reach is selected as the fluctuation production pattern of Special Figure 1, but if it is configured in that way, Immediately after the start of fluctuations before the transition to super reach, the transition to high-expected production can be detected first.

FIG. 48 shows an example of a chance effect during a time-saving game (for example, an effect displayed when the variable pattern mode is mode 3 and can be said to be a hold charge effect). Even in the chance production 530 during the time-saving game, the content prompting the right-handed hit and the special figure 2 reserved image 532 are displayed. On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, the variation effect of the special figure 1 is hidden during the time saving game, and the chance effect appears as the variation effect of the first variation of the time saving game of the special figure 2. There is. Therefore, the fluctuation effect 536 is not displayed by the wipe 534, which is different from the normal chance effect. The reason for producing a chance effect as the variation effect of Special Figure 2 is that if the variation effect is executed only for notifying the success or failure, especially in the case of one time reduction, the game property of accumulating four holds. This is because it cannot be fully understood and may give a disadvantage to the player. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation effect when the first variation of the time reduction in Special Figure 2 is a hit, the chance effect may be non-executed, or the effect for notifying the success or failure is executed after the chance effect. You may.

(Second Example)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. In particular, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has features related to control or production around the small hit development jackpot, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology and the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the premise technique and the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

The outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has the following five main features.

Features 1. Get the ball out in the small hit game:
In the conventional small hit development jackpot-equipped aircraft, two large winning openings for V acquisition having a specific area and a large winning opening for acquiring a large number of balls have been used. Since the opening of the large winning opening for V acquisition and the opening of the large winning opening for winning balls are due to the operation of different special electric accessories, the number of prize balls and the number of winning balls (regulated count) of the large winning opening for V acquisition The number) was reduced, the small hit game was ended early, and the big hit game was shifted to early. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 (machine equipped with a small hit development big hit) of the second embodiment, the number of special electric accessories (large winning openings) is one. By opening the big prize opening up to 15 times in the small hit game, it is possible to win many prize balls in the small hit game, and a new playability and interest are realized.

Feature 2. Small hit game production:
To make the player understand the possibility of getting a ball in the small hit game (that is, the first round of the small hit development big hit) after the V prize in the small hit game (that is, after the acquisition of the right of the big hit). Then, urge the player to fire.

Feature 3. Small hit development Big hit production:
Small hit development Since it is expected to win a prize ball equivalent to one round during the big hit from the first round of the big hit (that is, a small hit game), the V prize (acquisition of the right of the big hit) will be notified at the same time as the V prize. , Start displaying "1 round" to notify that a prize ball equivalent to 1 round during a big hit can be obtained.

Feature 4. Small hit development Production at the start of big hit in big hit:
Small hit development During the first round (small hit game) and the second round (first unit game of the special game) in the big hit, an effect suggesting the amount of profit that the player can obtain is executed.

Feature 5. Small hit look-ahead:
By pre-reading the hold of the small hit, it is notified that the next small hit development big hit can be obtained in a short time until the end of this small hit development big hit.

Hereinafter, the above five features will be sequentially described.
<Feature 1. Get the ball out in the small hit game>
FIG. 49 shows the basic structure of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment on the front side. The second starting port 12 has an ordinary electric accessory 90 which is a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the ball entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is also called a so-called electric tulip (electric chew), and various shapes and specifications can be applied. The ordinary electric accessory 90 may be of a slide type (for example, a specification that facilitates entry by moving the slide member forward or retracting backward), a tulip type, or a tongue type.

The special game control means 260 operates the special electric accessory 556 at the start of each unit game in the special game. The special game control means 260 causes the open / close control means 275 to control the specific area open / close solenoid 506, and opens the large winning opening 20 a predetermined number of times. The small hit game control means 265 operates the special electric accessory 556 once at the start of the small hit game. The small hit game control means 265 causes the open / close control means 275 to control the specific area opening / closing solenoid 506, and opens the large winning opening 20 a plurality of times during one small hit game.

The large winning opening 20 includes an opening / closing member (slide plate 540 described later) for switching between an open state and a closed state of the large winning opening 20. When the big winning opening 20 is closed, the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member. FIG. 50 is an external perspective view schematically showing the configuration of the large winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 can be said to be an opening / closing door of the grand prize opening 20. As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the slide plate 540 has a closed state of covering the top of the large winning opening 20 (box-shaped member 542) and an open state of retracting to the back as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Can be displaced between. When the slide plate 540 is in the closed state, the large winning opening 20 is also closed, and when the slide plate 540 is in the open state, the large winning opening 20 is also in the open state.

The figure shows an example of a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of a game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 of the grand prize opening 20. The slide plate 540 provided on the upper surface of the large winning opening 20 is provided so as to be slightly inclined so as to be downwardly downward with respect to the horizontal direction. As a result, the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 tends to accelerate as it is, and even if the slide plate 540 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the game ball cannot be successfully guided inside the box-shaped member 542. There is a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by advancing the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 in a zigzag shape, the moving distance of the game ball is increased and the momentum of the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 is reduced. In this way, the residence time of the game ball on the slide plate 540 is increased. As a result, even when the large winning opening 20 is repeatedly opened for a short time for an extremely short time, the time for the game ball to stay on the slide plate 540 is lengthened, and the game ball enters during the short time opening. Make it more likely.

FIG. 50A shows a large winning opening 20 when the slide plate 540 is in the closed state. As shown, within the range in which the game ball rolls on the slide plate 540, a plurality of protrusions 546a are provided on the game board side, and a plurality of protrusions are also provided on the transparent plate side facing the game board. 546b is provided. Further, the plurality of protrusions 546a on the game board side and the plurality of protrusions 546b on the transparent plate side are arranged alternately along the flow path on the slide plate 540. The plurality of protrusions 546b on the transparent plate side are attached to the transparent transparent plate 544 extending upward from the box-shaped member 542. By not directly fixing the plurality of protrusions 546b to the transparent plate 103 that covers the front side of the game board 80, the protrusions 516b are exposed to the outside when the transparent plate 103 is opened for the purpose of maintenance of the gaming machine or the like. It is possible to prevent the state from becoming easily damaged. Further, by forming the transparent plate 544 with a transparent member, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game ball entering the large winning opening 20 from being impaired. In the modified example, a protrusion or a recess for forming a zigzag-shaped flow path may be formed on the slide plate 540.

By alternately providing the plurality of protrusions 546a and 546b on the slide plate 540, the game ball can be advanced in a zigzag manner so that the momentum of the game ball tends to be decelerated. For example, a game ball is continuously fired toward the grand prize opening 20 by right-handed hitting (for example, one ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds), rolls on the slide plate 540, and falls to the left side of the grand prize opening 20. When the speed is reduced so that it takes 2 to 3 seconds, there are always about 3 to 5 game balls on the slide plate 540. As a result, even when the slide plate 540 is opened for a short time, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), a plurality of game balls can be guided together inside the large winning opening 20. The game balls that have fallen into the box-shaped member 542 pass through the passage port 548 one by one, and the winning is detected.

The number and residence time of the game balls staying on the slide plate 540 can be adjusted by changing the length and inclination angle of the large winning opening 20, the number and spacing of the protrusions 546a and 546b, and the like. In this embodiment, it is designed so that 1 to 3 game balls stay on the slide plate 540 when the continuous right-handed firing is continued, and the slide plate 540 is held for a short time (for example, 0.052 seconds). Even when the ball is displaced to the open state, approximately 1 to 3 game balls are adjusted to enter the inside of the box-shaped member 542 during one short-time opening. Therefore, according to the configuration of the large winning opening 20 of this embodiment, if an appropriate firing operation (for example, right-handed) is performed at an appropriate timing during the small hit game (for example, after the right-handed hit notification), the game ball can be opened for the large winning opening. It is almost certain that the ball can enter 20.

The configuration of the large winning opening 20 shown in FIG. 50 is only an example, and the large winning opening 20 having a structure different from the illustrated example may be provided. For example, the opening / closing member (slide plate 540) of the large winning opening 20 may include a plurality of opening / closing members provided at distant positions, and the plurality of opening / closing members may be controlled to open / close at the same time.

FIG. 51 is a diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the large winning opening 20, and particularly shows the configuration of the lower region 550 of the large winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 opens and closes the entrance of the large winning opening 20 according to the control of the large winning opening solenoid 92. The large winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 to be in an open state, and operates the slide plate 540 so as to open the entrance of the large winning opening 20, so that a game ball can flow into the inside of the large winning opening 20. And. The large winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 in a closed state and operates the slide plate 540 so as to close the entrance of the large winning opening 20, so that the game ball cannot flow into the inside of the large winning opening 20. And. The game balls that have entered the large winning opening 20 once flow to the left and flow into the lower region 550 of the second large winning opening 22 from the passing port 548 through which the balls can pass one by one. The large prize detection device 25 detects the entry of the game ball into the large prize opening 20 in order to give the prize ball, and specifically detects the game ball that has passed through the passage port 548 and has fallen into the lower region 550. To do.

A discharge path 554 is provided in the lower region 550 of the grand prize opening 20. The discharge route 554 is a route for discharging the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 20 to the outside of the large winning opening 20, and is typically a route for discharging the game ball that has entered the pachinko gaming machine 500 to the outside. .. Further, in the lower region 550, a specific region opening / closing device 552 is provided in the middle of the flow path from the passage port 548 to the discharge path 554. The specific area that is the condition for transition to the small hit development big hit corresponds to the area under the specific area switchgear 552, and can be passed when the specific area switchgear 552 is opened, and the specific area switchgear 552 is closed. In that case, it becomes impossible to pass.

The specific area switchgear 552 operates so as to switch between an open state that enables passage to the specific area and a closed state that prevents passage to the specific area. The specific area switchgear 552 has a slide member or a valve member that operates in response to the control of the specific area switchgear solenoid 506. The specific area switchgear 552 operates so as to open the flow path to the specific area, so that the game ball can pass through the specific area and is in an open state, and operates so as to block the flow path to the specific area. As a result, it becomes a closed state that makes it impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area. It is expected that the specific area opening / closing device 552 shifts to the open state when the large winning opening 20 is opened, and after the large winning opening 20 is closed, the internal game ball flows down to the position of the specific area opening / closing device 552. It operates so that it waits for the design value and then closes after the transition to the closed state of the big winning opening.

The specific area passage detection device 504 is provided at a position below the specific area opening / closing device 552, and detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area. When the game ball passes through the specific area, the specific area passage detection device 504 generates specific area passage information indicating the passage. Upon receiving the specific area passage information, the ball entry determination means 201 of the main board 200 determines that the game ball has passed the specific area.

In the second embodiment, both the unit game in the special game and the small hit game end when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches the same predetermined number (10 in the embodiment). In other words, both the operation end condition of the special electric accessory 556 in the unit game of the special game and the operation end condition of the special electric accessory 556 in the small hit game reach 10 balls in the large winning opening 20. Including that. Specifically, the special game control means 260 ends the one unit game of the special game when a predetermined time has elapsed or when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 10. Is satisfied and ends. The small hit game control means 265 ends the small hit game on the assumption that the end condition is satisfied when a predetermined time elapses or when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 10. It should be noted that the V prize is not the end condition of the small hit game, and even after the V prize, the small hit game continues until the end condition is satisfied.

The opening time of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game is set to a short time during which the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 can enter the large winning opening 20. Further, the small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for a short time via the open / close control means 275 in one small hit game (during one operation of the special electric accessory 556). Can be repeated a predetermined maximum number of times. This upper limit is equal to or greater than the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 (that is, 10), which is the end condition of one unit game and the small hit game in the special game (in other words, the operation end condition of the special electric accessory 556). The number of times. In the embodiment, the number of times is 15 times, which is larger than the number of balls entered. When the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game reaches 10, the small hit game control means 265 may open the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game even if the number of times of opening is less than the upper limit (15 times). At that point, the big winning opening 20 is closed and the small hit game is finished.

The small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for a short time (opening time 0.052 seconds) and opens the large winning opening 20 from the first to the twelfth times in the small hit game. Repeat the set of short-time closure (closing time 1 second). Further, the small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for a short time (opening time 0.052 seconds) and the large winning opening 20 for the opening of the 13th and 14th large winning openings 20 in the small hit game. Perform a set of long-term closures (closing time 4 seconds). Further, the small hit game control means 265 executes an operation with an opening time of 0.052 seconds for opening the 15th large winning opening 20 in the small hit game, and when the 15th opening is completed, or an operation end condition. When a specified number of game balls have entered, the game is closed for 3.5 seconds.

According to the configuration of feature 1, only one large winning opening is arranged in the game area 81, in other words, the large winning opening for obtaining the V winning and the large winning opening for increasing the number of balls are shared. Therefore, it is possible to secure a wide board area for displaying the effect and operating the accessory, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect. Further, in the small hit game, since the same special electric accessory 556 as in the special game is operated, the payout is performed with a common number of prize balls, and the small hit game is controlled in the above-mentioned opening mode. Based on this, since a predetermined number of balls, which is a condition for ending the operation of the special electric accessory, can be expected, it is possible to obtain the same number of balls as one unit game of the special game, which is sufficient for the player. Can give a feeling.

As described in connection with FIG. 50, when the player continues to shoot the game ball, the game ball stays on the slide plate 540 of the large winning opening 20, so that the large winning opening 20 is once in the small hit game. Even if the opening time is short, at least one ball can be expected to enter. However, there is a possibility that the right-handed hit of the game ball may be delayed because the player does not notice the start of the small hit game. Therefore, the number of times the large winning opening 20 is opened in the small hit game is set to be equal to or greater than the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 which is the end condition of the small hit game (in the embodiment, the number of times is larger than the number of balls entered). Therefore, in the small hit game, it becomes easy to obtain the same number of balls as one unit game of the special game.

Furthermore, regarding the 13th and 14th opening of the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game, the closing time is relatively long to promote the player's awareness and the small hit game without the game ball being fired. Is ended, that is, the opportunity to acquire the small hit development big hit is missed, and the time reduction ends based on the occurrence of the small hit game, so that the small hit is originally generated with a high probability (small hit V). It becomes easy to prevent the change of the second special symbol that can be received from becoming difficult to execute. However, if the number of times of closing for a long time is increased too much, the number of out balls (so-called waste balls) that pass through the slide plate 540 of the large winning opening 20 when the player continuously fires the game balls increases. Therefore, by closing the large winning opening 20 for a long time twice in the small hit game, it is possible to suppress the end of the small hit game without the V winning and the suppression of the increase in the number of out balls.

In the second embodiment, the opening time of each of the opening times of the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game is set to 0.052 seconds, but as a modified example, at least one opening time is set. However, it may be different from other opening times. For example, the small hit game control means 265 may open the large winning opening 20 for 0.052 seconds 13 times and open the large winning opening 20 for 0.104 seconds once during the small hit game. .. That is, it is sufficient that at least one of the game balls rolling on the slide plate 540 of the large winning opening 20 is released 10 times or more for the time when it is assumed that the ball enters the large winning opening 20.

<Feature 2. Small hit game production ＞
The effect determining means 303 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 60 during the small hit game, and changes the display mode of the effect image according to the entry into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game. .. This effect image includes a first effect image and a second effect image. In the second embodiment, the effect determining means 303 determines whether to display the first effect image or the second effect image by a predetermined effect lottery (in other words, with a predetermined probability). As a modification, the effect determining means 303 may be configured to display only one of the first effect image and the second effect image during the small hit game.

The first effect image is an image corresponding to the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20, which is a condition for ending the small hit game. As described above, the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 (that is, the specified count number), which is a condition for ending the small hit game, can be said to be the maximum number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game. The number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20, which is the end condition of the unit game in the game, is 10 balls, which is the same as the number of balls entered.

FIG. 52 shows an example of the effect during the small hit game. The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the small hit game effect screen 560 during the execution of the small hit game. The small hit game effect screen 560 includes a right-handed instruction image 562, a V notification image 568, a round image 564, and a ball entry number notification image 566 as a first effect image for urging the player to hit right. The V broadcast image 568 and the round image 564 will be described later. The number of balls entered notification image 566 includes the same number of treasure box images as the number of balls entered (10 balls) into the large winning opening 20, which is a condition for ending the small hit game. In FIG. 38, an unopened treasure chest is shown by a rectangular parallelepiped, and an opened treasure chest is shown by a star.

The effect determining means 303 switches one unopened treasure chest image to an opened treasure chest image each time the ball entering the large winning opening 20 is detected by the ball entry determining means 201 during the small hit game. .. This suggests to the player that it is possible to enter 10 balls into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game, in other words, it is possible to obtain a large number of balls during the small hit game. It is possible to encourage the player to fire a game ball during the hit game.

The second production image will be described. The second effect image is an image showing the degree of expectation (hereinafter, also referred to as “expectation degree image”) in which high profit (possibility of acquiring many balls) is suggested in the later suggestion effect. It can be said that the expectation degree image is an image suggesting that there is a possibility of getting a lot of balls in a later game. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment (FIG. 42), the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment also stopped in a mode in which the symbol variation indicates a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a “small hit symbol”). In this case, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit differs depending on the small hit symbol. In the second embodiment, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit is divided into either 10 rounds or 4 rounds according to the small hit symbol (in each case, the first round is a small hit game).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, the number of times of shortening the time (in other words, the number of times of continuing the electric chew support) differs depending on the small hit symbol. Specifically, if the small hit symbol is of a specific type, it will be a small hit development big hit with 10 rounds and 100 times of time saving continuation, and if the small hit symbol is another type, it will be 10 rounds and 9 times of time saving continuation. It will be a hit development jackpot, or a small hit development jackpot with 4 rounds and 9 short-term continuations. When the number of times of shortening the working hours is 100 times, the next small hit will almost certainly occur during the shortening of the working hours (during the rush production), resulting in a continuous villa.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, in the case of the big hit of the symbol of the special figure 1, (1) 10 rounds and the number of times of shortening the time are 9 times, (2) 4 rounds and the time is shortened, depending on the big hit symbol. It is divided into a jackpot of 9 times, (3) 4 rounds and a jackpot of 1 time reduction continuation number. The distribution probabilities of (1) to (3) in the examples are 1%, 49%, and 50%. The symbol jackpot of special figure 2 is a jackpot of 4 rounds and 9 times of shortening continuation times.

When a V prize is generated in the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 allows the player to perform the small hit symbol according to the type of the symbol indicating the small hit (that is, the type of the small hit symbol when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) after the small hit game is completed. Display one of multiple types of suggestive effects that suggest possible profits. For example, a plurality of types of suggestion effects are associated with any of a plurality of types of small hit symbols, and are determined by the number of rounds of the small hit development jackpot, each number of time reductions after the end of the small hit development jackpot, or , It may be provided for each combination of the number of rounds and the number of times of shortening the time. In addition, the contents of the plurality of types of suggestion effects (motifs, characters, colors, etc.) differ depending on the size of the profit that the player can obtain. The suggestion effect will be described later in the description of feature 4.

The effect determining means 303 is an expectation image showing the degree of expectation that a high profit (for example, a big hit of 10 rounds or a time saving of 100 times is given) is suggested in the above-mentioned suggestion effect during the small hit game. Is displayed. For example, the effect determination means 303 may display an expectation degree image instead of the ball entry number notification image 566 on the small hit game effect screen 560 shown in FIG. 52, and displays the expectation degree image together with the ball entry number notification image 566. It may be displayed. Further, the V notification image 568, which is an image notifying that the V prize has been won, in other words, an image notifying the acquisition of the right to win the jackpot, may be used as the expectation degree image.

The effect determining means 303 changes the expectation degree image according to the ball entering the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game. The effect determining means 303 may change any one of the shape, pattern, and color of the expectation image according to the ball entering the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game. For example, (1) the expectation image is the V notification image 568, and (2) the colors of the V notification image are red, orange, yellow, green, and white from the one with the highest expectation of profit that the player can obtain. (3) It is assumed that the small hit symbol corresponds to 10 rounds and 100 times of time saving continuation. In this case, the effect determining means 303 may initially display the V notification image in white when the V winning is detected in the small hit game. After the V winning, each time a predetermined number (for example, one or two balls) of balls are detected in the large winning opening 20, the effect determining means 303 changes the color of the V notification image to green, yellow, orange, or red. It may be changed in the order of.

In the above example, when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game increases, the V notification image is finally displayed in red, so that the player's expectation for the subsequent suggestion effect and profit status Can be enhanced. In this way, as the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game increases, the accuracy of the expectation image increases, in other words, the reliability of the content of the suggestion effect after the expectation image shows increases. That is, by entering the ball into the large winning opening during the small hit game, it is possible to identify the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested by the subsequent suggestion effect, so that the game ball is played during the small hit game (especially after the V prize). It is possible to give the player an incentive to launch. Further, even in the small hit game, the player can be impressed with the playability of being able to obtain the ball output equivalent to one round of the special game.

The V notification image 568 is an image displayed after the game ball is detected by the specific area passage detection device 504 inside the large winning opening 20, and is a game ball that has already been entered in the small hit game when the display is started. Since the number (the number of remaining balls that can be entered) may vary depending on the situation, the initial display should be unified according to the mode at the time of entry, such as white (or green from the beginning as a chance-up pattern that will eventually become red or higher), and then entry. The mode that changes according to the ball is displayed by skipping the change mode in the middle when changing according to the winning, according to the predetermined change pattern from the time of entering the second ball to the time of entering the third ball. Can be adopted. In this case, "white (initial)", "green (3)", "yellow (5)", "orange (7)" (the numbers are the timing of change, the number of game balls entered during the small hit game. In the pattern of (shown), when the passage is detected by the specific area passage detection device 504 on the 4th ball, "white" is displayed as the V notification image, and the V notification image is displayed when the next game ball enters (5th ball). Will be "yellow". By adopting the method of skipping the display mode in the middle in this way, it is not necessary to have a production determination table depending on which ball has passed the specific area, and further, when entering the ball, the lottery result is fixed. Since it is displayed, it is possible to identify whether or not the display of the initial mode was a chance pattern and the final change mode. As for the pattern that changes according to the entry into the large winning opening 20, it is permissible to have an additional pattern that defines the 11th and 12th balls, which are called over-winning over the specified count number (usually). The final aspect corresponds to the 10th ball, and the over-winning amount is the same as that of the 10th ball, or the production pattern is set so that an exceptional premiere appears).

Further, the effect determining means 303 may change the expectation image with a predetermined probability (for example, 30% or the like) so that the expectation image shows a content different from the content of the suggestion effect. For example, when the content of the later suggestion effect suggests high profit, it may be changed to an expectation image showing that the expectation is low. Similarly, when the content of the later suggestion effect suggests a low profit, it may be changed to an expectation degree image showing that the expectation degree is high. As a result, it is possible to mix the expectation and anxiety of the player, or to make the player feel unexpected, and to enhance the interest of the game.

A modified example related to the feature 2 will be described. The sub-board 300 may further include a prize ball counting means for counting the number of prize balls paid out (number of balls to be paid out). The payout control board 155 or the main board 200 may notify the sub board 300 of the number of prize balls paid out. The prize ball counting means may count the number of prize balls paid out during the small hit game and the special game based on the number of prize balls notified from the payout control board 155 or the main board 200. Alternatively, the ball entry determination means 201 of the main board 200 may notify the sub board 300 of information indicating the ball entry of the game ball into each winning opening. The prize ball counting means may count the number of prize balls paid out during the small hit game and the special game based on the information indicating the entry into the large winning opening 20 notified from the main board 200. .. The number of prize balls when one ball is entered into the large prize opening 20 is 12.

The effect determining means 303 of this modification displays the small hit game effect screen 560 as shown in FIG. 52 during the small hit game, and the small hit game effect screen 560 counts the small hits by the prize ball counting means. Display the winning prize ball information indicating the number of prize balls paid out during the game. Here, the winning prize ball information is in the format of "○ departure / × departure". "From ○" indicates the number of prize balls paid out so far in this hit. "X departure" indicates the maximum number of prize balls that can be paid out in this hit, in other words, the maximum number of prize balls that the player can obtain in this hit.

As described above, the small hit game of the second embodiment is designed so that a predetermined count number (that is, 10 balls) can be entered while the large winning opening 20 is repeatedly opened 15 times for a short time. Therefore, "120 shots" (12 prize balls x 10 hits per entry), which is the number of prize balls in the specified count number, may be displayed for "x shots" during the small hit game. However, since the small hit game is a specification that repeats short opening and the acquisition of the prize ball is not certain, the production determination means 303 of this modified example is for both "○ departure" and "× departure" during the small hit game. , The initial value is set to "0 shots", and 12 shots are added each time a ball is entered into the large winning opening 20. As a result, even if 10 balls are not entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game due to the opening / closing timing of the large winning opening 20, the player is less likely to feel dissatisfied.

As will be described later in relation to the feature 4, the effect determining means 303 displays a suggestion effect suggesting the type of big hit (number of rounds, etc.) at the start of the special game in the small hit development big hit. The effect determining means 303 of this modification updates the “x shot” of the acquired prize ball information to a value corresponding to the number of rounds at the timing of displaying the suggested effect, in other words, at the timing of suggesting the number of rounds. Specifically, the value of "x departure" (that is, the number of prize balls won during the small hit game) up to that point is (number of rounds-1) x 12 prize balls per entry x 10 times. Is set to "x departure". For example, in the case of 10 rounds, the value obtained by adding 1080 shots to the number of prize balls won during the small hit game is set to "x shots".

According to the configuration of this modified example, by presenting the number of winning prize balls to the player even in the first round of the small hit development big hit (small hit game), it becomes easy for the player to have a sufficient feeling of coming out. The effect determining means 303 may execute a round number promotion effect during the special game to increase the number of rounds of the special game in appearance (for example, increase from 4 rounds to 10 rounds). In this case, the effect determining means 303 may update "x shots" (add "720 shots" for a difference of 6 rounds when the promotion effect occurs) according to the apparent number of rounds. Further, the winning prize ball information may further include the cumulative number of prize balls during the consecutive villas (that is, while the jackpot acquisition during the time reduction is repeated), and the production determining means 303 is in the consecutive villas counted by the prize ball counting means. The total number of prize balls paid out to may be displayed as the cumulative number of prize balls.

<Feature 3. Small hit development Big hit production ＞
As shown in the small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 52, when a V prize is generated during the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 displays a V notification image 568, which is an effect of notifying that the V prize has been won. Further, the effect determining means 303 displays a round image 564 showing the cumulative number of times the special electric accessory 556 has been operated from the small hit game to the special game, triggered by the V prize in the small hit game.

The effect determining means 303 displays a round image 564 indicating that it is the first operation of the special electric accessory 556 during the small hit game after the V prize. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, a round image 564 showing the first round is displayed. During the small hit game, the slide plate 540 of the large winning opening 20 is opened up to 15 times, but the special electric accessory 556 is operated once. When the small hit symbol corresponds to the big hit of 10 rounds, the round image 564 showing the 10th round is displayed in the final round of the small hit development big hit.

According to the feature 3, an image showing "first round" or the like is displayed even during the small hit game, that is, a series of count displays are performed from the small hit game to the special game. This suggests that it is possible to obtain the same number of balls as one round of the special game in the small hit game, and it is possible to encourage the player to shoot the game ball even after the V prize during the small hit game. If there is no V prize in the small hit game, the second and subsequent rounds (special game) will not be executed. Therefore, by displaying the round image 564 on the condition that the V prize is won, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the second and subsequent rounds will continue when there is no V prize.

<Feature 4. Small hit development Production at the start of big hit in big hit>
As mentioned in part, the player regarding the first type of profit that the player can obtain for the special game executed when the V prize is won in the small hit game, and the normal game after the end of the special game. At least one of the second types of profits that can be obtained differs depending on the type of small hit symbol when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The first profit is, for example, the number of rounds of small hit development big hit, and includes 10 rounds and 4 rounds in the second embodiment. The second benefit is, for example, the number of times of shortening the working hours, and includes 100 times and 9 times in the second embodiment.

When the production determining means 303 wins a V during the small hit game, the large winning opening in the special game executed following the small hit game after the final opening of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game is completed. By the time of the first opening of 20, a suggestion effect suggesting the type of profit that the player can obtain is displayed according to the type of the small hit symbol that triggered the small hit game. The suggestion effect is at least one of the number of times the special electric accessory 556 is operated in the small hit development big hit, the number of times the accessory continuous operation device is operated in the special game, and the number of times of shortening the time after the end of the special game (for example, 100 times, 9 times, etc.). The content may suggest one or any combination. For example, the suggestion effect may include the content of displaying the bonus names "○○ bonus", "XX bonus", and "△△ chance" corresponding to the combination of the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit and the number of times of shortening the time.

Further, the suggestion effect may include a button effect. For example, the suggestion effect may display a content that prompts the player to operate the effect button 109 or the cross key 110. The effect determining means 303 suggests the type of profit that the player can obtain when a predetermined button operation (for example, pressing a button more than a predetermined number of times) is input while displaying the suggestion effect, for example, the above bonus The name may be displayed on the suggestion effect screen.

FIG. 53 shows the display timing of the suggestion effect. The effect determining means 303 is a closing period (3.5 seconds) after the end of the final opening of the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game + a start demonstration time of the character continuous operation device (role continuous operation start demonstration time) (10. In 14 seconds of 5 seconds), in other words, the suggestion effect is displayed between the first round and the second round of the small hit development big hit. Note that FIG. 39 shows a situation in which the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game is opened 15 times, but when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 10 during the small hit game, at that time. The small hit game is completed, and a closing period of 3.5 seconds is provided after the opening is completed no matter how many times the opening is completed. Further, the expectation degree effect described in feature 2 is executed before the suggestion effect.

According to the feature 4, the interest of the game can be enhanced by suggesting the types of profits that the player can obtain in connection with the small hit development big hit. Further, by displaying the suggestion effect on condition that the V prize is won in the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the effect content and the actual profit from becoming inconsistent when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game.

A modified example related to the feature 4 will be described. When there is no V prize in the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 is the closing time (3.5 seconds) after the final opening of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game + the end demonstration of the small hit game (for example, 0. The failure effect may be displayed within 1 second). The failure effect may be content that suggests or notifies that the jackpot will not develop, or may be content that suggests or notifies that the expected profit acquisition has failed. In FIG. 53 of the second embodiment, when the V prize is won, the end demo time of the small hit game is not set, but this is the end demo time set in advance when the V prize is won. This is because the cancellation (0.1 seconds when V is not won) is canceled (not executed as "0 seconds" or practically not executed as "0.004 seconds (1 interrupt)"). is there.

Another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. The production determining means 303 has a special content that suggests that the occurrence of the next small hit development big hit (in other words, the small hit development big hit consecutive villa) is substantially determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect may be displayed as a suggestion effect. The special effect may include, for example, the display of a "VV bonus" indicating that a bonus (small hit development big hit or big hit) is continuously generated. The predetermined condition may be that the occurrence of the next small hit development big hit is substantially confirmed. Specifically, as explained in (1) Feature 5, there is information that becomes a small hit in the hold due to pre-reading, and (2) This big hit (small hit symbol) is given 100 times of time saving continuation. It may be something that is done.

Yet another modification related to feature 4 will be described. The effect determining means 303 refers to the large winning opening 20 in the special game executed following the small hit game after the feasible period of the suggestion effect, that is, the final opening of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game is completed. In addition to the suggestion effect, one or both of the music selection effect and the character selection effect may be displayed before the first opening (displayed at the same time as the execution of the suggestion effect or after the end of the suggestion effect). The music selection effect may be an effect in which a music to be output from the speaker during one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game can be selected from a plurality of candidates. In the character selection effect, a character (that is, an effect mode that is an embodiment of the effect) to appear in the effect during one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game can be selected from a plurality of candidates. It may be.

Small hit development In the big hit, the small hit game is the first round, and the number of rounds in which the big hit effect (special game effect) can be executed is one round less. Therefore, by making the music or character selectable between the first and second rounds, it is possible to provide the player with an effect using the music and the character selected by the player for a longer period of time. If it is considered that the selectable period of the music or the character is insufficient only between the rounds, the selectable period may be continued over the execution period of the second round.

Yet another modification related to feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the suggestion effect is displayed during the final closing period (3.5 seconds) of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game + the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the continuous accessory operating device. .. As a modification, the suggestion effect may be displayed during the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device. In addition, when the small hit end demo (for example, 0.004 seconds) is executed at the end of the small hit game in which the V prize occurs, the final closing period (3.5 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small hit game + small The suggestion effect may be displayed during the period of the hit end demo time (0.004 seconds) + the start demo time of the accessory continuous operation device (10.5 seconds).

Yet another modification related to feature 4 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 may further include vibration detecting means for preventing fraud. The vibration detecting means may detect the presence or absence of vibration when the large winning opening 20 is opened in the small hit game, and if the vibration is detected, execute a predetermined fraud notification process (warning display, notification to an external device, etc.). .. Generally, in a unit game or a small hit game of a special game in which a large winning opening having a specific area is opened and closed, vibration detection is enabled during the opening period and the residual ball detection period after the opening period ends. According to the configuration of feature 4, the timing of vibration detection is removed and the suggestion effect is performed (assuming that 5 seconds is the effective period of vibration detection from the transition to the 3.5 second closing period of the grand prize opening, the suggestion effect is performed. Since the button validity period is generated after 6 seconds from the start), it is possible to perform a suggestion effect of generating vibration, such as an effect of causing the player to press the button. In the button validity period, before the image display indicating that the validity period is displayed (image display imitating the effect button 109), a display suggesting that the validity period is reached (button image is faded in, etc.) The button display introduction effect) may be performed, but when the button display introduction effect is started, the effect button 109 may be operated by the player before the valid period, so the button display introduction effect It is preferable to shift the start of the above after the effective period of vibration detection has expired.

<Feature 5. Small hit look-ahead ＞
As described in the prerequisite technique and the first embodiment, the pre-determination means 235 of the main board 200 receives a lottery value (for example, when a ball enters the second starting port 12 as a trigger). Regardless of whether or not the symbol change based on the winning / failing lottery value) is started immediately, the result when the winning / failing judgment (main judgment) based on the lottery value acquired with the entry of the ball is executed is a big hit or a small hit. Determine in advance whether or not it will be a hit. When the pre-determination result of the ball entry is a big hit or a small hit, the pre-determination means 235 transmits the pre-determination information indicating that the ball is a big hit or a small hit in the variation corresponding to the ball entry to the effect determining means 303. .. The pre-determination information transmitted to the effect determining means 303 is transmitted in a manner in which it is possible to identify whether a big hit or a small hit is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, by transmitting the information indicating the hit / fail range “4” as the preliminary judgment information, it becomes possible to identify the small hit.

In the production determination means 303, a V prize is generated during the small hit game, and one or more lottery values for which the pre-determination information received from the main board 200 regarding the reservation for the special figure 2 is held is held. If so, the effect of notifying in advance the occurrence of a small hit in the normal game after the end of the special game between the V prize and the end of the special game and the start of the normal game (hereinafter, "small hit notice"). (Also called "directing") can be executed more than once. In other words, the effect determining means 303 determines that at least one small hit is executed when the right to shift to the big hit is acquired during the small hit game and there is a hold in which the winning / failing lottery is a small hit. The small hit notice effect of the content to be suggested or notified can be executed in the period from the end of the big hit to the start of the time saving state. The hold that is the target of pre-reading for small hits is the special figure 2 hold that is the main game during the time saving. In the embodiment, the effect determining means 303 displays as many V stock images as the number of small hits to be announced, as a small hit advance notice effect, which makes it appear that "V" is stocked in appearance.

The effect determining means 303 can execute the small hit advance notice effect at a plurality of advance notice timings from the V prize to the transition to the time saving state after the end of the small hit development big hit. The plurality of notice timings are configured so that the larger the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit, the larger the number of small hit hold notices. Specifically, the plurality of advance notice timings in the second embodiment are at the time of V winning, the third round of the small hit development big hit, the ninth round of the small hit development big hit, and the time of the big hit end demonstration. The number of small hits announced at each of the plurality of advance notice timings is limited to one. That is, one small hit notice effect increases the number of V-stock images by one.

Therefore, only when the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit is the maximum (specifically, 10 rounds), it is possible to execute the small hit notice effect four times, that is, all four holds (special figure 2 hold). When it is a small hit, it can be suggested to the player. In other words, if the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit is 4, the small hit notice effect of the 9th round cannot be executed, so even if all four holds are small hits, a maximum of 3 small hit notifications are sent. Stay in. The effect determining means 303 determines by lottery how many times the small hit advance notice effect is to be executed and at what advance notice timing, up to the number of reserved small hit prior determination results.

In the case of information in which the pre-determination information for all four existing holds is a small hit, the effect determining means 303 executes four small hit advance notice effects, but at least one small hit advance notice among them. As a production, a premier production may be displayed. The premier effect is a rare effect that is not displayed except when all four holds are small hits, and may be content that suggests or informs that a very large profit can be obtained.

According to Feature 5, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that a large profit can be obtained by suggesting that the small hit development big hit can be continuously obtained in the machine equipped with the small hit development big hit. It can be done, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

A modified example related to the feature 5 will be described. When three small hits are held during the first small hit development big hit (or during the big hit) generated earlier, the effect determining means 303 conceals one small hit and two V stock images. May be displayed. If the fluctuation immediately after the end of the small hit development jackpot becomes the second small hit development jackpot, the V stock image is updated to be reduced to one (at this time, the hold existing from the first small hit development jackpot). There are two small hits inside). Further, when one hold generated during the fluctuation of the second small hit is a small hit (the small hit in the hold changes to three), the effect determining means 303 accompanies the second small hit. Even if the small hit notice effect that increases the V stock image by 2 including the number of small hits in the hold that existed during the first small hit development big hit during the small hit game or the big hit game is displayed. Good. As described above, the definitions of the first small hit development big hit and the second small hit development big hit are the special games performed during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device after the V prize is won during the small hit game. However, since the execution timing of this small hit look-ahead effect includes "at the time of V winning" as described above in this embodiment, there is also a case where small hit look-ahead (V stock notification) is performed during the small hit game. , In this paragraph, it is expressed as a small hit look-ahead executed in the "first small hit development big hit" and the "second small hit development big hit".

As a method 1 for realizing this, the effect determining means 303 uses the pre-determination information at the time of a small hit or a big hit (for example, when the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is stopped or when the V prize is won in the small hit game). The number of small hits in the hold may be specified based on the above. The effect determining means 303 calculates the difference between the number of V stocks being displayed and the number of small hits in hold, and selects one of the reportable V stock effect patterns by lottery with the difference as the upper limit. You may. For example, a small hit notice effect that increases the number of differences and the V stock image may be displayed.

Further, as the method 2, the effect determining means 303 specifies the number of small hits in the hold based on the prior determination information at the time of a small hit or a large hit, and based on the specified number of small hits, the pattern of the small hit notice effect. (For example, the display timing of the small hit notice effect) may be determined. The effect determining means 303 may cancel the display of the small hit advance notice effect according to the number of displayed V stocks at the display timing of the small hit advance notice effect based on the determined pattern, and replaces the display with the normal effect pattern. May be good. For example, when three small hit notice effects (at the time of V winning, the ninth round, at the end demo) are decided, and when two V stocks are displayed from before the small hit, two small hits are displayed. You may cancel the hit notice effect (for example, the 9th round behind, at the end demo).

According to this variant, in order to specify the number of small hits held for each small hit (or small hit development big hit), a special effect (premier effect) when the number of reserved small hits is the maximum (4). Can increase the chances of doing. Since the timing of displaying the fourth V-stock image by the small hit notice effect is different, for example, the effect determining means 303 turns each V-stock image into a rainbow color when four V-stock images are accumulated. It is preferable to change and display a special effect (premier effect) in the normal game immediately after the end of the small hit development big hit.

Another modification related to feature 5 will be described. Even if there is no small hit in the hold, the effect determining means 303 is in the hold by lottery (with a predetermined probability) when the number of time reduction continuations after the end of the current small hit development big hit is a predetermined value or a predetermined value or more. A small hit notice effect similar to the case where there is a small hit may be displayed. In this modification, when the number of times of shortening the time is 100 times, the small hit notice effect (that is, the V stock image) can be displayed. This is because the small hit probability of the special figure 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is 1/10, and the small hit is almost certainly generated during 100 fluctuations in the time saving state. The number of times that the small hit notice effect is displayed is not limited to 100, and may be a value equal to or greater than the number of times that small hits are almost certainly expected to occur according to the small hit probability. In addition, the V stock image displayed in the small hit notice effect of this modified example must be deleted, which suggests that it is a chance of V winning even in the case of a big hit that does not require the subsequent V winning. Since there is a risk of misunderstanding about the subsequent game (decrease in reliability of the display due to the possibility of a situation where a small hit is not made even once even though there is a V stock display), the modified example is small for convenience. The hit notice production is called the second small hit notice production.

According to the second small hit notice effect of this modified example, the V stock image remains even if four holds are exhausted after the small hit development big hit, so that the small hit (or big hit) is extremely likely to be executed. Can be continuously executed, so a surprising effect can be realized. For example, the effect determining means 303 displays the image of "HOLD" on the V stock image at the time of the fourth hold (off) digestion after the small hit development big hit, and "HOLD" until the big hit or the fluctuation of the small hit. The display of the V-stock image may be maintained. The effect determining means 303 may end the display of the "HOLD" V-stock image at any of the start, the change, and the end of the change of the symbol of the big hit or the small hit.

In this embodiment, the V-stock display is subtracted and displayed when notifying that the execution of the small hit game is deterministic in the execution of the small hit variation (when 0, the display is deleted). About the V stock display for 100 times of time reduction in the modified example The reason for erasing the V stock image that is "HOLD" even in the big hit is that the time reduction continuation number is reset when the big hit occurs, and when the time reduction continuation number is short, the small hit during that time reduction This is because there is no compensation for the occurrence of. For the same reason, if there is no small hit in the hold and there is a big hit, the second small hit notice effect is displayed even if the number of time reduction continuations after the end of this small hit development big hit is equal to or more than the above predetermined value. I won't let you. Alternatively, even if the lottery for the small hit notice effect is won, the execution of the effect is cancelled.

Yet another modification of feature 5 will be described. The effect determining means 303 has a small hit and a big hit in the hold, and even if the big hit fluctuates before at least one small hit, the small hit notice effect of notifying the number of small hits in the hold by the V stock image. Is displayed. The effect determining means 303 indicates the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image (the number of V stock images indicates the number of small hits) as the V stock digestion effect between the start of the fluctuation of the small hit and the start of the small hit game. In that case, the V stock image itself) is reduced by one.

On the other hand, the effect determining means 303 does not change the number of small hits shown by the V stock image when the big hit fluctuates, and maintains the number of small hits shown by the V stock image over the big hit period. If there is a small hit in the hold newly generated during the big hit fluctuation or the big hit game, the effect determining means 303 displays a small hit notice effect that increases the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image during the big hit game. You may let me.

The effect pattern of the V stock digestion effect executed in the small hit variation in the normal game in the time saving state may include an effect pattern of a special mode such that the V stock image emits rainbow colors and is erased (normal pattern). Is an example of something that emits white light and is erased). When the small hit symbol of this time brings high profit (for example, 10 rounds of small hit development big hit or 100 times of shortened continuous times), the effect determining means 303 is produced in a special mode as an effect pattern of V stock digestion effect. A pattern may be selected to display a special aspect of the V-stock digestion effect. This makes it possible to effectively foretell the player that a high profit will be brought about. In the present embodiment, the result of preliminarily determining the hold of the special figure 2 to be digested in the normal game during the time-saving game, which is referred to when the effect determining means 303 determines the execution of the small hit notice effect, is a special symbol. It does not include information on the stop display mode (small hit symbol), and uses the preliminary judgment information related to the random number used for the hit / fail judgment to judge in advance only whether or not the hold is a small hit. Therefore, at the stage of being displayed as a V stock image, the type of small hit development big hit that occurs at each V winning opportunity is not determined, so the number of V winning opportunities is simply displayed. However, as in this modification, the V stock is switched to the digestion effect based on the stop symbol information of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the effect determination means 303 when the fluctuation is actually started. It will be possible to diversify the production using images and improve the interest.

Yet another modification of feature 5 will be described. As described in the first embodiment, the specific game control means 270 ends the time reduction when a small hit occurs. Therefore, if the small hit game does not win a V prize (so to speak, a flat tire), after the small hit game ends, the normal game is in a normal state, which is not a time-saving game. The effect determining means 303 did not win a V in the small hit game, but if a V stock image indicating that at least one small hit is held at the end of the small hit game is displayed, after the small hit game is completed. , You may display an effect that makes it appear that the time reduction is continuing. In other words, the effect determining means 303 may display the effect in the time saving state (or the effect having similar contents) as the effect in the normal game in the normal state after the end of the small hit game.

According to this configuration, it is possible to connect to the next small hit while maintaining the player's expectation for the consecutive villa. In this modification, the effect determining means 303 is an exceptional effect in which a symbol variation pattern that can be selected by the main CPU in the normal state and an effect pattern (variation effect pattern, notice effect pattern) during the time reduction are associated with each other. The pattern table is stored, and the effect pattern is determined by referring to the exceptional effect pattern table.

The present invention has been described above based on the second embodiment. The second embodiment is an example, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications are possible for the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.

The first modification will be described. In the first modification, mainly, the configuration for continuing the firing even after the V winning is shown for the feature 3 and the feature 4 of the second embodiment. The effect determining means 303 displays a mission effect such as "Enter the attacker (large winning opening 20) and save the gauge!" Instead of the count effect by the object of the treasure box during the small hit game. May be good. As an example of this effect, an empty indicator display (or an indicator having a different initial amount depending on the degree of chance) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60 as the small hit game occurs, and the large hit game is in progress. An example is an example in which an effect of expanding the area of the expectation suggestion display in the indicator display (effect of accumulating gauges) is executed when the ball enters the winning opening 20.

Further, the effect determining means 303 displays an image showing the expectation of the result of the suggestion effect between the first and second rounds of the small hit development big hit in this mission effect, similarly to the display of the expectation image of the feature 2. Depending on the degree of achievement of the mission (how much the gauge is accumulated in the above example), the mode of the image showing the degree of expectation of the profit obtained by the small hit development big hit may be changed. The display of the indicator is not limited to the increase mode, but may be a decrease mode, or is continuously changed like an indicator as an effect of promoting the continuation of firing by connecting to the expectation degree suggestion. Instead, it shows whether or not the item is displayed when the treasure box is opened according to the ball entry, such as "Chance by acquiring item XX, and great chance if you can acquire all three items". Therefore, the expectation degree may be suggested by the number or combination of the finally displayed suggestion objects.

Further, the effect determining means 303 is held every time a game ball having a predetermined unit amount (1 ball or 2 balls, etc.) enters the large winning opening 20, or every time the gauge in the mission effect increases by the unit amount. It may be decided by lottery whether or not to display the effect of suggesting or notifying the number of small hits (small hit notice effect of feature 5). When this lottery is won, the effect determining means 303 may display a small hit notice effect that suggests or notifies the small hit if there is an unnotified small hit in the hold.

Further, when there is a small hit in the hold, the effect determining means 303 has a predetermined probability (for example, 2%) in the vicinity of the large winning opening 20 according to the ball entering the large winning opening 20 after the V winning. The light guide plate installed in may be turned on. When the light guide plate is turned on, the effect determining means 303 has a special effect (described above) that suggests that the small hit development jackpot consecutive villa has been confirmed as a suggestion effect between the first and second rounds of the small hit development jackpot. VV bonus) may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 100%).

A second modification will be described. The second modification also mainly shows the configuration for continuing the firing of the feature 3 and the feature 4 of the second embodiment even after the V prize is won. At the start of the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 includes a large prize opening image and a character image showing the large winning opening 20, and is a production (referred to as a "launch promotion production") in which the large winning opening 20 is aimed at and the firing is urged. .) May be displayed. When a V prize is won in the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 displays the V notification image as shown in FIG. 52, but continues to display the launch promotion effect for a while after the V notification image is displayed. May be good. That is, the V notification image and the firing promotion effect may be displayed in parallel.

The timing to end the display of the launch promotion effect is the one when a certain time has passed after the V prize and the earlier when the closing condition of the big prize opening in the small hit game is satisfied (10 balls are entered or 15 times are opened). It may be. Alternatively, the timing to end the display of the launch promotion effect is when there is a V prize and 3 or more balls are entered in the large winning opening 20, or when 3 or more balls are entered in the large winning opening 20 and then the V winning (even after a few seconds). It may be).

In addition, the effect determining means 303 displays the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game (such as the number of balls entered notification image 566 in FIG. 52) and the image of the launch promotion effect from the V notification image 568. May also have a higher display priority. For example, the effect determining means 303 draws the number of incoming balls notification image 566 and the image of the launch promotion effect on a drawing layer that is relatively higher than the drawing layers of the plurality of layers provided in the effect display device 60. It may be arranged so as not to be hidden by other images. Further, when the display priority of the V notification image 568 is increased, the effect determining means 303 launches the ball entry number notification image 566 or launches at a position different from the V notification image 568 so as not to overlap with the V notification image 568. An image of the promotion effect may be arranged. Further, the effect determining means 303 may make the size of the ball entry number notification image 566 and the image of the launch promotion effect smaller than the case where the V notification image 568 is not displayed so as not to overlap with the V notification image 568.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, an effect example applicable to the second embodiment and the modified example will be described. FIG. 54 (a) shows a variation effect screen 570 that notifies the occurrence of a small hit (or a big hit), and shows a state in which the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is stopped in a mode indicating a small hit (or a big hit). There is. Further, on the variation effect screen 570 of FIG. 54 (a), the character image 572 is displayed in a mode of suggesting or notifying a small hit (or a big hit).

FIG. 54 (b) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 54 (a). The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54 (b) is displayed as, for example, a small hit game start demo. The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54B includes a right-handed instruction image 562 that instructs the player to right-handed, a large-winning opening image 574 that imitates the appearance of the large-winning opening 20, and a character image 572. .. In the small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54 (b), the character image 572 is displayed in a mode that encourages right-handed striking (for example, a state in which the right is pointed).

FIG. 54 (c) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 54 (b). The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54 (c) is displayed, for example, after the V prize is generated in the small hit game. The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 54 (c) prompts the attacker (large winning opening 20) to aim at the V notification image 568 that notifies the V winning, the round image 564 indicating that it is the first round, and the attacker (large winning opening 20). Includes message 576 and gauge image 578 showing the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening 20. The gauge image 578 corresponds to the ball entry number notification image 566 of the second embodiment, and the color changes according to the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20, for example.

FIG. 55 (a) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 54 (c). In the small hit game production screen 560 of FIG. 55 (a), since the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game is a predetermined number or more (for example, 7 balls or more), it is launched aiming at the large winning opening 20. The message 576 and the big winning opening image 574 for urging the player to do so are hidden.

FIG. 55 (b) shows an inter-round effect screen 580 following FIG. 55 (a). The inter-round effect screen 580 displays the inter-round effect displayed from the end of the small hit game (first round) to the start of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. The inter-round effect corresponds to the suggestive effect of feature 4 of the second embodiment. The inter-round effect screen 580 includes a button image 584 that prompts the operation of the effect button 109 and the like, and a bonus suggestion image 582 that suggests the type of the current jackpot from among a plurality of types of jackpots that differ in the number of rounds and the number of times the time is shortened. The bonus suggestion image 582 may include an image imitating a roulette wheel that rotates in response to an operation of the effect button 109 or the like. Further, the inter-round effect screen 580 includes an effect image 586 at the edge of the screen. The color of the effect image 586 may change with the passage of time, and at the end of the inter-round effect, the effect image 586 may change to the same color as the gauge image 578 on the small hit game effect screen 560.

FIG. 55 (c) shows a jackpot effect screen 588 following FIG. 55 (b). The jackpot effect screen 588 of FIG. 55 (c) shows the effect of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. As described in part, the jackpot effect screen 588 includes a round image 564, a winning prize ball information 590, and a V stock image 592. The V-stock image 592 of FIG. 55 (c) shows that two small hits are stocked (that is, there are two small hits in the hold).

A third modification will be described. The conditions for ending the time reduction in the pachinko gaming machine 500 are (1) the number of fluctuations A (for example, 7 times) in Special Figure 1 and (2) the number of fluctuations B (for example, 100 times, 9 times or 1 time) in Special Figure 2. 3) The number of fluctuations C of the special figures 1 and 2 (for example, 100 times, 15 times or 7 times (A + B-1)) is included. As described above in the first embodiment, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 switch the variation pattern table according to the variation of each of the special figures 1 and 2.

Process related to time saving end 1:
The first variation pattern determining means 231 of this modification switches the variation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the timing of the end of the time reduction. The number of fluctuation pattern candidates (the number of selectable candidates) specified in the fluctuation pattern table for time saving in Special Figure 1 is small. Therefore, by forcibly switching the fluctuation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the end of the time reduction, the effect determined according to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 hold becomes monotonous during the multiple fluctuations after the end of the time reduction. It can be avoided.

Process related to time saving end 2:
On the other hand, in the second variation pattern determining means 232 of the present modification, even if the time reduction ends, the four variations after the time reduction ends refer to a variation pattern table (mode 7 table in FIG. 43) different from the usual one. The fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is determined. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, since the time saving effect mode (rush effect of FIG. 40) continues while the hold of special figure 2 is exhausted after the time saving ends, the time saving ends exceptionally under the time saving end condition of special figure 1. However, when the special figure 2 hold occurs, it is necessary to select the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the time saving effect mode.

Process related to time saving end 3:
In the case of no V winning (puncture) in the small hit game, which is an exceptional time saving end, the first variation pattern determining means 231 switches the variation pattern table of the special figure 1 to the mode 0 table of the special figure 1. Further, the second variation pattern determining means 232 also switches the variation pattern table of the special figure 2 to the mode 0 table of the special figure 2.

In the above process 3, there is a possibility that a small hit does not occur in the special figure 1 as in the first embodiment, or a small hit may occur in the special figure 1, and the small hit game of the special figure 1 occurs. It is executed when a V prize can be won in the same manner as in Special Figure 2. On the other hand, there is a possibility that a small hit may occur in the special figure 1, but when the opening / closing control of the specific area opening / closing device 552 is performed so as not to win a V in the small hit game of the special figure 1 (small hit in the special figure 1). (When the game is designed to puncture almost certainly), the small hit game of FIG. 1 does not control the above-mentioned process 3 and the time saving end. That is, in the small hit game of Special Figure 1, the time reduction is continued even if the V prize is not won. In order to prevent the time reduction from ending due to a puncture in the small hit game when a small hit occurs due to the fluctuation of special figure 1 before the special figure 2 hold occurs at the time of the first hit (at the time of the transition to the first time reduction). Is.

A fourth modification will be described. In the fourth modification, a modification relating to the round indicator lamp will be described. As described in the prerequisite technology, the game status display unit 76 functions as a round indicator lamp that displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game by the 7-segment LED. The main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) has both a 10-round symbol jackpot and a 10-round small hit development jackpot (small hit 1R, jackpot 9R), and a game status display unit 76 (that is, a round indicator). May emit light in the same pattern. Similarly, the main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) has the same pattern of the game state display unit 76 in both the 4-round symbol big hit and the 4-round small hit development big hit (small hit 1R, big hit 3R). You may make it emit light with.

In the main board 200, in the 10-round small hit development big hit and the 4-round small hit development big hit, the start of the special gaming state based on the operation of the V prize and the accessory continuous operation device after the V prize (small hit development). Until the start of the big hit), the game status display unit 76 may be made to emit light in a common pattern for the small hit game. Then, after winning the V prize, the game state display unit 76 may be made to emit light in the same pattern as the 10-round symbol jackpot and in the same pattern as the 4-round symbol jackpot, respectively. This makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish between 10 rounds and 4 rounds before winning a V.

A fifth modification will be described. In the fifth modification, a modification relating to the performance display unit 159 will be described. As described in the prerequisite technology, the performance display unit 159 "calculates and displays the ratio of the total number of prize balls (referred to as the base value) to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of safe balls and out balls". In this modification, the base value is displayed especially during the normal game in the normal state (low-probability game state and non-time-saving game state), and during the normal game during the time-saving game and when the accessory continuous operation device is operated. During the special game, it is not treated as counting data for displaying the performance display unit.

In the gaming machines described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the time-saving game is ended when the small hit game corresponding to the substantially first round of the small hit development big hit is started, and the small hit game is ended. Along with this, it is configured to operate the accessory continuous actuating device. Therefore, during the small hit game, it means that the state is the same as that of the normal game (low probability game state and non-time saving game state) in the normal state, and the state corresponding to the substantially first round in the small hit development big hit. In spite of this, the acquired game ball will be counted as the base value at the time of normal game in the normal state. Under such circumstances, when the base value of the fifth modification is calculated, a safe ball equivalent to a 1R jackpot is ejected each time a small hit development jackpot that becomes a small hit V occurs (second embodiment). 120 balls) is added to the base value, so in a small hit game that should be treated as a special game in terms of the game, even values that should not be counted originally are included in the count data of the performance display unit 159. There is a risk that this will happen.

Therefore, as a fifth modification, the optimum method as the data counting method of the performance display unit 159 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment in which the small hit development big hit is adopted will be described below.

Regarding the data displayed on the performance display unit 159 of the fifth modification example, since the main CPU 290 is executing the small hit game which is the small hit development big hit, the execution of the big hit game becomes definite when the V prize is won. After the V prize is considered to be equivalent to a big hit, the total number of prize balls generated by entering the big prize opening 20 after the V prize, and the safe balls and out balls fired after the V prize are calculated as the base value. Adopt a method of controlling to be outside. As a method for satisfying the gaming state equivalent to the big hit after the V prize, the flag related to the operation of the condition device or the accessory continuous operation device is set to the same as during the big hit based on the V prize during the small hit game. You can switch to a value.

By doing so, for example, during the small hit game of the second embodiment, when the game ball that has entered the third ball passes through the specific area (V prize is won), the game ball of the fourth ball is released. Small hit development It can be regarded as a prize ball generated in a big hit, and only "36 balls" (12 prize balls x 3 incoming balls) are added as counting targets as the number of prize balls generated during normal games in the normal state. Therefore, in a gaming machine that adopts a small hit development big hit, the base during the normal game in the normal state is excessively raised based on the occurrence of the small hit game corresponding to the actual first round. It can be prevented from being damaged.

A sixth modification will be described. In each embodiment, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit and the number of times of shortening the time after the end of the small hit development big hit are determined according to the small hit symbol. As a modification, at least one of the number of rounds and the number of times of shortening of time may be determined according to the result of a lottery (a small hit symbol may be involved) at the time of winning a V, instead of the small hit symbol.

(Third Example)
The basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, the functional configuration of the main board 200, and the functional configuration of the sub-board 300 are the same as those of the second embodiment (FIGS. 49, 3, 4). , FIG. 11). Further, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment is provided with a setting changing device 170 (FIG. 2) in the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technology, and is set in 6 stages (settings 1 to 6) as game settings. ), The probability that the winning / failing lottery will be a big hit has a setting difference in addition to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, and the probability that it will be a small hit is a specification that does not have a setting difference.

Hereinafter, the premise technology, the differences from the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technology, the first embodiment and the second embodiment are described with the same reference numerals. To do.

The outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment has the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, but in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Then, an effect of suggesting the set value stored in the setting change device 170 (setting memory) to the player (hereinafter, also referred to as “setting suggestion effect”) is executed.

The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500 may be stored in both the RAM of the main board 200 (for example, the memory of the setting changing device 170) and the RAM of the sub board 300. The sub-board 300 may execute the setting suggestion effect with reference to the set value stored in the RAM of the sub-board 300. For example, the main board 200 may transmit a predetermined command indicating the changed setting value to the sub board 300 at the timing when the setting change is confirmed, and the sub board 300 may store the set value in the RAM. Further, the main board 200 may transmit a predetermined command indicating the current set value to the sub board 300 even when the power is turned on and the RAM is cleared.

Further, the main board 200 may include the set value information indicating the current set value in various commands transmitted to the sub board 300 each time the symbol changes. Similarly, the main board 200 may include set value information indicating the current set value in various commands transmitted to the sub board 300 at the time of special game and error recovery. In this way, by transmitting the set value information at a predetermined opportunity during the game, the set value stored in the main board 200 and the set value stored in the sub board 300 can be synchronized even during the game. It becomes easier to maintain the fairness of the game. For example, if an illegal operation is performed to illegally change only the main setting value while the sub-board 300 is being dropped, the setting value after the illegal change is reflected on the sub-board 300 side, and the setting value after the illegal change is used for the game. It can be presented to people and staff of amusement stores.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment has the following four features relating to the setting suggestion effect. These features can be implemented as a single unit, or in any combination, and can also be in any combination with the features described in the prerequisite technology, the first embodiment, and the second embodiment.

Features 1. Ends only at V stock Demo setting suggestion:
Since the setting suggestion effect is not common in the conventional pachinko gaming machines, when the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the end demo of the special game, the setting suggestion effect is in an advantageous state (for example, a probability change state or a hold which is a specific game). There is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that it is intended to suggest or notify that the transition to (Uchirenso) is planned. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment is a special game on condition that the "advantageous notification effect", which is an effect of suggesting or notifying that a transition to an advantageous state is planned, has been executed. Display the setting suggestion effect in the end demo of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the setting suggestion effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation that the player should shift to an advantageous state.

Feature 2. Prevention of downgrade of setting suggestion production:
If the suggestion content of the setting suggestion effect executed at a later time point is lower than the suggestion content of the setting suggestion effect executed at the previous time point, the player's profit (in other words, the degree of advantage) is lower, the setting at the previous time point. It spoils the expectation of the player who sees the suggestion effect. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, the higher the priority is given to the setting suggestion effect that suggests the content that is of great benefit to the player, and after the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority is executed, the setting suggestion effect is given. , The execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation.

Feature 3. Ends when V is not won. Demonstration setting suggestion effect is not executed:
As described above, if the game ball does not pass through a specific area during the small hit game, it does not develop into a big hit and returns to the normal game after the end demonstration of the small hit game. The execution time of the end demo effect of the small hit game is very short, and it is difficult to secure the time for the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment does not execute the setting suggestion effect in the end demo of the small hit game, so that the lottery process and the display process that are practically meaningless for the setting suggestion effect can be performed. Execution can be avoided.

Feature 4. Difference in hold change frequency:
In a pachinko gaming machine, one game (for example, a symbol variation) does not proceed with an operation triggered by a player as in a slot machine, but proceeds based on the passage of time. Therefore, by pre-reading the information of the reserved lottery value, it is possible to execute the pre-reading effect to be executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, it is assumed that a specific effect mode in the effect suggests a set value for the effect by the hold look-ahead that can be executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. As a result, the hold look-ahead effect can be presented to the player as suggesting a big hit and a set value, and the expectation of the player and the interest of the game can be further enhanced. In addition, since it is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, it is easy to prevent the player from overlooking the suggested content.

Hereinafter, the above four features will be described in detail in order.
<Feature 1. End only when V stock is suggested Demo setting suggestion>
In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, a V prize is generated during the small hit game, and the special figure 2 hold is small in the preliminary judgment information received from the main board 200. If one or more winning lottery values are reserved, the V stock image will be used as a small hit notice effect between the V prize and the end of the small hit development big hit (special game) and the start of the normal game. Can be displayed. The small hit notice effect is an effect of adding or adding a V stock image, and is also referred to as a "V stock effect" below.

The effect determining means 303 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 stores two conditions as conditions that can be displayed in the end demo effect of the special game (also referred to as “big hit end demo effect”). The first condition is that one or more V-stock images are displayed before the end demo production starts, in other words, the V-stock effect is executed one or more times before the end demo production starts. Is. The second condition is that the V-stock production in the final demo production has not been won. When both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the effect determining means 303 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the end demo effect with a predetermined probability.

As described in the second embodiment, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not to execute the V stock effect, how many times the V stock effect is executed, and the V stock effect when the V prize in the small hit game is used. Execution timing (for example, at the time of V winning, the third round of the small hit development big hit, the ninth round of the small hit development big hit, at the time of the big hit end demonstration) is determined by lottery. When the result of this lottery is a specific pattern, the effect determining means 303 does not execute the setting suggestion effect in the end demo effect of the special game. For example, if the lottery result is a pattern in which the V stock effect is executed and the V stock effect is executed at the time of the jackpot end demo effect, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the end demo effect of the special game.

In the case of a gaming machine that has a probabilistic state, the second condition above is that the probabilistic promotion production (for example, a resurrection production that wins a defeated battle in reverse) has not been won as the end demo production of the special game. But it may be. The reason for providing such a second condition is to give priority to display of effects such as V-stock effect and probabilistic promotion effect that suggest and notify the content directly related to the profit of the player rather than the set value. If the player understands that the appearance of the setting suggestion effect and the V stock effect (or the probabilistic promotion effect, etc.) are clearly different, the second condition is not specified and only the first condition is specified. , In some cases, it may be possible to display at the same time.

In addition, the probabilistic promotion effect in the end demo may be designed to lengthen the end demo time in order to secure the scale of the effect, and the stop symbol of the big hit (small hit in the case of small hit V) May be executed based on. In this case, as a second condition, it is determined that the stop symbol of the big hit (small hit in the case of the small hit V) is not a specific mode for executing an effect that has priority over the setting suggestion effect, such as a probability change promotion effect, at the end demonstration. May be done. When the jackpot stop symbol is the specific symbol, the effect determining means 303 may avoid executing the setting suggestion effect during the end demo effect, assuming that the second condition is not satisfied.

FIGS. 56 (a)-(d) show an example of a big hit end demonstration effect. As shown in FIG. 56A, the effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the end demo screen 600. The effect determining means 303 causes the end demo screen 600 to display a wallpaper image 602 showing contents (types of motifs, characters, etc.) according to the number of consecutive villas up to that point. Although not shown, the effect determining means 303 may display the number of consecutive villas in the advantageous period and the total number of prize balls won in the advantageous period on the end demo screen 600.

FIGS. 56 (b)-(d) show the setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 56B, the effect determining means 303 displays the character image 604 on the end demo screen 600, and displays an operation (animation) in which the character image 604 removes the wallpaper image 602 that has been displayed so far. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the effect determining means 303 displays an operation as if the character image 604 has selected a setting. Finally, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the effect determining means 303 displays the votive tablet image 606, which is an object having a content suggesting a set value.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, votive tablet images 606 of a plurality of types of modes (shapes, patterns, colors, etc., which can be said to be appearances) corresponding to a plurality of set values are stored in advance. The effect determining means 303 selects one from a plurality of types of votive tablet images 606 according to the set value stored in the setting changing device 170 and the predetermined selection probability. Multiple types of votive tablet images 606 have appearances corresponding to each of "setting 6 confirmed", "setting 4 confirmed", "setting 4 or more", "setting 2 or more", "setting value is odd", etc. including. As a result, the expected value of the set value changes depending on the aspect of the votive tablet image 606 presented in the setting suggestion effect. In addition, the effect determining means 303 changes the display mode (for example, in the band display mode) on the production screen after FIG. 56 (b) on the number of consecutive villas and the total number of prize balls won displayed in FIG. 56 (a). By continuously displaying it in the corner, the number of consecutive villas and the total number of prize balls won may be confirmed on the production screen after FIG. 56B.

FIG. 57 is a time chart relating to the big hit end demo production. FIG. 57A shows a normal time chart in which neither the V stock effect nor the setting suggestion effect is executed. FIG. 57B shows a time chart when the V stock effect is executed during the end demo effect. FIG. 57C shows a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the end demo effect. The time for the jackpot end demo effect is 13 seconds in all of the normal time, the V stock effect execution, and the setting suggestion effect execution. The time of the jackpot end demo effect is, for example, an effect executed according to the time of the end demo time of the special game (S814 in FIG. 28) in the main control device, and is a type of jackpot game (at the start of the jackpot). It is determined for each of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed (the jackpot symbol), and if the time for the jackpot end demo production is insufficient to perform the setting suggestion production, etc., such a type. In the big hit of, the setting suggestion effect may not be performed.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the normal state, the background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of consecutive villas is displayed for 6 seconds, the character string of the rush effect rush is displayed for 6 seconds, and the background image transition is displayed for 1 second. To do. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), when the V stock effect is executed, the background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of consecutive villas is displayed for 3 seconds, the character and V stock image addition is displayed for 9 seconds, and the background image is displayed. Display the transition for 1 second. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the background (wallpaper image 602) corresponding to the number of consecutive villas is displayed for 2 seconds, the character image 604 and the rotation of the votive tablet are displayed for 6 seconds, and then stopped. The votive tablet image 606 is displayed for 5 seconds. Although not shown, in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (c), in order to notify the player of the subsequent gaming state regarding the notification of the rush effect rush, a mode different from the normal time in FIG. 57 (a). (For example, a telop or an icon display in the corner of the screen) may be used to notify the rush effect.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, the setting suggestion effect in which the character operates by animation is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier to attract the player's attention to the production, as compared with the case where the background image of the jackpot end demo is simply replaced with a special background suggesting a set value. On the other hand, since it is an animation production, it is easy for the player to misunderstand that it is foretelling the profit to the player such as the big hit (small hit V) by the reserved inner villa or the transition to the specific game such as the probability change. Also, unlike the slot machine, the pachinko game machine 500 ends the big hit end demo at the time, so if a special effect occurs without the involvement of the player's operation, it will also announce the transition to the pending villa or the probability change. It is easy for the player to misunderstand that this is the case.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment, the effect of notifying that the pachinko machine is already in an advantageous state (the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned effect of foretelling the profit to the player, and the V stock effect in the third embodiment) ) Has been executed, and the setting suggestion effect is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being misidentified and to avoid impairing the player's sense of expectation.

The effect determining means 303 continues to display the votive tablet image 606 presented in the setting suggestion effect at the time of the end demonstration in the corner of the effect screen (in other words, the corner of the effect display device 60) even in the subsequent game. By doing so, even in a situation where there is no player to play, it is possible to provide information on the set value to the next player, which leads to improvement of motivation for playing and motivation for playing. However, the effect determining means 303 does not display the votive tablet image 606 presented in the past setting suggestion effect during the small hit game, the big hit game (except at the end demonstration with the setting suggestion), and during the super reach effect. Display. The effect determining means 303 may display an effect of replacing the votive tablet image 606 presented in the past setting suggestion effect with a new votive tablet image 606 at the end demonstration in which the execution of the setting suggestion is won.

Further, when the effect determining means 303 presents a plurality of types of votive tablet images 606 having different appearances in a plurality of setting suggestion effects, in other words, when a plurality of types of votive tablet images 606 suggesting different setting values are presented. , The plurality of types of votive tablet images 606 will continue to be displayed in subsequent games. As described above, the votive tablet image 606 of the third embodiment shows that (1) the set value is an even number or an odd number (or the expectation that the set value is an even number or an odd number is high), and (2) the set value. Indicates that is greater than or equal to a specific value (or the expected value is greater than or equal to a specific value), and (3) the set value is a specific value (or the expected value that is a specific value is high). ) Is included. Therefore, by combining a plurality of votive tablet images 606, it is possible to narrow down the actual set value, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Even when a plurality of votive tablet images 606 are displayed, contradictory suggestions may be displayed if a plurality of the same types of contents of the above (1) to (3) are displayed. When the votive tablet image 606 of the same type that is difficult to connect is displayed, a part of the votive tablet image 606 of the same type may be hidden based on the priority and the like described later.

As a modification, when the effect determining means 303 displays a plurality of votive tablet images 606 having different appearances in a plurality of setting suggestion effects, the votive tablet image 606 having the highest priority among the plurality of votive tablet images 606 (in other words, the votive tablet image 606). Only the votive tablet image 606) presented in the setting suggestion effect having the highest priority may be displayed in the subsequent game. The priority will be described later. Further, the effect determining means 303 may display only the votive tablet image 606 suggesting the highest set value in place of the priority or together with the priority in the subsequent game. In this modification, even when only one votive tablet image 606 is displayed during the game, the effect determining means 303 is in each big hit along with the big hit history according to the operation on the menu screen during the game standby demo. The votive tablet images 606 presented in the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be displayed side by side in a list, or the displayed votive tablet images 606 may be displayed in a display order or a predetermined display by operating the cross key 110 or the like. It may be configured to be sequentially switched and displayed in order (the undisplayed votive tablet image 606 is not displayed as a setting suggestion effect).

As another modification, the effect determining means 303 does not always display the votive tablet image 606 in the game after executing the setting suggestion effect, but displays the votive tablet image 606 during the game standby demo or only on the menu screen. May be good.

As yet another modification, the effect determining means 303 does not execute the V stock effect in the current jackpot (small hit development jackpot or symbol jackpot), but as a result of executing the V stock effect in the previous jackpot, the V stock image is displayed. If it remains, the setting suggestion effect may be displayed at the end demo of this big hit. For example, if the effect determining means 303 displays the V stock image as a result of executing the V stock effect in the previous jackpot on the jackpot effect screen this time, the setting suggestion effect is displayed at the end demo of the jackpot this time. May be good.

In addition, as another modification, the votive tablet image 606 that is continuously displayed during the normal game is not only updated by displaying a new votive tablet image 606 in the jackpot end demo, but is also special in the variation effect. When the advance notice lottery is won, the effect of replacing the votive tablet image 606 with another image may be executed. For example, it is an effect equivalent to the hold change effect in which the hold lamp image is switched by the involvement of another object image in the hold lamp image, and the other object image is involved in the votive tablet image 606 instead of the hold lamp image. A certain amount of points are added to replace the votive tablet image 606 when the image is displayed, when the image is out of reach with a special reach effect (SP reach), or when a specific effect occurs, and the points are specified. There is an example in which the votive tablet image 606 is replaced (or a lottery for executing the replacement) based on the value. When such replacement is performed, it is preferable to control so as to prevent the downgrade of the setting suggestion effect (votive tablet image 606) shown in feature 2 described later.

The above-mentioned feature 1 and the modification of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment are also useful in the slot machine 1010. For example, the effect determining means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 provides an advantageous notification effect (for example, an effect of notifying the winning of the assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART")) before the start of the end demo in a special game such as a big bonus. When executed, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable in the end demo effect. Further, if the effect notification effect has not been executed before the start of the end demo of the special game, the effect determining means 1304 may limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demo effect. The advantageous notification effect in the slot machine 1010 may be that a plurality of symbols are aligned in a specific manner during the execution of the special game, or may be an effect of notifying the ART winning when a predetermined button is pressed. The setting suggestion effect may be displayed in the advantageous notification effect (ART winning notification effect).

<Feature 2. Prevention of downgrade of setting suggestion production ＞
The effect determining means 303 stores a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects and a plurality of priorities in association with each other. The plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are effects that present votive tablet images 606 in different modes from each other in the third embodiment. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 includes a plurality of types of votive tablet images 606 that can be presented in the setting suggestion effect. It can also be said that a plurality of priorities are associated and stored.

In the third embodiment, the setting suggestion effect (in other words, the votive tablet image 606), which is more profitable for the player, is associated with a higher priority. Specifically, as shown in (1) to (11) below, the narrower the range of suggested setting values (in other words, it is easier to specify the actual set value), the higher the priority is associated with the setting suggestion effect.

(1) Suggestion setting effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 suggesting a set value of 2 or more (set values 2 to 6) → Priority 1
(2) Setting suggestion effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 suggesting a set value of 3 or more (set values 3 to 6) → Priority 2
(3) Setting suggestion effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 suggesting a high setting (setting values 4 to 6) → Priority 3
(4) Setting suggestion effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 suggesting that the set value is an odd number (set value 1, 3 or 5) → Priority 3
(5) Setting suggestion effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 suggesting that the set value is an even number (set value 2, 4 or 6) → Priority 3

(6) Setting suggestion effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 that definitively suggests (in other words, notifies) setting 1 → Priority 4
(7) Setting suggestion effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 that definitively suggests setting 2 → Priority 4
(8) Setting suggestion effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 that definitively suggests setting 3 → Priority 4
(9) Setting suggestion effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 that definitively suggests setting 4 → Priority 5
(10) Setting suggestion effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 that definitively suggests setting 5 → Priority 5
(11) Setting suggestion effect of presenting the votive tablet image 606 that definitively suggests setting 6 → Priority 6 (maximum priority)

The effect determining means 303 executes the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority (for example, the setting suggestion effect of (4) above), and then suggests the setting corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority. The execution of the effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect of (1) above) is restricted. In other words, the effect determining means 303 limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the relatively low priority after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the relatively high priority. In the embodiment, the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority is prohibited. For example, if the effect determining means 303 wins the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second priority by lottery after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority, the execution may be canceled.

The effect determining means 303 may execute the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the same priority after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to a certain priority. Further, as for the priorities of the above (6) to (11), the higher the set value, the more advantageous the player is, and the higher the set value, the higher the priority. As described above, in the embodiment, the narrower the range of the set value suggested as the main parameter and the higher the set value as the sub parameter, the higher the priority is given.

As a modification, the effect determining means 303 may store the set value having a higher advantage of the game in association with the higher priority regardless of the width of the suggested set value. For example, setting 1 → priority 1, setting 2 → priority 2, ..., Setting 5 → priority 5, setting 6 → priority 6 may be defined. The association with this setting value is associated with the setting value having the lowest degree of advantage among one or a plurality of setting values suggested by the setting suggestion effect. However, odd-numbered suggestions (settings "1", "3", "5"), even-numbered suggestions (settings "2", "4", "6"), etc. that should be treated in the same rank are set to the same priority. It is desirable to keep it. In addition, a setting suggestion effect of a type in which a certain setting value is deterministic has a high priority because the meaning of the subsequent appearance of the setting suggestion effect is diminished. Then, after executing the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value corresponding to the first priority, the effect determining means 303 is set to suggest the set value corresponding to the second priority lower than the first priority. The execution of the suggestion effect may be restricted.

As another modification, the effect determining means 303 makes it possible to execute the setting suggestion effect of priority 4 or higher after executing the setting suggestion effect of priority 6, and restricts the execution of the setting suggestion effect of priority 1 to 3. You may. Further, the effect determining means 303 may enable the setting suggestion effect of priority 2 to 6 to be executed after executing the setting suggestion effect of priority 4, and may limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect of priority 1. In this way, the execution of the setting suggestion effect having a priority lower than a predetermined value (for example, 2 or more) than the priority of the already executed setting suggestion effect may be restricted. In other words, the execution of the suggestion effect having a priority within a predetermined range may be allowed from the priority of the already executed setting suggestion effect. Further, priority 1 to priority 3 may be grouped as level 1 and priority 4 to 6 as level 2, and execution of the same level of setting suggestion effect as the executed setting suggestion effect may be allowed. ..

As yet another modification, when the effect determining effect 303 displays the setting suggestion effect indicating the content (picture horse image 606) that deterministically notifies the maximum setting value, the effect suggestion prohibition flag is stored (or the setting suggestion is suggested). While the prohibition flag is turned on) and the flag is being stored (or when the flag is turned on), the lottery for whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may not be executed. Alternatively, as a result of the lottery, the setting suggestion effect may be won or the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be cancelled.

Yet another modification will be described. The setting suggestion effect suggests different setting values depending on the combination of the type of image to be displayed on the effect display device 60, the sound pattern output from the speaker 108, and the light emission pattern of the decorative lamp 111. You may. For example, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a combination (first combination) of the rainbow light emission of the decorative lamp 111, the voice "may be believed", and the image showing the setting 3 or higher with a reliability of 100%. It may be defined as. The lottery table for determining the type of effect, which is referred to by the effect determining means 303, is selected with a predetermined probability when the setting suggestion effect of the first combination is set to 3 or more, and is selected when the setting is 2 or less. It may be configured not to be.

In addition, the combination of the normal light emission of the decorative lamp 111, the sound "maybe in good condition", and the image showing the setting 3 or higher (second combination) is used as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting 3 or higher with a reliability of 40%. You may decide. In the lottery table, the possibility of the set value when the setting suggestion effect of the second combination is selected is set 3 or more: less than setting 2 = 4: 6 (for example, set at a certain timing when the setting suggestion effect is won). The sum of the number range that wins the second combination when the values are "3" to "6" is the second when the set values are "1" to "6" at a certain timing when the setting suggestion effect is won. It may be configured so that the value divided by the sum of the number ranges that win the combination is "0.4"). In this way, even when the same setting suggestion image (for example, votive tablet image 606) is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion may be different if the output contents by the other effect devices to be combined are different.

For example, the priority of the setting suggestion effect that can be selected in the lottery table may be set higher as the range of set values suggested in the following order of pattern 1 <pattern 2 <pattern 3 <pattern 4 becomes narrower.
Pattern 1. Setting 2 or more Suggestion pattern (image only, reliability 30%)
Pattern 2. Setting 2 or more Suggestion pattern (image, sound, lamp chance up light emission, reliability 100%)
Pattern 3. Setting 3 or more Suggestion pattern (image only, reliability 40%)
Pattern 4. Setting 3 or more Suggestion pattern (image, sound, lamp chance up light emission, reliability 100%)
As another example, the priority of the definite notification or the production with high reliability may be increased so that the priority is pattern 3 <pattern 2.

Yet another modification will be described. Since the setting suggestion effect at the end demo is conditional on V stock (that is, it is a pending sequence and shifts to an advantageous specific game state such as probability change as a modification), it is considered that the execution conditions are strict in the first place. For example, there are cases where the conditions of the hold ream are satisfied only when the hit is won in the hold or when the big hit is in the time saving mode. Therefore, even if the conditions such as the hold ream are not satisfied, the setting suggestion effect at the time of the end demo may be exceptionally executed. However, the winning probability of this exceptional setting suggestion effect in the lottery for determining the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is set lower than the winning probability at the time of establishment of the hold consecutive. Further, it may be configured so that the winner can be won only in the case of the first hit (normal time hit, for example, hit other than the rush state).

Further, if the player has abundant game experience, it is easy to recognize that the setting suggestion effect suggests the set value. Therefore, if the effect determination means 303 does not satisfy the conditions such as the hold sequence, the effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109, etc.) wins the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect and at a specific timing during the end demo effect. When is pressed, a setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a so-called back button effect. The back button effect can be seen by a player who is accustomed to the game or who has the knowledge that there is a setting suggestion. Therefore, the buttons used for the back button effect here are sub-buttons (volume adjustment button, cross key 110, etc.) that are different from the effect buttons used in normal games, so that the setting suggestion effect due to a beginner's erroneous operation can be achieved. The display can be prevented.

The above-mentioned feature 2 and the modification of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the third embodiment are also useful in the slot machine 1010. For example, the effect determining means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 stores a plurality of setting suggestion effects and a plurality of priorities in association with each other, executes the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority, and then executes the first priority. The execution of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the lower second priority may be restricted.

<Feature 3. When V is not won, the end demo setting suggestion effect is not executed>
When a V prize is generated during the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not the V stock effect (small hit notice effect) is executed and the execution timing, and if the conditions described in feature 1 are satisfied, the special game ends. Determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect at the time of the demonstration (in other words, the demonstration of the end of the continuous operation). At the start of the special game end demo, it may be decided whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. Since the V prize is not determined when the jackpot is executed based on the stop of the jackpot symbol, a lottery for the setting suggestion effect is performed at the start of the jackpot game or the start of the jackpot end demo effect.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment as in the second embodiment, if there is no V prize during the small hit game, the game shifts to the normal game without developing into a big hit. Specifically, after the closing time (3.5 seconds) after the final opening of the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game + the end demonstration time of the small hit game (for example, 0.1 second), the normal state is normal. Move to the game.

During the closing time after the final opening of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game, the opening / closing control means 275 of the main board 200 is closing the entrance of the large winning opening 20 (for example, the slide plate 540 in FIG. 50). It is necessary to open and close the valve member in the specific region (for example, the specific region opening / closing device 552 in FIG. 50) to eliminate the ball clogging and increase the passability of the specific region. Therefore, it is necessary to secure a certain length of the closing time (3.5 seconds in the example). At the above closing time, the big winning opening 20 is closed, so that the player seems to have finished the round. Therefore, I would like to perform a small hit end demo production, but if the small hit end demo time is also lengthened, the judgment of V winning with the remaining balls during the small hit end demo when V is not won while the large winning opening 20 is open. Based on the above, it is necessary to make the end demo production redundant so that it can be replaced with the transition to the big hit game, which may complicate the production control and rather spoil the interest of the game. In order to solve such a problem, the closing time is lengthened and the end demonstration time of the small hit game is shortened.

If there is no V prize during the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 executes the end demo effect of the small hit game. In the third embodiment, the end demo effect of the small hit game is executed for 3.6 seconds, which is the closing time after the final opening of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game + the end demo time of the small hit game. That is, when there is no V prize during the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 has a time (3.6 seconds) shorter than the execution time (13 seconds in the third embodiment) of the end demo effect of the special game, and the small hit game. Execute the end demo production of.

The effect determining means 303 limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect even if the V stock effect has already been executed (the V stock image 592 has been displayed) in the end demo effect of the small hit game. , Prohibit or cancel the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Since the time scale for the small hit end demo production when V is not won is very short (3.6 seconds even if the closing time of the big winning opening 20 is added), it is difficult to execute a meaningful setting suggestion production. Is.

<Feature 4. Difference in hold change frequency>
The effect determining means 303 of the third embodiment shifts to a special game in the future symbol variation according to the preliminary determination information transmitted from the main board 200 (in the third embodiment, the big hit and the small hit, hereinafter collectively referred to as). , Simply referred to as "hit") can be performed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations up to the future symbol fluctuation.

In the third embodiment, the effect determining means 303 displays the hold change effect as the above-mentioned suggestion effect. The effect determining means 303 changes the color of the hold lamp image corresponding to the special figure 2 hold, which is the target of pre-reading based on the prior determination information, to a color different from the default color (for example, white) as the hold change effect. Specifically, the default color is changed to blue, green, red, and gold in one or more steps. The target of the hold change effect may be the special figure 1 hold, or both the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold.

That is, the effect determining means 303 can change the color of the hold lamp image one or more times when the symbol variation digestion is performed one or more times after the hold change effect is started. For example, the special figure 2 hold that is the target of pre-reading is the fourth hold (hereinafter also referred to as “hold 4”), the third hold (hereinafter also referred to as “hold 3”), and the second hold (hereinafter, also referred to as “hold 3”). Hereinafter, as the process proceeds to the first hold (the hold to be changed next time, also referred to as "hold 1"), the color of the hold lamp image indicating the special figure 2 hold is changed. It can be changed more than once.

The effect determining means 303 stores a hold change lottery table in which a plurality of scenarios (patterns) of the hold change effect are determined, and determines a specific scenario to be executed in the current hold change effect with reference to the hold change lottery table. .. The hold change lottery table is designed so that the color of the hold lamp image in the final stage (hold 1) of the change of the hold lamp image is blue, green, red, and gold in that order, and the expectation of hit occurrence is higher. Further, the scenario of the hold change effect is designed so that the degree of expectation of the hit suggested by the mode (color) of the hold lamp image is equal to or higher than the degree of expectation suggested by the mode in the previous symbol variation. That is, the scenario of the hold change effect is designed so that the color of the hold lamp image changes stepwise and irreversibly in the order of blue, green, red, and gold.

58 and 59 show an example of a pending change lottery table. FIG. 58 shows a hold change lottery table (hereinafter, “off hold change lottery table”) according to the type of sub-variation pattern (variation effect pattern) when the special figure 2 hold (trigger hold in the figure) to be read ahead is off. It is called.). FIG. 59 shows a lottery table for the hold change effect (hereinafter referred to as “winning hold change lottery table”) according to the type of the sub-variation pattern (variation effect pattern) when the special figure 2 hold to be read ahead is a hit. Shown. The effect determining means 303 may identify the sub-variation pattern of the special figure 2 hold of the look-ahead target according to the result of the pre-pattern determination (variation pattern range) for the special figure 2 hold of the look-ahead target.

In both the tables of FIGS. 58 and 59, the total number of random numbers for effect is set to 10000, and the number (selection probability) is assigned to 47 scenarios of the pending change effect. The out-of-hold change setting table and the hit-hold change setting table are provided for each set value, and the effect determining means 303 refers to the out-of-hold change setting table and the hit-hold change setting table corresponding to the set value of the own machine and holds the change. Determine the production scenario.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the probability that the hold lamp image indicating the special figure 2 hold of the look-ahead target in the hold change effect is in a specific mode is stored in the setting change device 170 (actually, also in the RAM of the sub-board 300). It depends on the set value (remembered). The particular embodiment is gold in the third embodiment and is also referred to below as "gold hold". In the pachinko gaming machine 500, it is the frequency of appearance of gold hold, in other words, the higher the setting, the higher the selection probability of the scenario in which gold hold finally appears. This means that the higher the pachinko gaming machine 500 is set, the lower the expectation of winning when a gold hold is issued (which can be said to be the reliability of the gold hold). I can say.

Specifically, in setting 1, the reliability of gold hold is about 99%, the higher the setting, the lower the reliability of gold hold, and in setting 6, the reliability of gold hold is about 70%. , The out-of-hold change lottery table and the hit-hold change lottery table are designed. For example, the number assigned to the scenario of ID36 to ID47 (shaded area in FIG. 58) in the out-of-hold change lottery table for setting 1 and the scenario of ID36 to ID47 in the winning hold change lottery table for setting 1 (FIG. 59). The number assigned to the shaded area) is (1) the probability of deviation fluctuation, the probability of selecting an deviation fluctuation pattern that can be reserved for look-ahead, and the probability of winning ID36 to ID47 in the look-ahead lottery (that is, the probability of winning). Probability of winning a look-ahead that is a gold hold when a certain hold becomes a look-ahead target hold and an out-of-bounds fluctuation is executed) The ratio to the probability of winning ID36 to ID47 in the look-ahead lottery (that is, the probability of winning a look-ahead that is a gold hold when a certain hold becomes a look-ahead target hold and a hit fluctuation is executed) is 1:99. Is set to be. On the other hand, the number assigned to the scenario of ID36 to ID47 in the out-of-hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the number assigned to the scenario of ID36 to ID47 in the winning hold change lottery table for setting 6 are as described above. The ratio of 1) and (2) is set to be 3: 7.

The reliability of the blue display of the hold lamp image (blue hold), the green display of the hold lamp image (green hold), and the red display of the hold lamp image (red hold) is constant regardless of the set value of the own machine. It may be, for example, 5%, 10%, and 20%, respectively. The reliability of blue hold, green hold, and red hold may also be realized by the ratio of the number range in the out-of-hold change lottery table to the number range in the winning hold change lottery table.

In this way, in the hold change effect, by designing the mode of the hold lamp image that irreversibly changes stepwise to lead to the setting suggestion, the change mode (for example, blue, green, red) in the middle stage ), In addition to the expectation about whether or not this green hold will be hit, there is a possibility that it will be set high if it changes once more. It will increase the player's expectation regarding the setting that "it is a setting, but it seems likely", and it will be easier to improve the motivation to play. In addition, even if the gold hold is not a hit, the player can have a sense of expectation for the high setting, and the bad impression that "the high expectation hold has been missed" is said to be "the possibility of high setting has increased". It can be reduced with a good impression, and the decline in playing motivation can be suppressed.

The first modification concerning the feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the hold change effect of changing the mode of the hold lamp image from the hold winning to the hold 1 has been described. As a modification, the effect determining means 303 provides a notice effect (hereinafter, "the suggestion effect") that suggests the degree of expectation of the change according to the result of determining whether or not the variation (the symbol variation during execution), the symbol determination result, or the like. ”) May be displayed. Here, the suggestion effect may have an appearance similar to the hold lamp image, and the effect control means 304 shifts the hold lamp image displayed on hold 1 to the object of the suggestion effect until before the start of fluctuation. In addition, the hold lamp image and the object of the suggestion effect may be linked.

The object of the suggestion effect may be controlled by any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, default color, blue, green, red, gold) as in the hold lamp image of the third embodiment, and the object of the suggestive effect may be controlled. It may be designed so that the degree of expectation of hit is different depending on the production mode. Again, the expectation of winning is assumed to be higher in the order of blue <green <red <gold. Then, the probability that the object of the suggestion effect becomes a specific effect mode (here, it is gold and is also referred to as “gold object”) may differ depending on the setting value stored in the setting change device 170. ..

Also in this modification, the effect determining means 303 may determine the effect mode of the object of the suggestion effect by referring to the out-of-hold change lottery table or the winning hold change lottery table for each set value of the own machine. Similar to the tables of FIGS. 58 and 59, the out-of-hold change lottery table and the hit-hold change lottery table in this modification are a plurality of effect modes of the object of the suggestion effect according to the type of sub-variation pattern in the variation. The number is assigned to.

Also in this modification, the reliability of gold hold is about 99% in setting 1 of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the reliability of gold hold gradually decreases as the setting is higher, and the reliability of gold hold is about about in setting 6. The out-of-hold change lottery table and the hit-hold change lottery table may be designed so as to be 70%. Also in this modified example, the same effect as that of the above-mentioned feature 4 is obtained.

It should be noted that the effect determining means 303 may collectively determine the change scenario of the hold lamp image from the hold prize to the hold 1 and the display mode of the object in the suggestion effect at the time of the hold prize. Further, the change of the hold lamp image and the display mode of the object in the suggestion effect may be defined in the out-of-hold change lottery table and the winning hold change lottery table as a continuous scenario. That is, a single scenario may include both a change scenario of the hold lamp image and a display mode of the object in the suggestion effect.

The second modification regarding the feature 4 will be described. Only the gold hold display at a specific timing in the process from the hold winning (when the hold occurs) to the hold 1 may be the target for which the appearance rate differs depending on the set value. Here, a specific timing is set as the time when the hold occurs (corresponding to the “hold winning time” in FIG. 59), that is, the gold hold display at the time when the hold lamp image is first displayed (hereinafter, “direct boiling gold hold””. Also referred to as)), a difference due to the set value shall be provided.

In this modification as well, in setting 1, the reliability of direct boiling gold hold is set to about 99%, the higher the setting, the lower the reliability of direct boiling gold hold gradually decreases, and in setting 6, the reliability of gold hold is set to about 70%. To do. In this case, the number assigned to the ID47 scenario (bottom of the shaded area in FIG. 58) in the out-of-hold change lottery table for setting 1 and the ID47 scenario (in FIG. 59) in the hit-hold change lottery table for setting 1. The number assigned to (the bottom of the shaded area) is (3) the probability of out-of-bounds fluctuation, the probability of selecting an out-of-bounds fluctuation pattern that can be reserved for look-ahead, and the probability of winning ID47 in the look-ahead lottery (that is, , Probability of winning a look-ahead that will be a gold hold when a certain hold becomes a look-ahead target hold and an out-of-bounds change is executed) , The ratio to the probability of winning ID47 in the look-ahead lottery (that is, the probability of winning the look-ahead that becomes gold hold when a certain hold becomes the look-ahead target hold and the hit fluctuation is executed) is 1:99. It may be set to be. Further, the number assigned to the scenario of ID47 in the out-of-hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the number assigned to the scenario of ID47 in the winning hold change lottery table for setting 6 are the above-mentioned (3) and (4). ) May be set to be 3: 7.

The target of the setting suggestion may be a combination of hold occurrence (first display timing), hold 1, and the fluctuation, or may be limited to any place. Further, when targeting a specific hold (gold hold) at the time of the hold occurrence, the effect determining means 303 may output a voice indicating a chance when the hold occurs and the money is held, and the higher the setting, the more chance. A special pattern may be output with a high probability as a voice pattern indicating. When deciding to execute the setting suggestion effect (hold change effect, etc.) at the time of the hold occurrence, the setting suggestion effect is performed at a timing other than the execution of the effect lottery accompanying the progress of the game (that is, the start of the symbol change) in the pachinko gaming machine 500. It can be said that the presence or absence of execution and the mode are determined.

A third modification of the feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the target of the setting suggestion effect is gold hold, but as a modification, the setting suggestion of a mode of the hold lamp image having a relatively low hit reliability such as "blue hold" that makes the hold lamp image blue. It may be the target of production. For example, in setting 1, the reliability of blue hold may be set to about 3%, the reliability of blue hold may be gradually increased, and in setting 6, the reliability of blue hold may be set to about 6%.

In this case, the number assigned to the scenarios of IDs 1 to 4 (upper part of FIG. 58) in the out-of-hold change lottery table for setting 1 and the scenarios of IDs 1 to 4 in the winning hold change lottery table for setting 1 (FIG. 59) The number assigned to (upper row) is (5) the probability of being out-of-bounds fluctuation, the probability of selecting an out-of-look fluctuation pattern that can be reserved for look-ahead, and the probability of winning ID1 to ID4 in the look-ahead lottery (that is, there is). (Probability of winning a look-ahead that becomes a blue hold when the hold becomes a look-ahead target hold and an out-of-look change is executed), (6) Probability of a per-look fluctuation, a probability that a hit fluctuation pattern that can be a look-ahead target hold is selected, Pre-reading The ratio to the probability of winning ID1 to ID4 in the lottery multiplied by the probability of winning (that is, the probability of winning the look-ahead that becomes the blue hold when a certain hold becomes the look-ahead target hold and the hit fluctuation is executed) is 97: 3. It may be set to be. Further, the number assigned to the scenarios of IDs 1 to 4 in the out-of-hold change lottery table for setting 6 and the number assigned to the scenarios of IDs 1 to 4 in the winning hold change lottery table for setting 6 are the above-mentioned (5). ) And (6) may be set to be 94: 6.

In the embodiment, the situation in which the gold hold is released and the player is discouraged leads to the setting suggestion, while in the third modification, the situation in which the blue hold is a hit and the player feels unexpected leads to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that the blue hold may be the target of the setting suggestion effect only for the special figure 2 hold in which the look-ahead result is a hit. This is because the higher the setting, the higher the distribution ratio of the hit fluctuation to the blue hold (for example, the scenario of IDs 1 to 4 in FIG. 59), and the easier the implementation.

A fourth modification with respect to feature 4 will be described. As a prohibition, if there is a hold that has (a) a hold change (or a look-ahead effect other than the hold change) in the hold change effect, the new hold cannot be changed, and (b) reach to the first hold. If there is a change, it cannot be changed, (c) If there is a hold that hits the previous hold, it cannot be changed, (d) Changes in the game state such as the end of time reduction or change pattern table switching are changes in the hold that are subject to look-ahead. At least part of it may be stipulated that it cannot be changed if it is done by. If there is such a prohibition, the frequency of executing the setting suggestion is low.

A special setting suggestion lottery may be performed to make setting suggestions in situations where the prohibition of pending changes applies. For example, if the prohibition is applied when the hold occurs, the effect determining means 303 may output a special sound indicating a chance with a predetermined probability while displaying the hold lamp image of the hold in the default color. The special setting suggestion lottery at the time of prohibition is performed when what is visible to the player is being executed (for example, in the situation of (a) above and the hold lamp image of the look-ahead target hold is not the default). It is desirable to execute only.

It should be noted that the effect determining means 303 prohibits the simultaneous execution of a plurality of look-ahead effects in the look-ahead effects other than the hold change effects (such as the same-color chance eye-look-ahead described later), while performing a plurality of hold change effects related to different holds. It may proceed at the same time. In this case, the effect determining means 303 can execute a new hold change effect as a setting suggestion effect even during execution of a look-ahead effect of the same category (for example, another hold change effect targeting a different hold). Further, the effect determining means 303 may allow a plurality of display of hold change effects below a predetermined level, while prohibiting a plurality of display of hold change effects above a predetermined level. For example, allow multiple simultaneous displays for hold change effects whose range of change falls within the default color to green hold, and prohibit multiple simultaneous displays for hold change effects whose change range reaches red hold or gold hold. May be good.

A fifth modification with respect to feature 4 will be described. In the look-ahead effect (and the lottery for the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead information of the variation pattern (that is, the information of the pre-pattern determination) can also be used as a parameter. Therefore, when the hold change effect is executed for the hold scheduled to be executed by a specific fluctuation pattern, the hold lamp image displayed when shifting to the specific fluctuation pattern (here, it is an object showing the fluctuation, and " The mode (color, etc.) of the "variable lamp image")) may be used as a setting suggestion.

Specifically, the color distribution ratio of the fluctuation lamp image at the time of battle reach development as a specific fluctuation pattern may be set as follows. In the case of setting 1, the default color may be 30%, blue: 30%, green: 20%, red: 10%, and gold: 10%. Further, in the case of setting 6, the default color may be 30%, blue: 10%, green: 25%, red: 20%, and gold: 15%. As described above, the effect determining means 303 may display the variable lamp image in a color indicating that the expectation of hitting is high with a higher probability as the set value is higher. In this case, the higher the set value, the lower the expectation of hit when a color (red, gold) indicating that the expectation of hit is originally high appears.

The default color is the color in the case of the pending change non-winning (or the non-winning of the variable lamp image change notice lottery drawn at the start of the fluctuation). Therefore, by not providing a difference due to the set value in the display in the default color, it is possible to provide a difference due to the set value in the highly expected color while keeping the probability of the pending change even once as a whole. That is, in the case of a high setting, the hold change effect can be configured so as not to be in a bargain state. It should be noted that the configuration in which the display in the default color does not have a difference depending on the set value can also be applied to the setting suggestion in the gold hold described in the embodiment.

Furthermore, the gold hold was displayed by combining the idea of setting a difference in the look-ahead effect based on the read-ahead information of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern and the idea of setting a difference in the look-ahead effect (specific look-ahead effect) by the gold hold. Under the circumstances, the appearance frequency (probability) of the situation such as the fluctuation ending (disappearing) before reaching the super reach may be used as a setting suggestion. For example, before the development of Super Reach (it is a winning branch of normal reach and during the production to fuel the development of Super Reach), it is possible to suggest a high setting if the gold is held when the symbol fluctuation stops and it becomes a hit. Is. In this case, it is premised that the super reach is fixed in principle for gold hold or red hold or higher, except for exceptional situations that suggest such setting.

A sixth modification relating to feature 4 will be described. The technique described in feature 4 is a production that irreversibly changes in a fluctuation unit over a plurality of fluctuations. In other words, if the production increases the expectation of transition to an advantageous game each time it changes, it is a pending change. It can also be applied to different types of look-ahead effects. For example, it can be applied to the same color chance eye production using the color of the decorative pattern 61. In the same-color chance eye effect, for the hold that is the target of look-ahead (in other words, a hit suggestion), the mode of the three decorative symbols 61 (here, the color) over a plurality of changes from the occurrence of the hold to the end of the corresponding change It is a look-ahead effect that changes.

The mode of the decorative symbol 61 in the same color chance eye production is as follows, in order from the one with the lowest expectation, blue symbol (blue decorative symbol 61), green symbol, red symbol, red symbol + gold effect (for setting suggestion), red symbol +. It may be a rainbow effect (fixed hit). Then, as in the case of gold holding in the embodiment, the higher the set value, the higher the selection probability of the red symbol + gold effect may be designed. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the expectation of hitting the red pattern + gold effect may be designed. For example, the degree of expectation in setting 1 may be 70%, and the degree of expectation in setting 6 may be 50%. That is, it may be designed so that a high setting is suggested so that the red pattern + gold effect causes a deviation.

In the same-color chance eye production, a replacement lottery is possible until immediately before the stop in the symbol variation (for example, before the speed of the decorative symbol 61 is reduced). Therefore, the effect determining means 303 may determine the presence / absence and mode of the same color chance eye effect in the variation by lottery after the symbol variation starts. In the case of an effect design in which the same color chance eye effect should be displayed continuously for a predetermined number of times or more, if the hold is 1 at the time of the occurrence of the hold, the effect determining means 303 limits (for example, prohibits) the execution of the same color chance eye effect. You may.

As another example, the technique described in feature 4 may be applied to the operation effect of the movable accessory 66 and the zone shift effect as another example of the look-ahead effect to which. The operation effect of the movable accessory 66 continues the operation of the movable accessory 66 in a manner corresponding to the pre-determination information of the hold from the next change after the occurrence of the look-ahead target hold to the change corresponding to the hold. It may be a look-ahead effect. In addition, the zone transition production is a production zone different from the first production zone among a plurality of types of production zones having different production tendencies (motifs, characters, backgrounds, stories, etc.), and is reserved for pre-reading. It may be an effect of switching to the second effect zone according to the pre-determination information.

In the case of the operation effect of the movable accessory 66 and the zone shift effect, as in the case of the gold hold of feature 4, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of these effects, but the result is likely to be off (that is, the degree of expectation is high). A lottery table similar to those in FIGS. 58 and 59 may be defined. Alternatively, a lottery table similar to that shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 may be set so that the higher the setting, the more likely it is that these effects will progress to a high expectation pattern but result in a deviation.

A seventh modification of the feature 4 will be described. The effect determining means 303 may display the hold lamp image of the hold as an image showing a number. In addition, the effect determining means 303 may set a number suggesting a tempai symbol (type of decorative symbol 61) when the variation corresponding to the hold (the variation) reaches the reach, as the number of the hold lamp image. .. In this case, when the effect determining means 303 suggests the setting at the time of the fluctuation, the reach may be established by the decorative symbol 61 having a number different from (or inconsistent with) the number of the hold lamp image. Either the number of the hold lamp image or the number of the tempai symbol in the fluctuation may be used for setting suggestion.

The eighth modification regarding the feature 4 will be described. If the player is not aware of the change in the reliability (difference due to the set value) of a specific mode (for example, gold hold) in the hold change effect, the hold change effect with a high expectation is displayed but is off. By doing so, there is a possibility that the result will only impair the expectation that the player's fluctuation result will be a hit. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 may change the variation lamp image during the symbol variation corresponding to the target hold of the hold change effect.

For example, the effect determining means 303 may make a premium character or a rare character appear from the gold hold (the gold-colored variable lamp image), and suggest the setting depending on the type of the character that has appeared. Alternatively, the effect determining means 303 may display a notice effect such as a notice effect of the content suggesting the set value or a notice effect such as a setting value notification due to a visual change such as a change in the dialogue of the character in the fluctuation. In addition, if the above effect is displayed after the hit branch of the variable effect or the notice effect is missed, the player may misunderstand that a hit due to the so-called resurrection effect has occurred. It is desirable to limit it so that it will not be executed.

The present invention has been described above based on the third embodiment. The third embodiment is an example, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. In the third embodiment, a modified example was described for each feature.

(Fourth Example)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, but in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Then, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the premise technology and the differences from the first to third embodiments will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technology and the first to third embodiments are described with the same reference numerals. To do.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has the following features regarding the setting suggestion effect.
Features. Contradiction setting suggestion notification:
Normally, the higher the setting, the easier it is to display the setting suggestion effect, and in the case of the low setting, it is decided to execute the display in the situation where the content suggesting the advantage over the set value is set. Since it is not done or the display is restricted, the number of possible effects is small and the content tends to be monotonous. Further, if it is confirmed that the setting is low by the setting suggestion effect, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play may be impaired. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the effect that can appear in accordance with the rules of the gaming situation or according to the result of the lottery is displayed in a gaming situation different from (or inconsistent with) the above-mentioned gaming situation. In that case, it is configured to be a setting suggestion effect or to increase the reliability as a setting suggestion effect. Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect in the fourth embodiment will also be referred to as a “contradiction setting suggestion effect”.

Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, a normal effect having contents consistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period and a setting of contents inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period are set. Suggestive effects can be selectively executed. The normal effect and the setting suggestion effect are effects belonging to the same type of effect category (effect type), and the same effect pattern (substantially the same in appearance of the player) can be selected in different situations. The "same" of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may mean that the lottery table and the lottery result are the same, and even if the lottery table and the lottery result are different, the effect visually recognized by the player is the same (almost the same appearance). (Including substantially the same). As a result, even if the gaming machine is actually set to a low setting, it is possible to execute a normal effect having the same content as when the setting is high. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of effects and to set a high setting from the viewpoint of the player. Since the sex remains, it becomes easy to promote the player's motivation to play.

The above-mentioned features of the fourth embodiment can be mounted as a single unit, and can be arbitrarily combined with the prerequisite technology and the features described in the first to third embodiments. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the contradiction setting suggestion effect will be described in detail.

When the special game ends in an advantageous period, which is a period in which the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, the effect determining means 303 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is a special executed up to that point in the advantageous period. It is possible to perform a normal production with contents that match the number of games (so to speak, the number of consecutive villas). Further, the effect determining means 303 sets an effect that is inconsistent with the number of special games executed so far in the advantageous period, instead of the normal effect, with a predetermined probability when the special game ends in the advantageous period. It can be executed as a suggestive effect.

The advantageous period in the fourth embodiment is the period of the consecutive villa state shown in FIG. 40, and is also hereinafter referred to as the “continuous villa period”. The consecutive villa period is a period in which a normal game in a short time state and a special game (including a small hit V and a symbol big hit) are repeated, and is also an execution period of the rush effect described above. The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the special game end screen when the special game ends during the consecutive villa period. The special game end screen may be displayed in the end demo effect of the special game.

FIG. 60 shows an example of a special game end screen. The special game end screen 610 includes a background image 612 including characters and the like, a result image 614, and a trophy image 616. The result image 614 shows the number of big hits (XX times) in the current consecutive villa period and the number of prize balls paid out during the current consecutive villa period (XXXXXX PT). The trophy image 616 shows a trophy for suggesting a setting.

The effect determining means 303 displays the trophy image 616 having the content consistent with the number of executions of the special game (in other words, the number of consecutive villas) in the consecutive villa period as a normal effect with a predetermined first probability. As a normal effect, the effect determining means 303 displays the trophy image 616 in any of a plurality of types of modes according to the number of times the special game is executed during the consecutive villa period. The normal effect is displayed when the lottery for whether or not to display the trophy image 616 overlaid on the end screen 610 of the special game is won, and is displayed when the execution of the normal effect is won. Since the trophy image 616 is associated with the number of times the special game is executed as described later, the trophy image 616 in an aspect that does not match the set value suggested when the trophy image 616 is used as the setting suggestion effect is displayed. The display of the trophy image 616 accompanying the execution of the normal effect can be said to be a ghost effect from the viewpoint of suggesting the setting.

In the embodiment, the color of the trophy image 616 displayed on the special game end screen 610 in the normal effect is associated with the number of times the special game is executed. Specifically, the copper-colored trophy image 616 (also referred to as "copper trophy") corresponds to the number of consecutive villas twice, and the silver trophy image 616 (also referred to as "silver trophy") corresponds to the number of consecutive villas three times. Corresponding to, the golden trophy image 616 (also referred to as "gold trophy") corresponds to the number of consecutive villas four times. Further, the giraffe pattern trophy image 616 (also referred to as "giraffe pattern trophy") corresponds to the number of consecutive villas 5 times, and the rainbow-colored (for example, 7 colors) trophy image 616 (also referred to as "rainbow trophy") is continuous. Corresponds to the number of villas 6 times or more.

Further, the effect determining means 303 displays the trophy image 616 having contents inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game (in other words, the number of consecutive villas) in the advantageous period as a setting suggestion effect with a predetermined second probability. .. In the embodiment, the color of the trophy image 616 is associated with the suggested set value. Specifically, the bronze trophy corresponds to setting 2 or higher (settings 2 to 6), the silver trophy corresponds to setting 3 or higher (settings 3 to 6), and the gold trophy corresponds to setting 4 or higher (settings 4 to 6). Correspondingly, the giraffe pattern trophy corresponds to setting 5 or higher (setting 5 or 6), and the rainbow trophy corresponds to setting 6.

The effect determining means 303 stores a lottery table (also referred to as a “trophy lottery table”) for determining the execution of the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 (FIGS. 61 to 65). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61, the display of the plurality of types of trophy images 616 corresponding to the number of consecutive villas in the advantageous period, which is the normal effect described above, and the display of the trophy image 616, which is the setting suggestion effect, are the same. It is memorized so that it can be decided by one lottery by the trophy lottery table. The effect determining means 303 refers to the trophy lottery table corresponding to the number of consecutive villas in the advantageous period, and determines the color of the trophy image 616 to be displayed on the special game end screen 610 by lottery based on the set value of the own machine. Regarding the display of the trophy image 616, the lottery for the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be individually performed using different tables, and when the lottery is performed individually, the setting suggestion effect is drawn first. If the winner is won, the lottery for the normal effect will not be performed, or if the individual lottery is won at the same time, only the setting suggestion effect will be displayed with priority, and the setting suggestion effect will be executed as much as possible. Is preferable.

FIG. 61 shows an example of a trophy lottery table. The lottery table in the figure is a lottery table referred to by the effect determining means 303 when the number of consecutive villas is two. The lottery table in the figure is described in the value number range of 10000, and shows the number of trophies placed (selection probability) according to the set value of the own machine. The appearance probability of the trophy image 616 is designed to be 20% (the total number of IDs 1 to 5 is 2000), that is, the trophy image 616 is displayed on the special game end screen 610 with a probability of 20%. The "appearance probability" here means the total probability of the display probability of the trophy image 616 as a normal effect and the display probability of the trophy image 616 as a setting suggestion effect.

In addition, it is set to display a trophy corresponding to the number of consecutive villas as a normal effect, such as displaying a copper trophy when the number of consecutive villas is 2 times and displaying a silver trophy when the number of consecutive villas is 3 times. In the sense that it is not a suggestion, it is also called "Gase" below. Further, the lottery table of FIG. 61 is designed so as not to select a trophy suggesting a set value higher than the set value of the own machine. For example, in setting 4, giraffe-patterned trophies and rainbow trophies are not assigned numbers, i.e., these trophies are not selected.

In the lottery table of FIG. 61, the area of the silver trophy in the case of setting 3, the area of the silver trophy and the gold trophy in the case of setting 4, the area of the silver trophy, the gold trophy and the giraffe pattern trophy in the case of setting 5, and the area of setting 6. The area above the silver trophy in the case of is the area that suggests the setting. Further, the area of the copper trophy except for the case of setting 2 is an area that becomes a ghost (in other words, a normal effect). In addition, the area of the copper trophy in the case of setting 2 is an area where it is not clear whether the setting is suggested or not (from the player's point of view, the correspondence between the number of consecutive villas and the trophy image 616 is not inconsistent, so it can be treated as "gase". Good).

In the lottery table of FIG. 61, the Gase ratio (normal effect execution probability) when the trophy image 616 is displayed is designed to be 50%. Further, the execution probability (reliability of displaying the setting suggestion effect) when the trophy image 616 is displayed is also designed to be 50%. For example, in the case of setting 4, the number range 1000 is assigned to the copper trophy as a normal effect (“Gase” of the setting suggestion effect). In addition, the number range 1000 (total) is also assigned to the silver trophy and the gold trophy as setting suggestion effects. In the fourth embodiment, the setting suggestion effect (trophy image 616) suggesting the set value "1" is not provided, that is, any of the effect patterns similar to the setting suggestion effect is executed as the normal effect. Since it is "gase", the gase ratio when the set value is "1" is not 50%, but is exceptionally 100%.

According to the configuration of the embodiment, when the special game ends during the consecutive villa period, the trophy image 616 is used, which is a common effect. Consistent content setting Suggestion effects can be selectively executed. As a result, even if the gaming machine is set to a low setting, the trophy image 616 in the same mode as when the setting is high can be displayed, which can lead to promotion of motivation for playing. For example, even if the setting value of the gaming machine is "1", when the number of consecutive villas is "4", a gold trophy suggesting a setting of 4 or more may be displayed as a normal effect, and the player's willingness to play. It becomes easier to maintain.

The technique described in the fourth embodiment is also useful for slot machines 1010. The advantageous period in the slot machine 1010 is, for example, a period in which ART and a special game are repeated. When the special game (big bonus or regular bonus) ends in the advantageous period, the effect determining means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 has a first probability of executing the special game in the advantageous period (even if only the number of big bonuses). The normal effect of the content consistent with (good) may be executed, and the setting suggestion effect of the content inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period may be executed with the second probability.

Further, the "advantageous period" in the fourth embodiment is a consecutive villa period, and has been described as a period in which a normal game in a time-saving state and a special game (including a small hit V and a symbol big hit) are repeated. It suffices if the situation is recognized as a "consecutive villa period", and for models that do not have a small hit V as a gaming machine specification, design the period during operation of the probability fluctuation period and the period during which special games are repeated as the "advantageous period". Is also possible. Further, even when the gaming state in the main control device ends the "advantageous period", it is within a predetermined period (for example, after the end of the "consecutive villa period" until the special symbol fluctuates by 30). When the "advantageous period" is returned to, it is considered that the "advantageous period" has continued, and processing is performed on the production control means (sub CPU) side (such as the number of special games at the end of the previous consecutive villa period). It may be the one that inherits the information for determining the setting suggestion effect).

The present invention has been described above based on the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment is an example, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. An example of modification is given below.

The first modification will be described. In the above embodiment, the display of the trophy image 616 suggesting a setting value higher than the setting value of the own machine is restricted, but as a modified example, the trophy image 616 suggesting a setting value higher than the setting value of the own machine can be displayed. It may be configured. FIG. 62 shows an example of a modified trophy lottery table related to the trophy lottery table of FIG. The trophy lottery table of FIG. 62 is a part of the number of "Gase area" or "Area that is not known as setting suggestion or Gase" in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, and is a region of "0" in the trophy lottery table of FIG. It is allocated to the non-selected area). As a result, for example, the effect determining means 303 can display a gold trophy and a giraffe pattern trophy suggesting a setting value higher than the setting value of the own machine when the setting value of the own machine is “3”.

In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, the setting 6 is confirmed when the rainbow trophy appears as a setting suggestion, but in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 62, the rainbow trophy may appear as a fake with the settings 4 and 5. .. Therefore, the rainbow trophy in this variant suggests that setting 6 is rich. Regarding settings 1 to 3, the reason why the rainbow trophy does not appear is that the player's expectation for the ball output when the rainbow trophy is displayed and the actual ball output (advantage). The purpose is to prevent the divergence from becoming large. Further, the rainbow trophy may be set so that the settings 4 and 5 do not appear, and may be configured as a special setting value confirmation effect.

Further, in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 62, in the case of a low setting (for example, settings 1 to 3), the rainbow trophy is not assigned a number, that is, the rainbow trophy is not displayed even as a ghost. As a result, the trophy image 616 that deviates greatly from the actual set value can be displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being excessively increased. In addition, when the player's machine is set to 1, there is no trophy that suggests setting 1, so if a trophy appears, all will be lost. Also, if your ship is set to 6, it can be said that there is no ghost because any trophy will be true.

In the first modification, the effect determining means 303 may display the trophy image 616 suggesting a set value different from the set value of the own machine. Further, also in the embodiment, there is a possibility that a normal effect that does not suggest a setting is displayed. Here, the probability that the effect determining means 303 executes the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value of the own machine may be configured to be different depending on the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period.

As a specific configuration, the trophy lottery table referred to by the effect determining means 303 may be configured so that the slack ratio decreases as the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period increases. Further, the trophy lottery table may be configured so that when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period becomes equal to or more than a predetermined value, the stake ratio is lower than when the number of executions is less than the predetermined value.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, when the Gase ratio is 50% when the number of consecutive villas is 2, the trophy lottery table referred to when the number of consecutive villas is 5 times has a Gase ratio smaller than 50%. (For example, 25%, etc.) may be set. Further, for example, in the trophy lottery table referred to when the number of consecutive villas is 5 times, the range of the number of values allocated to the area to be a mess shown in FIGS. The range of may be expanded.

According to this aspect, as a privilege for acquiring a large number of big hits (small hit V and symbol big hit) by continuing the advantageous period, it is possible to provide the player with a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value, and the interest of the game is enhanced. It can be further enhanced.

A second modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, when the special game in the advantageous period ends, the pachinko gaming machine 500 suggests setting as a normal effect (gase effect) according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. The probability of displaying the trophy image 616 as one of the effects may be increased. For example, the effect determining means 303 has a higher probability as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases, or when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period exceeds a predetermined value, the number of executions is a predetermined value. The trophy image 616 may be displayed on the special game end screen 610 with a higher probability than the case where the number is less than.

FIG. 63 shows an example of a modified trophy lottery table. The trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 is related to the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, and is referred to by the effect determining means 303 when the number of consecutive villas increases (here, when the number of consecutive villas is 5). In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the area of the copper trophy in the case of setting 2, the area of the copper trophy and the silver trophy in the case of setting 3, the area of the copper trophy to the gold trophy in the case of setting 4, and the copper in the case of setting 5. The area from the trophy to the gold trophy, the area from the copper trophy to the gold trophy in the case of setting 6, and the area of the rainbow trophy are areas that suggest the setting. Further, the area of the giraffe pattern trophy except for the case of setting 5 is an area that becomes a ghost (in other words, a normal effect). In addition, the area of the giraffe pattern trophy in the case of setting 5 is an area for which it is unknown whether the setting is suggested or not.

In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is higher than that of the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 (when the number of consecutive villas is two). The appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is the probability that the trophy image 616, which may be a setting suggestion, is displayed, although there is a possibility that the trophy image 616 appears. For example, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the lottery table of FIG. 61 is 20%, but the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the lottery table of FIG. 63 is 30%. Specifically, in the lottery table of FIG. 63, as compared with the lottery table of FIG. 61, the number range without trophies (ID0) is reduced to 7,000, and the number range for selecting some trophy is expanded to 3000. There is.

According to the configuration of the second modification, as a privilege for acquiring a large number of big hits (small hit V and symbol big hit) by continuing the advantageous period, the production by the trophy image 616 (normal production or setting suggestion production) is frequently performed. Can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

A third modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 has an advantageous period when the special game in the advantageous period ends and when either the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect is executed. It is configured to increase the probability of selectively executing the setting suggestion effect according to the number of times the special game is executed (in other words, it is configured to reduce the ratio of the normal effect, that is, the "gase" effect). May be good. For example, the effect determining means 303 has a higher probability as the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period increases, or when the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period becomes a predetermined value or more, the number of executions is a predetermined value. The trophy image 616 may be displayed in a mode as a setting suggestion effect with a higher probability than the case where the value is less than. In the example of 5 consecutive villas in FIG. 63, the ratio of the normal effect to the setting suggestion effect on which some trophy image 616 is displayed is approximately normal effect: setting suggestion effect = 1 (33%): 2 (67%). The ratio of the setting suggestion effect is larger than the ratio shown in the example of the two consecutive villas in FIG. 61, normal effect: setting suggestion effect = 1: 1.

Also in this modification, the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63 is referred to. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 is higher than that of the lottery table of FIG. 61 (when the number of consecutive villas is 2 times), and the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher. .. The appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 is 20%, while the appearance rate of the trophy image 616 in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63 is 30%.

Further, in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, the trash ratio (execution probability of the normal effect) when the trophy image 616 is displayed is 50%, but in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, the trophy image 616 is displayed. The case ratio is 33%. In other words, in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 63, when the trophy image 616 is displayed, the probability that it corresponds to the setting suggestion is 67%. For example, in the case of setting 4, a giraffe pattern trophy as a normal effect is assigned a number range of 1000, and a copper trophy to a gold trophy as a setting suggestion effect is assigned a number range of 2000 (total).

According to the configuration of the third modification, the player can be provided with a setting suggestion effect by the trophy image 616 with high frequency as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period and acquiring a large number of big hits (small hit V and symbol big hit). , The fun of the game can be further enhanced.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, since the advantageous period is set as the "consecutive villa period", the advantageous period may end without acquiring the special game, so that the number of acquisitions of the special game in the "consecutive villa period" increases. As a result, the number of special game trials in the advantageous period decreases in inverse proportion. Therefore, in the lottery under the situation where the number of trials can be reduced, the trophy image 616 can be easily displayed as in the second modification and the third modification, and the ratio of the trophy image 616 to appear as a setting suggestion is increased ( It can be said that it is a method that can be configured to reward the player for achieving a condition that is more difficult to achieve by (increasing the reliability).

A fourth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 has a set value suggested by the setting suggestion effect according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period when the special game in the advantageous period ends. It may be configured so that the width of is narrowed down. For example, the effect determining means 303 may determine with a high probability that the trophy image 616 is displayed in a mode in which the range of suggested settings is relatively narrow as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases. Alternatively, the effect determining means 303 has so far displayed the trophy image 616 in a mode in which the range of suggested settings is relatively narrow when the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number or more. It may be determined more frequently.

FIG. 64 shows an example of a modified trophy lottery table. The trophy lottery table of FIG. 61 is related to the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, and is referred to by the effect determining means 303 when the number of consecutive villas increases (here, when the number of consecutive villas is 4 times). In the lottery table shown in the figure, the number is set so that the trophy appearance rate is 27% and the Gase ratio (normal production appearance rate) is 35%.

In the trophy lottery table for each number of consecutive villas in the fourth modification, the number is set for the trophy mode in which the set value (or set value range) to be suggested is a set value (or set value range) less than the normal effect. The range (selection probability) is set to 0. As described above, the normal effect is a Gase effect in which the trophy image 616 of the color corresponding to the number of consecutive villas is displayed. For example, in the lottery table of FIG. 64, in the area of the copper trophy (suggestion of setting 2 or more) and the silver trophy (suggestion of setting 3 or more), which are less than the gold trophy (suggestion of setting 4 or more) corresponding to the number of consecutive villas 4. On the other hand, the trophy range is set to 0.

As another aspect, in the trophy lottery table for each number of consecutive villas, the set value range to be suggested is the set value range suggested when the effect of the effect pattern, which is the normal effect at the same timing, is executed as the setting suggestion effect. The number range may be set to 0 for a wider trophy aspect. In the trophy lottery table of FIG. 64, the bronze trophy (setting 2), which is a setting suggestion effect suggesting a wider setting value range than the gold trophy of the normal effect corresponding to the number of consecutive villas 4 (in the case of the setting suggestion effect, suggests setting 4 or more). The number range is set to 0 for the silver trophy (suggested above) and the silver trophy (suggested above 3). As a result, as shown in the trophy lottery table of FIG. 61, when the number of consecutive villas was 2 times, the maximum setting range to be suggested was 5 (that is, setting 2 to 6), but when the number of consecutive villas was 4 times, it was suggested. The maximum setting range is narrowed down to 3 (that is, settings 4 to 6).

According to the configuration of the fourth modification, by narrowing the suggestion range of the setting suggestion effect according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period, it is accurate as a privilege for acquiring many special games in the advantageous period. It is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect with a higher degree.

As yet another aspect, in addition to the magnitude of the suggested setting value range, the concept of the magnitude of the priority of the setting suggestion effect shown in the third embodiment is adopted, and the setting suggestion effect that can be executed as a normal effect at the same timing is adopted. The number range in the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect pattern, which has a priority lower than the priority of the effect pattern of the content of, may be set to 0. According to this aspect, the content of the suggestion to the player can be narrowed down to the content considered to be higher priority and more useful. In the fourth modification, the range to be suggested is narrowed (the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value equal to or less than the setting value when the normal effect is the setting suggestion is not executed), but it is completely implemented. It is not limited to the one that does not (the number range is 0), and a specification that makes it difficult to appear by reducing the execution frequency of these (for example, setting the number range to 10 or less) may be adopted.

A fifth modification will be described. In the above embodiment, when the special game ends as an advantageous period, the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 are selectively executed. As a modification, when the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state or time-saving gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine) ends as an advantageous period, the effect determining means 303 usually uses the trophy image 616 in the end effect of the advantageous period. The effect and the setting suggestion effect may be selectively executed. The end timing of the advantageous period may be the timing at which the time-saving (probability change) game state ends as the game state or the fluctuation in which the special figure 2 hold after the time reduction ends becomes 0, and the special figure 2 4 variation after the time reduction ends. It may be an eye. Further, in the case of a gaming machine with a probability variation, a special game of a normal jackpot without a probability variation transition may be completed.

In the fifth modification, as shown in FIG. 60, the effect determining means 303 displays the number of big hits (small hit V + symbol big hit) acquired so far in the advantageous period on the effect screen displayed at the end of the advantageous period. A result image 614 showing the number of prize balls may be displayed, and a trophy image 616 as a normal effect or a setting suggestion effect may be displayed. In the fifth modification, the timing for displaying the trophy image 616 as the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect is different from that in the fourth embodiment, and it is of course possible to combine it with other modifications relating to the fourth embodiment.

A sixth modification will be described. In the above embodiment, when the special game ends in the advantageous period, a lottery is performed at the trophy lottery table according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period, and the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 are selected. Executed. As a modification, the effect determining means 303 is executed on condition that a special game is acquired when the number of remaining games in the advantageous period (specific game state) is within a predetermined section (in other words, within the value range). As an effect, depending on which section the special game was acquired, the presence or absence and type of the trophy lottery table may be changed, and the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect using the trophy image 616 may be selectively executed. Good. The effect executed on the condition that the special game is acquired may be an effect before the transition to the special game, a demonstration for starting the special game, a demonstration for ending the special game, or an effect after the end of the special game.

As another aspect, the effect determining means 303 is executed on condition that a special game is acquired when the cumulative number of symbol fluctuations executed in the advantageous period (in other words, the cumulative number of games) is within a predetermined section. As the effect, a normal effect using the trophy image 616 and a setting suggestion effect may be selectively executed. As yet another aspect, the effect determining means 303 determines that the special game has been acquired when the cumulative number of symbol fluctuations (in other words, the number of elapsed games) executed after the end of the previous special game is within a predetermined section. As the effect to be executed as a condition, a normal effect using the trophy image 616 and a setting suggestion effect may be selectively executed. As in the sixth modification, the condition that the special game is acquired in the situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous period is small and the cumulative number of games in the advantageous period is large is set by acquiring the special game in the situation. Since the number of trials for performing the suggestion effect execution lottery is reduced compared to the situation leading up to the situation, it is highly difficult to acquire a special game, that is, to perform the setting suggestion effect execution lottery. It can be said that it is a condition. When it is highly difficult to achieve the condition for receiving the lottery for the setting suggestion effect, the lottery for the setting suggestion effect can be received or the setting suggestion effect with higher reliability is executed. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the specific game state, which is an advantageous period.

A seventh modification will be described. As partially described in the fourth embodiment or modification described above, in the effect determining means 303, the number of consecutive villas in the advantageous period, in other words, the number of special game acquisitions in one or one advantageous period is a predetermined value. The setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the above cases. For example, the effect determining means 303 may execute the setting suggestion effect by displaying the trophy image 616 inconsistent with the number of consecutive villas, as in the embodiment. Further, regarding the display of the trophy image 616 as the setting suggestion effect, the effect determining means 303 has an advantageous period of one time or one period in addition to the situation such as the display based on the number of consecutive villas and the execution of the special game in the specific section. The setting suggestion effect may be executed when the cumulative number of game values (for example, prize balls and medals) acquired in the game is equal to or more than a predetermined amount or when the game value belongs to a predetermined amount range divided in advance. For example, the effect determining means 303 displays the trophy image 616 that matches the cumulative number of game values as a normal effect with a predetermined first probability, and replaces the normal effect with a predetermined second probability. Therefore, the trophy image 616 inconsistent with the cumulative number of game values may be displayed as a setting suggestion effect.

In the seventh modification, the effect determining means 303 may execute the following single units or combinations (1) to (3) so as to achieve the conditions that are difficult to achieve. (1) The effect determining means 303 may increase the reliability of the setting suggestion effect, in other words, the ratio of the false effect (the effect suggesting false content or the normal effect of the embodiment) is reduced by the authenticity ratio. May be good. Further, (2) the effect determining means 303 may narrow down the set value range suggested by the setting suggestion effect, in other words, the setting suggestion effect in a mode in which the suggested set value range is narrow may be displayed with high probability. Good. Further, (3) the effect determining means 303 may increase the winning rate of the lottery for determining whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In other words, the lottery table referred to by the effect determining means 303 (here, the trophy lottery table as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64) has a higher probability of setting suggestion effect as conditions that are difficult to achieve are achieved. May be set to run in.

In this modification, the trophy lottery table with 3 consecutive villas (or 3 to 5 consecutive villas) has a total execution probability of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect (in other words, the display probability of the trophy image 616) of 10. On the other hand, for the trophy lottery table with 6 or more consecutive villas, the total execution probability of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 20%. In addition, in the trophy lottery table with 3 consecutive villas (or 3 to 5 consecutive villas), the distribution rate between the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect is set to 50%: 50%, while the number of consecutive villas is 6 times. In the above trophy lottery table, the distribution rate between the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 35%: 65%.

In addition, in the trophy lottery table with 3 consecutive villas (or 3 to 5 consecutive villas), the image A suggesting setting 2 or more (that is, 5 types of settings 2 to 6) has a relatively high probability. It may be set to be selected. For example, it may be set to be selected with a higher probability than the selection probability of the image A in the trophy lottery table having 6 or more consecutive villas. On the other hand, the trophy lottery table with 6 or more consecutive villas may be set so that the image B suggesting setting 5 or more (that is, two types of setting 5 or 6) is selected with a relatively high probability. .. For example, it may be set to be selected with a higher probability than the selection probability of the image B in the trophy lottery table with three consecutive villas.

In addition, as a condition that is difficult to achieve, the effect determining means 303 executes the above-mentioned single units or combinations of (1) to (3) as the remaining advantageous period is smaller or the remaining advantageous period is equal to or less than a predetermined value. You may. This aspect is particularly suitable for a machine with a probability change of number of times (so-called ST machine). Further, as a condition that is difficult to achieve, the effect determining means 303 is a single unit or a combination of the above (1) to (3) when the duration of the advantageous period is longer or the duration of the advantageous period is equal to or longer than a predetermined value. May be executed. This aspect is particularly suitable for probabilistic machines or gaming machines with fall specifications until the next time.

As an exception to the configuration shown in the seventh modification, when the jackpot ends in a single shot, that is, in the specific game state after the first special game, there is no consecutive villa that regains the special game, and the advantageous period is When finished, the effect determining means 303 suggests setting to win with a low probability at the end of the advantageous period (for example, a lower probability than when a jackpot occurs a predetermined number of times or more in the advantageous period, for example, a probability of about 1%). The setting suggestion effect may be displayed by using the effect lottery table (trophy lottery table). In this case, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be a low probability, while the reliability may be a high probability such as 95%. For example, in the trophy lottery table, the selection probability of the normal effect and the setting suggestion effect may be set to 5%: 95%. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by configuring the configuration so that the setting suggestion effect with high reliability can be executed when a disappointing result for the player such as the end of a single shot is obtained. Further, when the number of games in the advantageous section is used as the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect, for example, when the number of remaining games is doublet, an exception may be provided to improve the reliability and execution probability of the setting suggestion effect. ..

The eighth modification will be described. The effect determining means 303 may change the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect according to the time information output from the time measuring means 307 and the like. Hereinafter, the lottery tables for setting suggestion effects such as the pending change lottery table in the third embodiment and the trophy lottery table in the fourth embodiment are collectively referred to as "setting suggestion lottery table". For example, the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time zone may be set to have a higher execution probability of the setting suggestion effect than the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in other time zones. A specific time zone is the Nth time of a predetermined effect (for example, an effect including a setting suggestion pattern) after the power is turned on until the end of a predetermined number of fluctuations after the power is turned on in the morning and evening (for example, 5 pm to 7 pm). (N may be any or a combination of up to the execution of (for example, 2 to 3)).

In addition, the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time zone is set to have a higher total execution probability of the normal effect (gase effect) and the setting suggestion effect than the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in other time zones. May be done. For example, when displaying the trophy image 616 as a normal effect or a setting suggestion effect, the appearance probability of the trophy image 616 in a specific time zone may be increased. Further, the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in a specific time zone may be set to have a higher reliability of the setting suggestion than the setting suggestion lottery table referred to in other time zones, in other words, the normal effect ( The execution probability of (Gase effect) may be set low.

A ninth modification will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the small hit probability associated with entering the second starting port 12 is set higher than the small hit probability associated with entering the first starting port 11, and the pachinko gaming machine 500 enters the second starting port 12 in a short time. It may be a so-called "small hit rush" machine having a game property of increasing the number of balls by acquiring a large number of small hits associated with a ball. The effect determining means 303 in the small hit rush machine is when the number of consecutive small hits in the advantageous period (for example, during probabilistic change or time reduction) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of balls ejected in the advantageous period reaches a certain amount. , A contradiction setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a special advance notice effect (cut-in effect, etc.) during a normal game. As a result of the increase in the game value (ball output) during the advantageous period, it is possible to prevent the display opportunity of the setting suggestion effect from being lost only at the end of the special game.

For example, a gaming machine (7th) that displays a setting suggestion effect as a special game end effect when the cumulative total of game values acquired during the advantageous period belongs to the range of 6000 to 6999 and the conditions for executing the setting suggestion effect are satisfied. Consider a modified example). In this gaming machine, when a game value of 6000 to 6999 is obtained by obtaining a prize ball by a small hit during a normal game in an advantageous period, a special game is acquired at the relevant place and the special game is executed. There may be a problem that the setting suggestion effect and the lottery for the setting suggestion effect, which were possible, cannot be executed. According to the configuration of this modification, the setting suggestion effect can be displayed by a special advance notice effect (cut-in effect, etc.) even during the normal game, so that the above problem can be solved. In the case of the slot machine 1010, the period during which ART and the special game are repeated is set as an advantageous period, and when the number of medals acquired within the advantageous period reaches a certain amount, a contradiction setting suggestion effect is produced as the above-mentioned special advance notice effect. May be displayed.

As an example of the setting suggestion effect, when the condition that the number of acquired game values is 1000 × N (N is an integer) is acquired in total at a timing other than the execution of the special game during the advantageous period is satisfied. The content of displaying the image attached to the character image of N people is displayed as a normal effect on the display of "○○○○ (numerical value of 1000 x N) GET!", And when executing the setting suggestion effect, "○○○" ○ GET! ”Is displayed as a setting suggestion (for example, a suggestion of a set value of M or more) in which an image with a character image of M people is displayed. Further, as the setting suggestion effect, not only the contradiction of the image (appearance) but also the mode in which the sounds and lamps executed at the same time are combined and executed in a contradiction mode different from the usual may be executed as the setting suggestion effect. , It is not a contradiction of the number of characters, and when the voice data played when the character image of N people is displayed is special voice data, the setting value is suggested (the setting value N or more is suggested). Method may be adopted. It should be noted that the example in which the setting suggestion is such that the lamp and the audio data are inconsistent with the combination of the image data can be applied to the fourth embodiment and other modified examples.

A tenth modification will be described. In addition to the contradiction setting suggestion effect described in the fourth embodiment, the effect determination means 303 can display a setting suggestion effect (here, a situation that is inconsistent with the game state or a situation that is inconsistent with the game state). It may be called "matching setting suggestion effect"). The matching setting suggestion effect may be designed so that the appearance rate is high and the reliability is low (there is a lot of slack) as compared with the contradiction setting suggestion effect. Further, as an example of the matching setting suggestion effect, there is an effect example that suggests the evenness and oddity of the set value. The effect is an even-numbered suggestion effect and an odd number suggesting even-numbered settings among the matching setting suggestion effects, depending on the evenness and oddness of the set values (whether the set values are 2, 4, 6 or 1, 3, 5). It is configured to change the appearance ratio with the odd-numbered suggestion effect that suggests the setting. Further, only in the case of setting 6, the ratio of the appearance rate of the effect that becomes a ghost and the appearance rate of the true effect is set to 1: 1 among the matching setting suggestion effects, and in the settings 1 to 5, the matching setting suggestion effect Of these, the ratio of the appearance rate of the effect that is a ghost and the appearance rate of the effect that is true may be 1: 4.

The eleventh modification will be described. FIG. 65 shows an example of a special game end screen of a modified example. The production determination means 303 displays a character image 604 as a background image, a total number of jackpots acquired during the advantageous period (the number of consecutive villas in one advantageous period, and here, 3 times) on the special game end screen 610. The total number of prize balls (3310pt here) and the title 618 (level 2 here) acquired during the advantageous period are displayed.

The effect determining means 303 displays a character image 604 of the number of people matching the number of consecutive villas or the amount of balls to be output as a normal effect on the special game end screen 610. In this modification, as a normal effect, character images 604 of the same number of people as the number of consecutive villas are displayed. As another aspect, one character image 604 when the ball output amount is 1000 to 1999 pt, two character images 604 when the ball output amount is 2000 to 2999 pt, and three characters when the ball output amount is 3000 to 3999 pt. The image 604 may be displayed.

In addition, the effect determining means 303 displays the title 618 of the content that matches the number of consecutive villas or the amount of balls to be output as a normal effect on the special game end screen 610. In this modification, as a normal effect, the title 618 indicating the same level (LV) as the number of consecutive villas is displayed. As another aspect, the title 618 indicating level 1 when the amount of balls is 1000 to 1999 pt, the title 618 indicating level 2 when the amount of balls is 2000 to 2999 pt, and the level 3 when the amount of balls is 3000 to 3999 pt are shown. The title 618 may be displayed.

The effect determining means 303 has a first probability determined by the setting suggestion lottery table shown in FIG. 61 or the like, and as a setting suggestion effect on the special game end screen 610, the number of people inconsistent with the number of consecutive villas or the amount of balls to be played. Character image 604 is displayed. In this modification, as a setting suggestion effect, character images 604 of a number of people different from the number of consecutive villas are displayed. For example, FIG. 65 suggests that the setting is 2 or more by displaying the character images 604 of two people even though the number of consecutive villas is three.

The effect determining means 303 has a second probability determined by the setting suggestion lottery table shown in FIG. 61 or the like, and the content of the setting suggestion effect on the special game end screen 610 is inconsistent with the number of consecutive villas or the amount of balls to be played. The title of 618 is displayed. In this modification, as a setting suggestion effect, a title 618 indicating a level different from the number of consecutive villas is displayed. For example, FIG. 65 suggests that the setting is 2 or more by displaying the title 618 indicating the level 2 even though the number of consecutive villas is three. In general, it is desirable that the level is not downgraded. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 stores the level of the title 618 displayed in the previous normal effect and the setting suggestion effect, and when the level to be displayed as the new setting suggestion effect is less than the previously displayed level, a new setting is made. The execution of the suggestion effect may be prohibited.

In the case of the slot machine 1010, the display content on the special game end screen 610 may be the character image 604, the number of big bonuses in the advantageous period (for example, the ART period), the number of regular bonuses, and the cumulative number of medals acquired. Further, the effect determining means 1304 of the slot machine 1010 may execute an additional effect of the number of ART games (an effect of notifying the cumulative value of the added number), and at that time, at least one of the character image 604 and the title 618. You may perform a normal effect or a setting suggestion effect using.

A twelfth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the fourth embodiment, the effect determining means 303 is similar to the end demonstration of the special game during a predetermined number of special figure fluctuations (for example, four special figure 2 fluctuations) immediately after the end of the special game. You may display the effect of the content to be performed (here, referred to as "pseudo-demo effect"). The effect determining means 303 may execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, display of the trophy image 616) described in at least one of the embodiment and the modified example in the pseudo demo effect. If the first variation immediately after the end of the special game is a big hit or a small hit, the player may not be able to sufficiently confirm the content of the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, during the celebration image display after the end of the special game, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by a special notice such as a cut-in effect.

A thirteenth modification will be described. If the power is cut off during the consecutive villa period, the information on the number of consecutive villas and the information on the acquired game value stored in the RAM of the sub board 300 will be erased (sub-reset). It may not be possible to execute. For example, when a setting suggestion lottery table is provided according to the number of consecutive villas, there is an inconvenience that the lottery for setting suggestion effect cannot be executed because the table that should have been originally referred cannot be determined when the number of consecutive villas information is deleted. Can occur. The more the power is turned off, the more disadvantageous the player is in situations where high setting suggestion can be expected in situations such as when the number of consecutive villas is 5 or more as described above, or in situations where a lottery for executing high reliability setting suggestion production can be received. May become.

Therefore, when the game state at the time of power recovery corresponds to an advantageous period such as during a big hit or during an electric chew support game (during a short time), the effect determining means 303 executes the next setting suggestion effect until the end of the advantageous period. During a predetermined period such as lottery timing, the execution probability (winning probability) of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the normal setting suggestion lottery table. May be executed. Alternatively, the effect determining means 303 calculates and increases the number of areas in which the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in the normal setting suggestion lottery table when the gaming state at the time of power recovery is an advantageous period ( For example, it may be doubled) and a lottery to determine the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be executed.

A 14th modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, in principle, a specific effect (referred to as "specific effect" here) that can be executed only in a normal game in a normal state outside the advantageous period is displayed exceptionally during the advantageous period. You may suggest the setting by letting it. For example, a plurality of types of variable effects that can be displayed during a normal game in a normal state (for example, a reach effect, which is referred to as a “normal variable effect” here) may be associated with a plurality of types of set values in advance. When the effect determination means 303 wins the setting suggestion lottery with a low probability of about 1% at the start of the variation during the time reduction in the situation where the variation pattern of the special symbol of the predetermined variation time is determined on the main board. The normal fluctuation effect corresponding to the set value of the own machine may be displayed. In this case, it is a setting suggestion when the symbol variation during the time reduction develops into the same effect (for example, the same reach) as the variation in the normal state.

The above "same production" means that the motif, story, characters appearing, etc. are common, and the flow of production may be different. For example, the content may be different until the predetermined timing after the reach development, but may be the same after the predetermined timing after the reach development. By making the effect partially modified in this way, the effect scale is associated with the different variable times selected between the time saving and the normal game. Further, the effect determining means 303 may further display an object for setting suggestion such as the trophy image 616 of the embodiment while displaying the normal variation effect as the setting suggestion during the time saving.

In relation to the 14th modification, when the effect determining means 303 notifies that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a small hit during a normal game in a normal state, the reach of the appearance of the first aspect of notifying the big hit or the small hit. The production (here, the story reach production) may be displayed with a high probability. On the other hand, when the effect determining means 303 notifies that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a small hit during the electric chew support (during a short time), the reach effect of the appearance of the second aspect of notifying the big hit or the small hit ( Here, the battle effect) may be displayed with a high probability.

In this case, when the effect determining means 303 notifies a big hit or a small hit during the electric chew support, the reach effect (story reach effect) of the appearance of the first aspect may be displayed with a low probability as a setting suggestion effect. Good. Further, the effect determining means 303 may change the mode of the story reach effect displayed during the electric chew support according to the set value of the own machine. For example, when the effect determining means 303 suggests an even number of set values (2, 4, 6, 6), it selects a story reach effect indicating story A, and suggests an odd number of set values (1, 3, 5). , A story reach effect indicating story B may be selected. Further, the effect determining means 303 selects a story reach effect indicating story C when suggesting a high setting (for example, setting 4 or higher), and selects a story reach effect indicating story D when suggesting setting 6. May be good.

The time scale of the story reach effect in the normal game in the normal state differs depending on the type, but during the electric chew support, the special variation pattern table is used for a predetermined period from the end of the previous special game. The production time of each variation may be fixed. Therefore, even if the story reach effect displayed in the normal state and the story reach effect displayed during the electric chew support show the same content, some of the content may differ due to the adjustment of the time scale. There is. In the above special variation pattern table, the selection probability may be determined as follows.
[At the time of deviation] Shortening fluctuation pattern 75%, normal notice deviation pattern A 16%, normal notice deviation pattern B 4%, setting suggestion reach development deviation pattern (for example, story reach that becomes a deviation) 5%.
[At the time of hit] Hit pattern A 30%, hit pattern B 20%, hit pattern C 20%, reach development with setting suggestion hit pattern 30% (for example, hit story reach).

The fifteenth modification (contradiction of game playability explanation production) will be described. In this modification, the setting suggestion is that there is a contradiction or an error in the game content explained by the dialogue notice, in other words, the setting suggestion is that a game different from the game explained by the dialogue notice is executed. For example, with a certain fluctuation, the dialogue notice by character A "If the dialogue NO24 hold changes to green, you can expect development to super reach! Is displayed, and then the change related to green hold does not develop into super reach even though the change to green hold is changed by the hold change effect, the last digit value of "line NO24" is "4". May indicate a set value of 4 or more.

In this case, only when the set value is set to 4 or more, when the effect determining means 303 receives the preliminary determination information regarding the hold that does not develop into super reach, the hold lamp image is set to green hold with a predetermined probability. The scenario of the pending change effect to be changed may be determined, and the execution of the above-mentioned dialogue notice may be determined. Further, the effect determining means 303 may set the value of the last digit of "Serif NO" so as to match the set value of the own machine.

As another example, in a certain fluctuation, a dialogue notice by character B "If the same notice appears three times from the start of the dialogue NO32 fluctuation to the third pseudo fluctuation, it seems that there is a high possibility of X reach development" is displayed, and then. If the same notice appears three times until the third pseudo-variation in the fluctuation of, but it does not develop into X reach, the last digit value of "line NO32", "2", is the set value of 2 or more. It may be a suggestion.

As yet another example, in a certain fluctuation, a button image is displayed as a dialogue notice by character A "It's a dialogue NO3 chance", and a new image etc. is displayed even though the button is pressed due to the fluctuation. If it comes off without being done, or if an image showing disappointing content is displayed due to the button press operation, "3", which is the last digit value of "line NO3", is set to 3 or more. It may be a suggestion.

In this case, the effect determining means 303 may determine the execution of the above-mentioned dialogue notice and the display of the button image with a predetermined probability when the fluctuation that does not develop into the super reach is started. The effect determining means 303 may set the value of the last digit of the "serif NO" so as to match the set value of the own machine. The success pattern when the button operation is pressed is pseudo continuous fluctuation, development to super reach, and the like.

In the fifteenth modification, the dialogue notice by the character X suggests the setting, such as "Serence NO99 Character A, Character B seems to have some meaning to lie ...". It is desirable to provide an effect that implies that it is connected to. In addition, it is desirable that the content of the dialogue notice, which is a nuisance at the time of setting suggestion production, is not an affirmation but an ambiguous expression such as "expected" or "highly likely". In the above example, the last digit of the dialogue NO is used as the setting suggestion information, but the difference between the tens digit value and the one digit value may be used as the setting suggestion information. In either case, it is desirable that the set value is suggested in some way according to the image of the dialogue notice.

(Fifth Example)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment is based on the ball gaming machine described in the third embodiment. The basic structure on the front side, the basic structure on the back side, the functional configuration of the main board 200, and the functional configuration of the sub-board 300 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment are the same as those of the third embodiment ( 49, 2, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 11). The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment may be based on the ball gaming machines described in the prerequisite technology, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the ball game machine described in the third embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technology and the first to fourth embodiments are described with the same reference numerals. To do.

The outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment is equipped with a small hit development jackpot and has a high probability of a small hit of 1/10. Therefore, in a situation where a small hit development jackpot can be implemented, a hold control means. Due to the presence of additional small hit hold in 240, small hit development big hits can be continuously generated in a short time (the subsequent small hit hold existing in the hold control means 240 is also referred to as "V stock"). .. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment has four main features related to the production. These features can be implemented as a single unit, or can be combined in any combination, and can also be combined with the features described in the prerequisite technology and the first to fourth embodiments. ..

The outline of the four features will be described.
Features 1. Right-handed notification:
Small hit development There is a possibility that a small hit will be won with a high probability (for example, a probability of 1/10 or more). Due to its nature, a small number of fluctuations will result in a win (in other words, the presence or absence of a big hit or a small hit). Since the specifications are to be notified, it is important to elaborate on the winning notification effect in one fluctuation. Therefore, in recent years, with respect to a plurality of special symbol fluctuations in which a small hit can be won with a high probability, the effect display device 60 makes the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 appear as if it is a variation effect of the decorative symbol once. A technique called "summary fluctuation" is adopted. By performing "summary fluctuation", for example, there is a 1/10 probability that a small hit will be won 5 times (1 fluctuation and 4 hold fluctuations, and 4 hold will be win / fail by pre-reading judgment). Is configured to be able to be executed as "summary fluctuation", it is possible to execute an effect in which a small hit development big hit can be obtained with a probability of about 40% in one fluctuation display. In this case, it is desirable not to let the player realize that it is a pseudo-variation in which a plurality of fluctuations are combined into one variation, but it is possible that the variation is a pseudo-variation due to the hold display. It may be exposed.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, when the hold reaches the upper limit while both the right-handed notification and the simple hold display are used at the timing when the "summary fluctuation" is executed in the easy-to-enter state. , Change the display mode of the right-handed notification so that the subsequent display on hold is not performed (or the display is switched to a display that is difficult to recognize as a hold display, or the display size is reduced to reduce visibility). .. As a result, the player can be made not aware of the existence of the hold during a predetermined period including the easy entry state, and the player can be delighted with the content of the production without being caught by the actual fluctuation break.

(1) While the hold quantity is not displayed on the effect display device 60 in a recognizable manner, the hold quantity is displayed in a mode in which the hold quantity cannot be recognized at a glance by means other than the effect display device 60. May be good. For example, a display device smaller than the effect display device 60 may be provided in the corner of the game board 80, and the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 may be displayed on the display device. Alternatively, (2) the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 may be indicated by a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking an LED (lamp or the like) different from the effect display device 60. As a result, the player who wants to confirm the number of holds can be notified of the number of holds.

Feature 2. Small hit display on hold:
After announcing a small hit in the hold as a look-ahead effect (after announcing that there is a small hit in the hold of "summary fluctuation" described in feature 1 as a variable effect), it will be missed by the time the small hit actually occurs. There is a possibility that fluctuations may be sandwiched, and the player who sees the fluctuations due to the special symbol display unit or the simple symbol may misunderstand that there is no small hit. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment changes before the hold in which the small hit occurs (hereinafter, also referred to as “small hit hold”) after notifying that the small hit exists in the hold as a look-ahead effect. While the hold to be displayed (hereinafter, also referred to as "off hold") is exhausted, the object with the content suggesting that a small hit occurs is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being misidentified.

Feature 3. Explanation notice:
In recent years, gaming machines that are tied up with works such as dramas and animations have become widespread, but if the player does not know the background or characters of the work, the intention of the production is not conveyed to the player, and the effect of the production is sufficient. It may not be exhibited. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment displays a notice effect (hereinafter, also referred to as "explanatory notice") for explaining the content of the main effect. The explanatory notice may include content that explains one or more of the motif of the production, the world view of the work, the background, the theme, the story, the characters, and the purpose.

Even if the main production is based on an original work that is not an existing work, an explanatory notice explaining the motif, world view, characters, etc. of the work may be displayed. Further, even when the main production is based on a theme such as Bingo or roulette that does not have a story, an explanatory notice that presents information such as rules, purposes, and trivia related to the theme may be displayed.

However, the explanation notice is a production that is not related to the degree of expectation of a big hit or a small hit (in other words, whether or not a big hit occurs). Therefore, if the explanation notice occurs frequently, the player may feel annoyed. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment basically assumes that one player is presented with the explanation notice only once, and sets a limit on the lottery related to the execution of the explanation notice. As a result, the player can understand the motif of the production, the world view, the characters, and the like, and on the other hand, it is possible to avoid making the player feel annoyed.

Feature 4. Specific effect display with specific fluctuations in a specific period:
In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation of special figure 1 is the main game in the normal state where it is not easy to enter the ball, but the final of special figure 2 in the chance production accompanying the hit of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 40. In the case of fluctuations, etc., an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern is displayed. As a result, the effect intended by the designer is presented to the player at the timing intended by the designer.

Hereinafter, the above four features will be described in detail in order.
First, the right-handed notification of feature 1 and the small hit display in hold of feature 2 will be described.
The effect determining means 303 displays a special effect having a continuous content over one or more symbol fluctuations for a predetermined period including an easy-to-enter ball state. In the embodiment, the effect determining means 303 has a total of 5 fluctuations of 1 time reduction and 4 holdings (holding in special figure 2) when the time saving is won once in the normal state (4R in FIG. 40 + the first hit of the time saving 1 time). Is displayed on the effect display device 60 as a “summary variation effect” that makes the effect appear to be one variation (referred to as “Kakurenbo chance” here).

It should be noted that the one-time short-time game in which the ball is easy to enter means the one-time variable display game targeting the second special symbol 52, and the first special symbol in which the probability of winning a small hit is set low. When 51 is displayed in a variable manner, the easy entry state is not terminated until the variable display such as a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) is displayed.

Then, in the "hide and seek chance" effect of this embodiment, the effect display is started at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the variation display of one time reduction after the end of the big hit, as shown below. The effect display is executed.

FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c) show an example of chance production (common to hit and miss) in the fifth embodiment. The effect screens 700 of FIGS. 66A to 66C are displayed when the symbol changes once in a short time. The effect screen 700 of FIG. 66A includes a hide-and-seek chance image 702, a first instruction object 704, a second instruction object 706, and a mini-mounted drawing 708. The hide-and-seek chance image 702 includes the movement of the character. The mini-designed figure 708 plays the role of the decorative symbol 61, but is displayed with lower visibility than the normal decorative symbol 61. Specifically, the mini-designed drawing 708 has a size smaller than that of the normal decorative symbol 61, and is displayed in the corner of the effect screen 700. The mini drawing 708 may be set to have high transparency and may be displayed semi-transparently.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the embodiment, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to a high probability (1/10), and the easy entry state is also 1 of the second special symbol. Since it will end when the change display of the second time is stopped, it is important to enter the ball into the second starting port 12 and save the special figure 2 hold during the time saving (easy ball entry state). .. Therefore, in the embodiment, as the first instruction object 704 and the second instruction object 706, two images are displayed to urge the player to hit right-handed, that is, to launch the game ball aiming at the second starting port 12. is there. The size of the second instruction object 706 is set larger than the size of the first instruction object 704.

The second instruction object 706 is divided into four areas. The effect determining means 303 sequentially changes the color from the left area of the second instruction object 706 each time the special figure 2 hold occurs until the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number (4 in the fifth embodiment). To go. For example, the second instruction object 706 in FIG. 66A shows that there are two special figures 2 hold. Further, when the time interval between two game balls being continuously fired is 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds, the color change of one area of the second instruction object 706 starts and ends. The time may also be set to 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds.

FIG. 66B shows an effect screen 700 displayed when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number (4 in the fifth embodiment). The effect determining means 303 does not change the contents (for example, shape, text, etc.) of the first instruction object 704 even when the number of the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit. This is because right-handed hitting is advantageous for the player in the easy-to-enter state. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit, the effect determining means 303 changes the contents of the second instruction object 706 to suggest the number of holds (because the special figure 2 hold does not reach the upper limit in the embodiment). Switch from the content that suggests right-handedness) to the content that does not suggest the number of pending objects.

In FIG. 66 (b), as the above switching, the shape of the second instruction object 706 is switched from the right-pointing arrow to a square, and the instruction text is also simply switched to "ready". This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the display contents of the hide-and-seek chance without being aware of the pattern fluctuations made behind the hide-and-seek chance effect display.

FIG. 66 (c) shows the effect screen 700 at the time of the winning branch. The hide-and-seek chance image 702 in the figure is a content that prompts the pressing of the effect button 109 (the cross key 110 may be used). When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation and the timing of the winning branch is reached, the effect determining means 303 erases the second instruction object 706, while the display of the first instruction object 704 continues.

As described above, the pre-determination means 235 of the main board 200 immediately starts the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port 12. Regardless of whether or not the ball is entered, the sub-board 300 is notified of the preliminary determination information regarding the result when the winning / failing determination based on the second lottery value acquired with the entry is executed. In other words, the pre-judgment means 235 determines whether or not the ball is hit (including a big hit and a small hit) based on the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port 12. The sub-board 300 is notified of the pre-determination information indicating that the corresponding variation is a hit. The effect determining means 303 performs the change once in a short time and the special figure 2 hold (maximum) based on the hit / fail determination result related to the change and the preliminary judgment information related to the special figure 2 hold notified from the main board 200. If there is a big hit or a small hit in (4), that is detected and the effect after the winning branch is distributed.

FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c) show an example of chance production (disengagement) in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 67 (a) is an effect screen 700 following FIG. 66 (c) (that is, a winning branch screen), and shows an effect screen 700 showing a deviation. That is, the effect screen 700 is displayed when neither the small hit nor the big hit exists in either the symbol change of one time reduction or the special figure 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the effect determining means 303 includes an effect screen 700 including a hide-and-seek chance image 702 that notifies the end of the hide-and-seek chance and a mini-mounted figure 708 of the detached stop mode, as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

After that, the second variation pattern determining means 232 of the main board 200 selects the ultra-short variation pattern (0.5 seconds) for disengagement until the hold immediately before the final hold of FIG. The effect determining means 303 maintains the hide-and-seek chance image 702 of FIG. 67 (b) until the hold immediately before the final hold of FIG. 2 is exhausted. At the same time, the effect determining means 303 repeats the ultra-shortening variation of the mini-mounted drawing 708 and the stop in the disengaged mode.

When the fluctuation of the final hold of the special figure 2 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the effect determining means 303 stops the decorative symbol 61 having a size larger than the mini drawing 708 on the effect screen 700 in a disengaged manner. In this way, from the one-time variation of the time saving to the final variation of the special figure 2 hold, (1) the mini-mounted object 708 is displayed in a mode in which the visibility is relatively low, and (2) the visibility is relative in the final variation. By displaying a high decorative symbol 61 and (3) changing the content of the second instruction object 706, the player can make one variation from the one variation of the time saving to the final variation of the special figure 2 hold. It will be easier to feel.

FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (c) show an example of chance production (hit) in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 (a) is an effect screen 700 following FIG. 66 (c) (that is, a winning branch screen), and shows an effect screen 700 showing a hit. That is, the effect screen 700 displayed when there is a small hit or a big hit in either the fluctuation of one time reduction or the special figure 2 hold is shown. Here, it is assumed that there is a small hit or a big hit in the special figure 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the effect determining means 303 notifies the success of the hide-and-seek chance (for example, the finding of a specific character to be found) when the fluctuation is stopped once in a short time. Then, the effect screen 700 including the mini-mounted image 708 in the detached stop mode is displayed.

After that, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 of the main board 200 selects the ultra-shortening fluctuation pattern (0.5 seconds) for disengagement until the hold immediately before the holding of the special figure 2 which is a hit. The effect determining means 303 maintains the hide-and-seek chance image 702 of FIG. 68 (b) until the hold immediately before the hit special figure 2 hold is exhausted. At the same time, the effect determining means 303 repeats the ultra-shortening variation of the mini-mounted drawing 708 and the stop in the disengaged mode. As shown in FIG. 68 (c), the effect determining means 303 stops the decorative symbol 61 in a hit mode on the effect screen 700 when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 hold that becomes a hit is stopped.

As shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b), the effect determining means 303 holds a lottery value in which the preliminary determination information (here, the preliminary determination information on hold in FIG. 2) is a small hit or a large hit. When indicating that, before the symbol change based on the lottery value that becomes a small hit or a big hit is started, an effect suggesting a transition to an advantageous state is displayed. In the figure, a hide-and-seek chance image 702 including a rabbit issuing a peace sign is displayed.

The effect determining means 303 is a predetermined device that suggests a transition to an advantageous state while the variable display of the symbol (here, special figure 2) based on the lottery value held before the lottery value that becomes a small hit or a big hit is made. The display of the object (hit suggestion image 710) is continued. In FIG. 68 (b), the effect determining means 303 displays a hide-and-seek chance image 702 including a rabbit issuing a peace sign and displays a hit suggestion image 710, prior to holding the special figure 2 which is a big hit or a small hit. The display of the hit suggestion image 710 is maintained during the variable display of the reserved special figure 2 hold. Further, the effect determining means 303 displays the hit suggestion image 710, that is, the character string of "rush acquisition" in the same manner during the digestion of the remaining hold held before the hold that becomes a small hit or a big hit.

In the fifth embodiment, the hit suggestion image 710 is displayed at a position near the mini-mounted drawing 708. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that a big hit or a small hit will occur in the future even if the mini-mounted figure 708 is stopped in a disengaged manner. Further, while the variation display of the mini-mounted image 708 continues even during the display of the hit suggestion image 710, the effect determining means 303 uses a combination of the three numbers in the mini-mounted diagram 708 as the variation that becomes a small hit or a big hit approaches. You may approach the mode showing a hit. For example, the stop mode of the mini-mounted drawing 708 may be changed in the order of disengagement without tempai, disengagement with tempai, and hit over a plurality of ultra-shortening fluctuations of the special figure 2 hold.

FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (c) show an example of chance production (per revival) in the fifth embodiment. The display of the hit / fail result after the hit / miss branch (FIGS. 67 (a) and 68 (a)) is performed during the fluctuation of one time reduction, but the second starting port 12 is opened (in the embodiment, a plurality of short times). The easy-to-enter state in which (opening) is easy continues until the change of one time reduction is completed and the second special symbol 52 is stopped and displayed. The stop display time (design fixed time) of the second special symbol 52, which is one time reduction, is stopped even when the second start port 12 is opened at the timing before the stop display of the second special symbol 52. It is set to be closed during the display time. Therefore, a predetermined timing after the start of the hide-and-seek chance fluctuation effect (before the appearance of the first chance-up effect that suggests that the possibility of winning a small hit or a big hit is increasing, or after the winning branch). If a big hit or a small hit special figure 2 hold occurs after (display of the result of success or failure, etc.), it is difficult to replace the content of the hide-and-seek chance effect, so the effect determination means 303 displays the effect of the resurrection. In addition, the effect determining means 303 displays the effect of the resurrection with a predetermined probability even when there is a big hit or a small hit in either the symbol change of one time reduction or the special figure 2 hold before the winning branch. You may.

The display of the hit / fail result after the hit / miss branch shown in FIG. 69 (a) and the change display before the hit hold shown in FIG. Is. In the case of a resurrection hit, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the effect determining means 303 stops the decorative symbol 61 in a hit mode when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 hold, which is a hit, is stopped. In this case, the display of the hit / fail result after the winning branch and the fluctuation display before the hit hold are the same as those at the time of the hit, and the display mode of the hide-and-seek chance image 702 at the time of the hit hold fluctuation is also the same as at the time of the miss. Since a big hit or a small hit is generated, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved. As a modification, in the case of a resurrection hit, if the display of the hit / fail result after the hit / miss branch indicates a miss, the effect content may be different from that at the time of the miss.

A modified example of the feature 1 and the feature 2 will be described.
The first modification will be described. In the above embodiment, when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit during the symbol change of one time reduction, the second instruction object 706 is switched to the content that does not suggest the number of hold, specifically, the character string "ready". Was decided to be displayed. As a modification, the effect determining means 303 may switch the second instruction object 706 to the content explaining the game when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit during the symbol change of one time reduction. The game description may be content that indicates to the player that hide-and-seek chance is a success condition, and for example, if a specific character is found, it will be a hit.

A second modification will be described. Although related to the first modification, the effect determining means 303 is used when a predetermined time elapses without reaching the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 held during the symbol change once in a short time (for example, the winning result shown in FIG. 66 (c)). When the timing of branching is reached), the second instruction object 706 may be switched to the content explaining the game.

A third modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the effect determining means 303 is an image showing the number of special figure 2 hold while the special figure 2 hold does not reach the upper limit number during the symbol change once in a short time (“hold image”). May be displayed on the effect screen 700. When the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number, the effect determining means 303 may erase the hold image and switch the mode of the second instruction object 706 to "ready", and the mode of the second instruction object 706 may be changed. You may switch to the game explanation.

A fourth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, a plurality of types of modes that the second instruction object 706 can take when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number during the symbol change once in a short time may be defined. However, none of the types suggests the number of reserved items. For example, the character string "ready", the character string "filled", the game description 1, the game description 2, and the like may be included, and the size and color may be different for each type. Then, the selection probabilities of these plurality of types may be determined for each set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The effect determining means 303 may select any one from a plurality of types as a mode when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number with the selection probability according to the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500. As a result, the change mode of the second instruction object 706 can be utilized for setting suggestion.

A fifth modification will be described. As described in the fourth modification, a plurality of types of modes of the second instruction object 706 may be defined when the upper limit number of the special figure 2 hold is reached during the symbol change once in a short time. When the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number, the effect determining means 303 has, as the mode of the second instruction object 706, among the above-mentioned plurality of types, depending on the presence or absence or the number of small hits in the special figure 2 hold. You may decide either from. The timing for changing the mode of the second instruction object 706 may be the time when the ball is placed on hold, which is a small hit (when the small hit is pre-read by the prior determination information), or when the gain 2 hold reaches the upper limit. ..

For example, when it is shown that the expectation that there is a small hit in the special figure 2 hold is relatively low, the mode in which "ready" is shown in white may be determined. Further, when it is shown that the expectation that there is a small hit in the special figure 2 hold is relatively high, the mode in which "ready" is shown in blue may be determined. Further, when it is definitively shown that there is one or more small hits in the special figure 2 hold, the mode in which "ready" is shown in red may be determined. Further, when it is definitively shown that there are two or more small hits in the special figure 2 hold, the mode in which "ready" is shown in gold may be determined.

A sixth modification will be described. When the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit number during the symbol change of one time reduction, the effect determining means 303 may notify the presence or absence of a small hit in the special figure 2 hold. For example, the effect determining means 303 normally changes the second instruction object 706 into an image indicating "ready", but if there is a small hit in the special figure hold, the second instruction object 706 is used as a premier effect. May be changed to an image showing "RUSH" in rainbow colors. Since the presence or absence of a small hit is notified before the start of the winning branch effect to be executed from now on, it is possible to realize an effect that surprises the player, in other words, an effect that is unexpected to the player.

A seventh modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, a plurality of types of hit suggestion image 710 may be defined. For example, the size, color, and text may differ for each type. Then, the selection probabilities of these plurality of types of hit suggestion images 710 may be determined for each set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The effect determining means 303 may select one from a plurality of types of hit suggestion images 710 with a selection probability according to the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500. Thereby, the aspect of the hit suggestion image 710 can be utilized for the setting suggestion.

The eighth modification will be described. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the hide-and-seek chance production is during a big hit game (big hit) in which the time saving is once (the easy-to-enter state continues until one variation display of the second special symbol 52 is completed). A part of the production (explanatory production such as "If you do a big hit!") May be executed from the final round, the last two rounds, or the big hit end demo production period, which is the final round of the above.

In addition, the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol in the easy-to-enter state (one time reduction) is the same as the case where the small hit or the big hit is won in the first change of the second special symbol in the easy-to-enter state. The deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol (short fluctuation of about 1 second) during the easy entry state is shown in the mini-mounted figure 708 while continuing to display the explanation effect screen of the Kakurenbo chance. Display only with variable display.

A ninth modification will be described. In order to increase the number of balls ejected in a gaming machine equipped with a small hit V, it is necessary to enter the ball into the starting port in a short time to obtain a small hit. On the other hand, the period of time reduction (number of fluctuations in time reduction) is often set in a relatively short period of time. The main purpose of this modification is to realize a suitable effect for ensuring sufficient entry into the starting port during a short time.

As described above in connection with FIG. 66, the effect determining means 303 (effect display control means 305) displays the second instruction object 706 in the symbol variation in the ball entry easy state. Here, a modified example of the display mode of the second instruction object 706 will be described. In the following, the effect element (which can be said to be an image) corresponding to the second instruction object 706 is referred to as a “holding state suggestion object”. The hold state suggestion object, like the second instruction object 706, suggests the number of special figure 2 hold (in other words, the second lottery value held with the ball entering the second start opening 12). As shown in FIG. 66A, the hold state suggestion object (second instruction object 706) has an arrow shape pointing to the right, and also plays a role of urging the player to hit right.

The hold state suggestion object of this modification includes a plurality of areas (here, four areas) according to the number of holds, as in the case of the second instruction object 706 of FIG. 66 (a). For example, the first area of the hold state suggestion object corresponds to the first special figure 2 hold, the second area corresponds to the second special figure 2 hold, and the third area corresponds to the third special figure 2 hold. The fourth area may correspond to the fourth special figure 2 hold corresponding to the hold. The effect determining means 303 changes the display mode of the hold state suggestion object according to the ball entering the second starting port 12. The effect determining means 303 changes the colors of the first area to the fourth area from the color indicating no hold (for example, white) to the color indicating that there is hold (for example,) as the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 increases. Change to blue) in sequence. Further, in this modification, the upper limit value is set to 4 as the special figure 2 hold, but it is not necessary to limit the number to 4, and 3 or less may be set as the upper limit. In that case, it is preferable to provide a number of areas corresponding to the upper limit value of the hold state for the hold state suggestion object. For example, when the upper limit value of the hold state 2 is 2, the area of the hold state suggestion object is provided. 4 may be provided, and the color of the area may be changed in response to the entry of the ball into the second starting port that exceeds the upper limit of the hold.

As the initial display mode of the hold state suggestion object, the effect determining means 303 of this modification displays the hold state suggestion object in a predetermined mode (in other words, the same mode) regardless of the actual number of the hold state suggestion objects. For example, even if the number of reserved objects in FIG. 2 is already 1 to 4 (that is, 1 or more) at the start of the easy-to-enter ball state, the effect determining means 303 is the first display mode of the pending state suggestion object. All of the 4th area from the area may be displayed in a color indicating that there is no hold. In other words, the effect determining means 303 is in a hold state as an initial display mode of the hold state suggestion object in a mode that suggests that the number of the special figure 2 hold is 0 regardless of the actual number of the special figure 2 hold. Suggestion objects may be displayed. Further, the effect determining means 303 starts from the initial display mode as the first area, depending on the ball entering the second starting port 12 in the easy-to-enter state, regardless of the actual number of the special drawing 2 held. The colors may be changed in the order of the second area, the third area, and the fourth area.

Here, a display example will be described when two special figure reservations are accumulated at the start of the easy entry state. As an initial display mode of the hold state suggestion object, the effect determining means 303 displays the hold state suggestion object in a mode suggesting that the number of the hold state suggestion objects is 0. When the first ball enters the second starting port 12 during the easy entry state (the actual special figure 2 hold is 3), the effect determining means 303 holds the first area of the hold state suggestion object. Change to. Subsequently, when the second ball enters the second starting port 12 (the actual special figure 2 hold is four), the effect determining means 303 changes the second area of the hold state suggestion object to the color with hold. .. Subsequently, when the third ball enters the second starting port 12 (the actual special figure 2 hold is the same as four), the effect determining means 303 holds the third area of the hold state suggestion object. Change to. Subsequently, when the fourth ball enters the second starting port 12 (the actual special figure 2 hold is the same as four), the effect determining means 303 holds the fourth area of the hold state suggestion object. Change to.

Further, the effect determining means 303 has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls entering the second starting port 12 from the state in which the hold state suggestion object is displayed in the above-mentioned predetermined mode (initial display mode). Then, the hold state suggestion object is displayed in a specific mode different from the above-mentioned predetermined mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the number of balls entered into the second starting port 12 after the transition to the easy entry state state is reached, the effect determining means 303 reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces) of the special drawing 2 hold. , The content indicated by the hold state suggestion object may be changed to a specific mode (for example, "ready") suggesting that the hold has reached the upper limit.

The hold state suggestion object not only suggests the number of holds, but also serves to promote right-handed strike by the arrow shape. Therefore, if the hold state suggestion object is displayed in a state indicating that the special figure 2 hold exists, it becomes difficult for the player to know how much more the ball should be put into the second start opening 12. Therefore, as an initial display mode of the hold state suggestion object, by displaying the hold state suggestion object in a predetermined mode regardless of the actual number of holds in the special figure 2, a game in which four new balls are inserted into the second starting port 12. It is easy to urge the player and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the lack of the special figure 2 hold (less than 4). Further, even when the special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit, the total number of outs can be increased and the base of the pachinko gaming machine 500 can be lowered by encouraging further launch of the game ball.

Next, the explanation notice of the feature 3 will be described.
The explanatory notice in the fifth embodiment is a notice production of the content that introduces the characters (that is, the characters) appearing in the production. FIG. 70 shows an example of an effect screen related to the explanatory effect. The effect screen 720 related to the explanatory effect includes a character image 722 and an introductory text 724 of the content for introducing the character. The explanatory notice in the fifth embodiment includes six characters and seven types of notices (hereinafter, also referred to as "individual notices") that introduce a group composed of those characters. The character image 722 and the introductory text 724 are different from each other in the seven types of individual notices. The sub-board 300 stores seven types of individual notice data in advance.

When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the effect determining means 303 turns on the predetermined explanation execution flag in the memory, and shifts to a state in which the explanation notice, which is a special effect, can be displayed. The above-mentioned start conditions in the fifth embodiment are (1) that the power is restored after the power is turned off, and (2) a game standby demo (a demo image when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not made for a predetermined time). Satisfied with any of the indications.

After the start condition is satisfied (that is, when the explanation execution flag is on), the effect determining means 303 predetermined seven types of individual notices over a plurality of symbol variations based on a specific variation pattern. Display in order. In the fifth embodiment, seven types of individual notices, specifically, character 1 description (ID = 1), character 2 description (ID = 2), ..., Character 6 description (ID = 6), group description. (ID = 7) is displayed in ascending order of ID.

The above-mentioned specific fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that deviates without developing into reach, and is out of the so-called non-shortening fluctuation that can secure a certain amount of production fluctuation scale (shortening that is easily selected when the number of holdings is 3 to 4). It is a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time is longer than the fluctuation deviation). After the above start condition is satisfied, the effect determining means 303 continuously gives seven types of individual notices together with the symbol variation due to the variation pattern each time the main substrate 200 selects a variation pattern that is out of the non-shortening variation. Display. That is, after the start condition is satisfied, the effect determining means 303 sequentially displays seven types of individual notices during the seven non-shortening fluctuation deviation display. Specifically, the character 1 explanation (ID = 1) is displayed when the first non-shortening fluctuation deviation pattern is selected, and the character 2 explanation (ID = 2) is displayed when the second non-shortening fluctuation deviation pattern is selected. Is displayed. The effect determining means 303 displays the group explanation (ID = 7) at the time of selecting the variation pattern of the non-shortening variation deviation for the seventh time, and ends the display of the series of explanation notices.

When the end condition of the explanation notice is satisfied, in the embodiment, when the final individual notice (group explanation (ID = 7)) is displayed, the effect determining means 303 is in the memory until the start condition is satisfied again. By turning off the explanation execution flag of, the explanation notice is not displayed. When the explanation execution flag is off, even if the main board 200 selects the fluctuation pattern out of the non-shortening fluctuation, the effect determining means 303 does not select the explanation notice. When the start condition is satisfied again, the effect determining means 303 shifts to the state in which the explanation notice can be displayed again by switching the explanation execution flag in the memory on again. As a result, basically, the explanation notice can be shown only once per player.

Further, the effect determining means 303 is at least a part of the effect after the transition to the state in which the explanation notice can be displayed, until the predetermined end condition of the explanation notice is satisfied, that is, while the explanation execution flag in the memory is on. Is not displayed. Some other effects for which display is prohibited include, for example, advance notice effects such as pre-reading notice (holding change, etc.). The variable effect of the decorative symbol 61 may be excluded from the display prohibition target. As a result, a plurality of individual notices can be presented to the player in a relatively short time, the player's understanding of the tie-up work or the like can be easily deepened, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the fifth embodiment, the explanation notice is displayed when the fluctuation pattern out of the non-shortening fluctuation is selected. Therefore, when the power is restored (for example, the game immediately after the opening of the game store) or when returning from the game standby demo (for example, when the player is changed), the explanation notice is not displayed (when the effect other than the explanation notice is displayed). Or, if another effect is displayed before the final individual notice is displayed, the situation is such that a result other than the non-shortening fluctuation deviation can be expected. As a result, it is possible to realize playability that makes the player expect a big hit, a small hit, a reach, etc. by not displaying the explanation notice that should be displayed originally. In other words, if there is a fluctuation in which the game explanation is not made during the execution of the explanation notice (that is, before the display of the last individual notice), it means that the fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern other than the non-shortened fluctuation deviation, and therefore the game knowledge. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation that the fluctuation is not out of the non-shortening fluctuation (that is, it may be an opportunity).

A modified example of the feature 3 will be described.
The first modification will be described. The effect determining means 303 does not display another notice until a predetermined end condition of the explanation notice is satisfied after the transition to the state in which the explanation notice can be displayed, but the effect display device 60 displays an image showing this situation. It may be displayed on the speaker 108, or a sound indicating this situation may be output from the speaker 108. For example, a message such as "Explanation notice is being implemented" or "Other notices are being suppressed because the explanation notice is being implemented" may be displayed on the effect display device 60.

A second modification will be described. Another start condition may be defined in place of the start condition of the above embodiment or in combination with the start condition of the above embodiment. Another starting condition may be the following three simple substances or any combination. (1) The symbol variation has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) from the big hit or the small hit. (2) The player was identified by the mobile cooperation system shown in FIG. 12, or the change of the player was detected. (3) Predetermined time information has been output from the timekeeping means 307. For example, it is detected that a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, or that a predetermined time (date and time) has been reached.

A third modification will be described. A plurality of types of explanatory notices may be provided, and the selection probabilities of the plurality of types of explanatory notices may be determined for each set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The production determination means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of explanation notices with a selection probability according to the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 500 as an explanation notice to be displayed when the start condition is satisfied this time. You may. The display order of the plurality of individual notices may be different from each other in the plurality of types of explanatory notices. Further, the plurality of types of explanatory notices may have at least one individual notice mode (contents of the character image 722, contents of the introductory text 724, size, display position, etc.) different from each other. As a result, the mode of the explanation notice can be utilized for setting suggestion.

As a fourth modification, a process when a big hit occurs in the middle of the explanation notice will be described. As the first pattern, after executing the jackpot game, the specific game by shortening the time or the probability fluctuation, and shifting to the normal state, the explanation notice may be restarted from the individual effect of the ID following the ID of the individual effect executed last time. For example, if a big hit occurs after executing individual notice A (ID = 1), individual notice B (ID = 2), and individual notice C (ID = 3), after returning to the normal state, individual notice D (ID = 4) ) May be executed.

As the second pattern, after executing the jackpot game, the specific game by shortening the time or the probability fluctuation, and shifting to the normal state, the explanation notice may be restarted from the ID of the individual effect executed last time. For example, if a big hit occurs after executing individual notice A (ID = 1), individual notice B (ID = 2), and individual notice C (ID = 3), after returning to the normal state, individual notice C (ID = 3) ) May be executed.

As a third pattern, after executing a big hit game, a specific game by shortening the time or a probability fluctuation, and shifting to the normal state, the explanation notice may be restarted from the ID of the first individual effect. For example, if a big hit occurs after executing individual notice A (ID = 1), individual notice B (ID = 2), and individual notice C (ID = 3), after returning to the normal state, individual notice A (ID = 1) ) May be executed.

As a fifth modification, processing in the case of power off due to an error will be described. After executing the explanation notice to the end, it may be necessary to turn off the power to clear the error that has occurred. In this case, it is desirable not to execute the explanation notice again after the power is restored. Therefore, when the power supply is cut off while the error occurrence is detected in the sub-board 300, the effect determining means 303 does not have to reset the ID of the individual notice that has been executed (for example, maintaining ID = 7). May be). On the other hand, when the power is cut off in the state where no error is detected, the ID of the individual notice that has been executed may be reset. As a result, it is possible to prevent the explanation notice from being presented to the same player again.

As a sixth modification, on / off selection of the explanation notice by the player will be described. The effect determining means 303 causes the player to execute the explanation notice (whether or not to continue) by displaying a message such as "Do you want to continue the explanation notice? YES / NO" on the effect display device 60 when the first individual notice is executed. ) May be selected. The effect determining means 303 may continue the explanation notice (display the next individual notice) or interrupt the explanation notice according to the operation of the player who specifies whether or not to continue the explanation notice. According to this modification, even if a game standby demo occurs due to the player temporarily leaving the pachinko gaming machine 500 and the explanation notice is restarted for the same player, the player's arbitrary selection The explanation notice can be turned off by.

Next, the technique of displaying a specific effect with a specific fluctuation in a specific period of the feature 4 will be described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, a special effect is displayed as a variable effect for the hold of the second lottery value (holding of special figure 2) acquired when the ball enters the second starting port 12. The period is fixed. The special effect includes a notice that a predetermined character (for example, character A) appears. The special effect period in the fifth embodiment is a variable period of four (maximum) holdings of special figure 2 triggered by the normal symbol hit in the normal time shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 71 shows the flow of the special effect in the first section of the special effect period. In the first section, regarding the special figure 2 hold caused by entering the ball into the second starting port 12 triggered by the normal symbol hit in the normal state, the state in which four special figure 2 holds are accumulated to the state in which two are accumulated. It is a fluctuation period of Special Figure 2 that starts between. In other words, the first section is a variable period corresponding to other than the final hold in the special figure 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 71 (the same applies to FIG. 72 described later), in the special effect during the special effect period, the winning notification is completed for each change.

The present notice of FIG. 71 is a content that prompts the player to operate the effect button 109. When the effect button 109 is pressed, the effect determination means 303 refers to the notice determination table for the first section of the special effect period, and any of the character A dialogue notice, the character A search notice, the memory notice, and the patrol lamp notice. Select to display. The notice determination table for the first section defines selection criteria for a plurality of production patterns for executing any of the character A dialogue notice, the character A search notice, the memory notice, and the patrol notice. For example, the notice determination table for the first section sets the selection probability of each of the effect pattern including the character A dialogue notice, the effect pattern including the character A search notice, and the effect pattern including the memory notice to 30%, while setting the patrol lamp notice. The selection probability of the including effect pattern may be set to 10%.

As shown in FIG. 71, when the character A dialogue notice, the character A search notice, and the memory notice are displayed, the process proceeds to the SP development notice (super reach) or the Gase (off image) after displaying the tempai fanning image. On the other hand, when the patrol lamp notice and the character A notice notice are displayed, the SP development notice or the Gase is directly advanced.

The patrol lamp notice is a notice that the character A with the patrol lamp placed on his head appears, and is a one-shot notification type notice in which a big hit or a small hit is confirmed when the patrol lamp lights up within the notice. The effect determining means 303 selects an effect pattern that proceeds to the SP development notice after the patrol lamp notice, including the patrol lamp notice that the patrol lamp lights up when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit. When the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is out of alignment (excluding small hits), the effect determining means 303 selects an effect pattern that includes a patrol lamp notice that does not turn on the patrol lamp and displays a ghost after the patrol lamp notice.

If the operation of the effect button 109 is not input to the present notice, the effect determination means 303 selects the effect pattern including the character A announcement notice with a predetermined probability. Like the Patramp notice, the character A notice notice is a one-shot notice type notice. For example, as a notice determination table for the first section, the selection probability of the production pattern when the button is not pressed during the present notice is the character A dialogue notice, the character A search notice, the memory notice, the patrol notice, and the character A notice. Notices may be drawn at 20% each. Each effect pattern executed for the present notice has different execution probabilities when the button is pressed and when the button is not pressed, and is determined as a result when the button is pressed during the effect lottery at the start of fluctuation or when the button is not pressed. obtain. In this embodiment, even if any of the character A dialogue notice, the character A search notice, the memory notice, the patrol notice, and the character A notice notice is executed, if the SP development notice is proceeded, the subsequent Kakurenbo reach or Kakurenbo mission The effect pattern is set to execute the notification regarding the possibility of a big hit or a small hit.

FIG. 72 shows the flow of the special effect in the second section of the special effect period. The second section is a variable period of special figure 2 in which one special figure 2 hold is started, in other words, a variable period corresponding to the final hold of special figure 2 hold accumulated by hitting a normal symbol. Is.

When the effect determining means 303 determines that the second section of the special effect period has been reached, the effect determining unit 303 refers to the advance notice determination table for the second section, which is a different effect determination standard from the advance notice determination table for the first section, and refers to the special effect. Determine the production pattern of. The notice determination table for the second section is configured so that the effect pattern for executing the patrol lamp notice is always selected. That is, in the notice determination table for the second section, the selection probability of the effect pattern for executing the patrol lamp notice is set to 100%.

The effect determining means 303 selects an effect pattern that proceeds to the SP development notice after the patrol lamp notice, including the patrol lamp notice that the patrol lamp lights up when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit. When the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is out of alignment (excluding small hits), the effect determining means 303 selects an effect pattern that includes a patrol lamp notice that does not turn on the patrol lamp and displays a ghost after the patrol lamp notice. In this way, by always displaying the one-shot notification type patrol lamp notice at the final change of the special figure 2 during the special production period, it is possible to provide a refreshing feeling at the time of hitting.

In this embodiment, the conditions for determining that the second section of the special production period has been reached, in other words, the conditions for using the advance notice determination table for the second section of the special production period are the following (1) and (2). Both are satisfied. (1) The number of remaining reservations of special figure 2 at the start of change of special figure 2 is 0, that is, it is the last change of special figure 2 hold. (2) The fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation that starts this time (1 before the fluctuation) is the special figure 2 fluctuation.

The effect determining means 303 may determine whether or not the condition (1) is satisfied by the hold information transmitted from the main board 200 or the fluctuation start command (in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the embodiment, the variation start command of this time is used. A group of commands including fluctuation pattern information for fluctuations and information on the number of pending numbers after the start of fluctuations is transmitted). Further, the effect determining means 303 stores one variation type of the special symbol of the variation target indicated by the symbol determination result included in the variation start command, and refers to the previously stored special symbol type at the next variation start. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the condition (2) is satisfied. When both the condition (1) and the condition (2) are satisfied, the effect determining means 303 determines that the second section of the special effect period has been reached, and at least one of the condition (1) and the condition (2) is satisfied. If this is not done, it is determined that the second section of the special effect period is not reached (that is, it is the first section).

Normally, when displaying a specific effect with the final change in the period for digesting the special figure 2 hold that has been temporarily accumulated, it is possible to carry out a patrol notice with the final change in the period for digesting the special figure 2 hold with only condition (1). Is. However, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is a specification that executes a special effect when the special figure 2 hold changes that occur when the long open hit of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is obtained in the normal state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 does not change in the process of accumulating the special figure 2 hold, or before the second special figure 2 hold occurs, the special figure 2 change due to the first special figure 2 hold occurs. There is a possibility that it will start, and if only condition (1) is met, there is a possibility that a patrol lamp notice will always appear due to the initial fluctuation of Special Figure 2 during the special production period. By providing the condition (2), even in such an irregular situation, the notice determination table for the second section is used in the initial change of the special figure 2 of the special production period in a form different from the design intention. Can be avoided.

In order to issue a specific notice with a specific variation in a specific effect period, a special variation pattern table used only during that effect period is provided, and as the main board 200 selects a special variation pattern ID, the effect determination means. It is also conceivable that the 303 selects a special effect pattern (for example, selection of a special variation pattern based on the variation pattern mode described in the second embodiment). However, when issuing a specific notice using a special variation pattern table in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the control of the variation pattern mode is often based on the acquisition of the number of fluctuations, big hits, and small hits, and the player does not intend the designer. When playing a game (for example, when the game is terminated without accumulating four holds at the end of the easy-to-enter state, four balls are placed at the second starting port when the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time. There may be a problem that the intended lottery is not performed at the timing intended by the designer depending on the number of reserved balls in the progress of the game, such as a deviation may occur when the ball is not entered. Therefore, as in the embodiment, the occurrence of the problem can be suppressed by determining whether the sub-board 300 is a specific variation in the effect period for which the special effect should be executed.

The merits of the configuration of the embodiment over the use of the above special variation pattern table will be reorganized. Feature 4 of this embodiment is a technical idea of performing a special effect only in the final change of the special figure 2 hold. Therefore, for example, if the special variation pattern table is used for the 4th variation after the long opening of the 2nd starting port 12 triggered by the normal symbol hit in the normal state, the special variation pattern table is normally used for the 4th variation of the special figure 2 hold. Can be produced. However, the trigger for switching to the special variation pattern table (variation pattern mode setting timing) is limited to the control timing related to the special symbol such as the number of games, the big hit, and the small hit. Therefore, in order to use the special variation pattern table to perform a special effect at the expected timing, the special figure 2 hold is the maximum state as the designer intended for the time-saving game (easy entry state) after the big hit. It is premised that it will be completed and that 4 special figure 2 holds will be accumulated when hitting a normal symbol. However, due to troubles such as the game ball not being fired, or the player's intentional game operation, a situation may occur in which only three or less special figure 2 reservations are stored. In such a situation, since the fourth fluctuation is no longer held in the special figure 2, for example, the special fluctuation pattern table is used at the time of the normal fluctuation of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation pattern for giving the patrol lamp notice is selected. There will be a gap such as In the embodiment, the sub-board 300 determines the display timing of the special effect, so that the sub-board 300 gives a specific notice with a specific variation in a specific effect period as the designer intends, without depending on the number of reserved items. be able to.

A modified example of the feature 4 will be described.
The first modification will be described. In the fifth embodiment, a situation is illustrated in which a patrol lamp notice, which is a specific notice, is displayed in the final change of the special figure 2 in the normal state (the change of the special figure 2 in which the hold of the special figure 2 becomes 0). The technique described in the examples, that is, the technique of issuing a specific notice with a specific fluctuation of a specific production period, can be applied to other situations.

For example, the technique described in the fifth embodiment can be applied to display a specific notice in the following situations (A) to (C). (A) The final change of the special figure 2 hold that remains after the end of the easy entry state (after the main game shifts to the change of the special figure 1). (B) Easy entry state The first special figure 2 fluctuation at the time of entry. (C) In parallel specifications (specs in which special figures 1 and 2 fluctuate in parallel, for example, a gaming machine equipped with a small hit rush), the special figure is changed from the effect mode in which the fluctuation of special figure 2 is mainly displayed. The final variation of special figure 2 after shifting to the effect mode that mainly displays the variation of 1.

When displaying a specific notice in the situation (A) or (C) above, for example, a special production lottery table in which the selection probability of the specific notice is 100% (corresponding to the notice determination table for the second section of the embodiment). ) May be used.

In the case of (A) above, the conditions for using the special production lottery table are as follows: (1) The number of special figures 2 held at the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 is 0, and (2) the start this time. It is also possible that both the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation (1 fluctuation before) and the special figure 2 fluctuation are satisfied. In the case of the above (B), for example, it is intended to obtain a big hit from the normal game state and to make a special effect appear in the initial fluctuation when the easy entry state is started, and the condition (2). The present invention is different from the embodiment in that one change before the change is the case where the change is the special figure 1. Then, in the situation where the pachinko game machine adopts the parallel game as described in (C) above, there is a possibility that the fluctuation display before one fluctuation on the main board 200 may be the special figure 1, so the sub board 300 (production decision). The means 303) displays the variation of the special symbol as the subject of the effect (even when the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating in parallel after the time reduction is lost, the variation of the special figure 2 is displayed as the subject of the effect. You may memorize the type of special figure for which the variation effect was performed immediately before.

The cases where the conditions (1) and (2) are different are sorted out. When displaying a specific notice in the situation (B), the conditions for using the special effect lottery table may satisfy both the following (1) and (2). That is, (1) the remaining number of reserved figures in special figure 2 at the start of change in special figure 2 is 0 (similar to the embodiment), and (2) the change immediately before the change to start this time (before 1 change) is special. Fig. 1 Fluctuation (different from the embodiment). When displaying a specific notice in the situation (C), the conditions for using the special effect lottery table may satisfy both (1) and (2) below. That is, (1) the remaining number of reserved figures in special figure 2 at the start of change in special figure 2 is 0 (similar to the embodiment), and (2) the change displayed independently as a change effect immediately before the change starting this time. (1 The decorative pattern variation display before the variation) is the special figure 2 variation (different from the embodiment).

A second modification will be described. In the above embodiment, as the second condition for using the notice determination table for the second section, it is determined that the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation starting this time (before one fluctuation) is the special figure 2 fluctuation. As a modification, the second condition (condition 2'-1) may be that the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. Condition 2'-1 may be that the opening end command of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is received from the main board 200. With this configuration, the use of the notice determination table for the second section is restricted during the period when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is open, that is, the period during which the hold according to the special figure 2 can be obtained. Even if the special figure 2 starts to change to 0 in the number of holds while the hold is being accumulated, the initial change during the period in which the player can accumulate the hold related to the special figure 2 It is possible to prevent the patrol lamp notice from being decided.

The second condition is that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation immediately before (Condition 2'-2) is the fluctuation pattern ID that can execute the chance effect (the variation pattern ID that can be selected during the special effect period, and is shown in FIG. Can only be selected). When the condition 2'-2 is applied, the effect determining means 303 may store a list of variation pattern IDs that can be selected during the special effect period.

Further, the second condition may be that the fluctuation immediately before (Condition 2'-3) is the fluctuation shown in FIG. 2 and is the fluctuation in the normal state (non-ball entry easy state). When the condition 2'-3 is applied, the effect determining means 303 uses a pattern (ID) in which the variation effect pattern selected by the variation pattern received from the main board 200 is selected by the special figure 2 variation in the normal state. In some cases, it may be determined that condition 2'-3 is satisfied. By doing so, for example, when there is only one hold of the special figure 2 at the time of the final change of the easy-to-enter ball state, the first pattern is not limited to one pattern as the change effect of the remaining hold. By using the advance notice determination table for the section, it is possible to achieve the designer's intention to configure so that a plurality of patterns can be displayed.

Further, the second condition may be that the change immediately before (Condition 2'-4) is a special figure change that is not subject to priority digestion (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the special figure 1 change). Condition 2'-4 is particularly suitable for realizing a specific notice display at the first variation of the special effect period (special figure 2 variation). For example, in a so-called two-kind mixed type gaming machine provided with three types of termination conditions for the easy entry state: the number of fluctuations in special figure 1, the number of fluctuations in special figure 2, and the number of fluctuations in special figure 1 + special figure 2. It is suitable when the main board 200 displays the special effect at the special effect period or the entrance (first variation) in the easy-to-enter state without referring to the special variation pattern table.

A third modification will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, if there is no special figure 1 hold after 4 fluctuation digestion of the special figure 2 hold after the end of the easy entry state, and if it occurs per long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in that situation, the special figure 2 The initial variation on hold may meet both conditions (1) and (2) described in the Examples. In order to avoid this, as a modification of the condition (2), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation immediately before the condition (2'-5) satisfies the fluctuation pattern ID capable of executing the special effect. (For example, it may be determined that the variation pattern mode is not the special figure 2 variation pattern that can be selected other than the variation pattern mode “7” in the second embodiment). Further, it may be determined based on the result of the variation effect pattern of the decorative pattern determined by the effect lottery on the sub-board 300 side based on the variation pattern (determined by the main board 200), and the variation that can execute the special effect. The effect pattern ID develops into SP reach after executing the variable effect pattern ID associated with the effect pattern including the mode that does not develop into SP reach by executing the character A dialogue notice, etc., and executing the character A search notice, etc. It may be a variable effect pattern ID associated with the effect pattern including the aspect.

A fourth modification will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the fifth embodiment, in the notice lottery of the second section, the result of the present notice is always the pachinko notice (selection rate 100%), but the pachinko probability is high frequency (for example, 90%). While being configured to be selected with, other notices (character A dialogue notice, etc.) may be configured to be selectable. In other words, such a modification is configured so that the notice (character A dialogue notice, etc.) that has been decided with high probability in the notice decision table of the first section is difficult to be decided in the notice decision table of the second section. It can be said that.

Further, as a condition that a notice other than the patrol lamp notice appears in the notice lottery of the second section, the fluctuation pattern selected on the main board 200 is the fluctuation pattern selected in the special production period, and the execution of the SP reach production is performed. It may be limited to the case where the fluctuation pattern has a possible fluctuation time. With this configuration, in the second section, a plurality of types of advance notice lottery may be executed on the condition of the main fluctuation pattern. In addition, when configured in this way, it occurs frequently in a specific fluctuation that is the second section (in this embodiment, it is the final fluctuation of the special effect period, and in the modified example, it is the initial fluctuation of the easy-to-enter state). When a notice other than the specific notice (patrol lamp notice) to be obtained appears, it is also possible to definitively notify that the fluctuation has a high degree of expectation (a fluctuation accompanied by the development of SP reach).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 and the modified example of the fifth embodiment, the final variation and the initial variation of the special production period are set as the second section, but in the third section continuous with the second section and the like, The effect determination may be performed using the effect determination table for the third section (which may be the same as the effect determination table for the second section). For example, by configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the fluctuation one time before the final fluctuation of the special production period and the final fluctuation so that the same type of notice appears continuously at high frequency, and in some cases. , The production may be performed so as to raise the sense of expectation by expressing the same type of notice as stepping up over a plurality of fluctuations.

The present invention has been described above based on the fifth embodiment. Fifth embodiment is an example, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications are possible for each component and combination of each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.

(6th Example)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment is based on the ball gaming machine described in any one of the first to fifth embodiments. As the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, the configuration described above in relation to FIG. 41 or FIG. 49 is applied. Further, as the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, the configuration described above in relation to FIG. 2 is applied. Further, as the functional configuration of the main board 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment and the functional configuration of the sub-board 300, the configurations described above in relation to FIGS. 3, 4, and 11 are applied. In the following, the features of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the other embodiments, and the description of the common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technology and the first to fifth embodiments are described with the same reference numerals. To do.

FIG. 73 shows the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment. The time saving in the figure and the following explanation includes the so-called electric chew support, and can be said to be in an easy-to-enter state. The normal mode corresponds to the normal time shown in FIG. 40. The normal mode is a game state in which a normal game in a normal state is executed, and a left-handed hit is aimed at the symbol jackpot of Special Figure 1 (it can be said that it is the first hit, and the jackpot probability is 1/319). The normal mode includes a plurality of production stages (stages A to D) having different production themes, backgrounds, characters, stories, etc., and the production stages are switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

If a normal jackpot with 61 decorative symbols other than 7 is won in the normal mode (distribution probability is 70%), the game shifts to the chance mode after executing the special game. The chance mode corresponds to the chance production shown in FIG. 40. In the chance mode, a small hit V is acquired (the small hit probability of special figure 2 is 1 / 7.7) in a total of 5 fluctuations of 1 time reduction and 4 remaining holds (typically 4 special figures 2 hold). ) Is in a gaming state. In the chance mode, chance effects including battle effects are displayed.

If you win a special big hit with 7 decorative symbols 61 in the normal mode (distribution probability 30%), or if you get a small hit V in the chance mode (acquisition probability 50%), go to the rush mode after executing the special game. Transition. The rush mode corresponds to the rush effect shown in FIG. 40. The rush mode is a gaming state in which the player aims to acquire a small hit V in 13 fluctuations of 13 times in a short time. In rush mode, rush effects including mission effects are displayed. The probability of winning a 1 / 7.7 small hit with 13 rotations in rush mode is about 84%, and if you can properly enter the attacker at the time of small hit winning, it is certain that you will win a V prize. The small hit V acquisition probability in the rush mode is about 84%, and the rush mode, the special game, and the rush mode are repeated with a probability of about 84%.

If the small hit V cannot be obtained within the 13 fluctuations in the rush mode (the probability that the small hit of 1 / 7.7 is never won in 13 rotations is about 16%), the mode shifts to the chance mode. The chance mode is a gaming state in which a small hit V is acquired in 5 fluctuations consisting of 1 rotation in a short time and the remaining 4 holds. If the small hit V cannot be obtained within 5 fluctuations in the chance mode (the probability of winning a small hit of 1 / 7.7 in 5 rotations is about 50%), the mode shifts to the immediate stop prevention mode. The immediate stop prevention mode is a normal game in a normal state, and is a game state in which a left-handed hit is aimed at the symbol jackpot of Special Figure 1 (the jackpot probability is 1/319). In the immediate stop prevention mode, in order to prevent the game from ending immediately after the chance mode ends, an effect for immediate stop prevention is displayed, which is different from the normal mode. If a big hit cannot be obtained within 30 fluctuations in the immediate stop prevention mode, the mode returns to the normal mode. In this immediate stop prevention mode, not only is a dedicated effect displayed, but by increasing the added value, for example, by increasing the probability of occurrence of a premier effect (an effect that ensures winning by appearance) than in normal times. It is possible to create a situation where it is difficult for the player to leave the seat.

As the first feature of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, the hold change effect will be described. Currently, a wide variety of hold change effects are realized as hold change effects in which the hold image changes. In such a situation, it is desired to create a more innovative pending change production. The first feature of the hold change effect is to realize a novel hold change effect.

The effect determining means 303 includes an icon image (also referred to as “the change object”) corresponding to one lottery value of the symbol change (also referred to as “the change”) being executed, and special figure 1 hold or special figure 2. The effect display device 60 displays the icon images corresponding to the four pending objects. The icon images corresponding to the four reserved figures in Special Figure 2 are also called "Ho 1 object", "Ho 2 object", "Ho 3 object", and "Ho 4 object" in order of change, and these are collectively referred to. Also called a "pending object". In the normal mode and the immediate stop prevention mode of FIG. 73, the hold object may correspond to the special figure 1 hold. On the other hand, in the chance mode and the rush mode, the hold object may correspond to the special figure 2 hold. It should be noted that the variable object and the protection 1 object to the protection 4 object can be collectively regarded as a hold object.

The hold change effect is a look-ahead notice that changes the display mode of at least one of the change object and the plurality of hold objects. The effect determining means 303 corresponds to the lottery value according to the preliminary determination information notified from the main board 200 regarding the lottery value (for example, the first lottery value of the special figure 1 in the normal mode) that is the target of the hold change effect. It is possible to execute a hold change effect related to the change object or the hold object. In the hold change effect, for example, the appearance (for example, color) of the variable object or the hold object is changed from a mode in which the expectation of hit is relatively low to a mode in which the expectation of hit is relatively high. In other words, it makes a change in the upstart.

In the embodiment, the colors of the variable object or the pending object are gold, red, green, blue, and default (white) in order from the one with the highest expectation of winning. When the lottery value targeted for the hold change effect is a hit, the effect determination means 303 changes the variable object or the hold object corresponding to the lottery value to gold or red with a higher probability than when the lottery value is out of order. Decide to let. If the color of the variable object or the reserved object is gold, it is determined that the winning is confirmed. That is, if the lottery value targeted for the pending change effect is out of the lottery value, the effect determining means 303 corresponds to the lottery value. Does not change the variable or pending object to gold.

The effect determining means 303 can execute a lightning strike hold change effect, a seven-star hold change effect, a dead end magic hold change effect, and a character hold change effect as a plurality of types of hold change effects. FIG. 74 shows an example of a lightning strike hold change effect. The lightning strike hold change effect is the variable object 730 and the hold object 732 (hold 1 object 732a, hold 2 object 732b, hold 3 object 732c) corresponding to a certain lottery value (for example, the first lottery value of special figure 1 in the normal mode). , Including the 4 object 732d) is a production that changes in a manner that can be completed in one time. In the lightning strike hold change effect shown in FIG. 74, an object (lightning bolt 734) indicating a lightning bolt is dropped with respect to the lightning strike object 732a to be changed, and the color of the lightning strike object 732a is changed at that timing.

FIG. 75 shows the executable timing of the hold change effect. In the figure, the lightning strike hold change effect, the seven star hold change effect, the end demon hold change effect, and the character hold change effect are arranged vertically, and multiple sections that make up the symbol change effect are arranged side by side, and the execution timing of each hold change effect. Is indicated by "○". The "winning & look-ahead" in the figure is when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 (in other words, when the first lottery value or the second lottery value occurs) and when the ball is moved on hold (previous). The timing at which the hold is digested and the hold object 732 moves). The "first variation start" is the start of the symbol variation, and is the start of the pseudo first variation in the pseudo continuous variation effect. "During the first fluctuation" is in the middle of the pseudo first fluctuation in the pseudo continuous fluctuation production.

The "second variation start" is the start of the pseudo second variation in the pseudo continuous variation effect. "During the second fluctuation" is in the middle of the pseudo second fluctuation in the pseudo continuous fluctuation production. The "third variation start" is the start of the pseudo third variation in the pseudo continuous variation effect. "During the third fluctuation" is in the middle of the pseudo third fluctuation in the pseudo continuous fluctuation production. The "second half development time" is the timing at the time of development or after the development when the symbol variation effect develops into a state where the expectation of hitting is high (super reach, etc.).

When the effect determining means 303 enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, whether the first lottery value or the second lottery value acquired in connection with the ball entry is the target of the lightning strike hold change effect. Whether or not it is decided by lottery. In other words, it is determined with a predetermined probability that the lottery value acquired by entering the ball will be the target of the lightning strike hold change effect. When a certain lottery value is determined as the target of the lightning strike hold change effect, the effect determination means 303 determines one or more execution timings of the lightning strike hold change effect by lottery. As shown in FIG. 75, the lightning strike hold change effect can be executed both before the start of the symbol change and after the start of the symbol change based on the lottery value of the effect target (hereinafter, also referred to as “target lottery value”), and further. It can also be executed during the development of the production (during the latter half of the development).

Further, it is possible to execute the lightning strike hold change effect a plurality of times for the hold object 732 and the change object 730 corresponding to the same target lottery value. For example, the effect determining means 303 changes the reserved object 732 corresponding to one target lottery value (for example, from white to blue), and then changes the variable object 730 corresponding to the same target lottery value (for example, from blue to red). You can decide to let it.

FIG. 76 shows an example of the seven-star hold change effect. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the seven-star hold change effect, when the ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, the hold object 732 corresponding to the lottery value acquired by the entry is displayed. Then, the object (Seven Stars 736) indicating the Big Dipper is further displayed on the reserved object 732. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the seven stars 736, one or a plurality of seven stars are lit during the hold movement.

Seven stars Hold change If all the stars of the seven stars 736 are lit by the start of the symbol change based on the lottery value of the production target, in other words, by the time the hold object 732 changes to the change object 730 (Fig. 76 (c)), the seven stars The 736 disappears and the hold object 732 (or the variable object 730) changes to red hold or higher (red hold or gold hold) (FIG. 76 (d)). This is also called success. On the other hand, if at least one star of the seven stars 736 does not light up by the start of the symbol change, the seven stars 736 disappears and the reserved object 732 does not change as the default (it becomes a ghost effect). This is also called failure.

When the effect determining means 303 enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, whether the first lottery value or the second lottery value acquired in connection with the ball entry is the target of the seven-star hold change effect. Whether or not it is decided by lottery. When a certain lottery value is determined as the target of the seven-star hold change effect, the effect determination means 303 determines by lottery whether to succeed or fail the seven-star hold change effect, and also determines the lighting mode (number of lights and the number of lights) of the seven-star hold change effect. Lighting timing) is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 75, the hold change timing (including the initial display) in the seven-star hold change effect is at the time of winning, at the time of hold movement, and at the start of the first change.

FIG. 77 shows an example of the end-of-life demon hold change effect. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), in the end-of-life hold change effect, when the ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, the hold object 732 corresponding to the lottery value acquired by the entry is usually set. It is displayed in the first stage mode different from the above. In other words, in the ending magic hold change effect, the hold object 732 corresponding to the lottery value is displayed in the above-mentioned first stage mode before the symbol change based on the lottery value to be produced is started. In FIG. 77 (a), as the first stage aspect, the hold object 732 showing the enemy character in the dead end state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 77 (b), in the end-of-life hold change effect, the hold object 732 indicating the enemy character bursts after the start of the symbol change based on the lottery value of the effect target, and in a second stage mode different from the usual mode. It changes to the variable object 730 showing a certain line (for example, the character string "chance"). The second aspect may include a plurality of lines with different expectations of suggestion. In the end-of-life magic hold change effect of the embodiment, the hold object 732 that indicates the enemy character does not burst before the start of the symbol change based on the lottery value of the effect target, but as a modification, the enemy character is shown before the start of the symbol change. The hold object 732 may burst and change to a hold object 732 showing dialogue.

When the effect determining means 303 enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, whether the first lottery value or the second lottery value acquired in connection with the ball entry is the target of the end-of-life hold change effect. Whether or not it is decided by lottery. When a certain lottery value is determined as the target of the end-of-life hold change effect, the effect determining means 303 determines the content of the dialogue and the timing of change to the variable object 730 indicating the dialogue by lottery. As shown in FIG. 75, the display timing of the hold object 732 indicating the enemy character is at the time of winning (when the hold object 732 is initially displayed). Further, the change timing to the change object 730 indicating the dialogue is any of the first change start to the third change.

The character hold change effect will be described. In the character hold change effect, when the ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, the hold object 732 (which may be in the normal mode) corresponding to the lottery value acquired by the entry is displayed, and the hold is held. A character image is further displayed near (or overlaid) the object 732. A weapon image or the like may be used instead of the character image. During the hold movement, the character image continues to stay in the vicinity of the hold object 732. Then, after the symbol variation starts, the character image acts to form the variable object 730 (for example, the color is changed to a color with a higher expectation of hitting).

When the effect determining means 303 enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, whether the first lottery value or the second lottery value acquired in connection with the ball entry is the target of the character hold change effect. Whether or not it is decided by lottery. When a certain lottery value is determined as the target of the character hold change effect, the effect determination means 303 determines the timing of the action of the character image (in other words, the change timing of the variable object 730) and the change mode of the variable object 730 (what). Whether to change to a color) is decided by lottery. As shown in FIG. 75, the display timing of the character image is at the time of winning (at the time of initial display of the reserved object 732). Further, the timing of the action of the character image (in other words, the change timing of the variable object 730) is any of the first variation start to the third variation.

FIG. 78 is a timing chart of the pending change effect. Here, the lottery value that is the target of the pending change effect is called the target lottery value. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the effect determining means 303 uses the variable object 730 (or the pending object 732) corresponding to the target lottery value by the end-of-life hold change effect in a second stage mode (for example, a dialogue “chance”). Even after the change to, the lightning strike hold change effect can be executed for the change object 730 (or hold object 732). In other words, the effect determining means 303 changes the variable object 730 (or the pending object 732) corresponding to the target lottery value to the second stage mode by the end magic hold change effect, but the variable object 730 (or the variable object 730) The pattern of the hold change effect can be determined so as to execute the lightning hold change effect for the hold object 732).

For example, the effect determining means 303 changes the character color and the background color of the variable object 730 (or the hold object 732) indicating "chance" to a color with a higher expectation of hitting after the development of the latter half effect. May be good (eg change from blue to red). In addition, the ending magic hold change effect in FIG. 78A may be replaced with the seven-star hold change effect, or may be replaced with the character hold change effect. According to this configuration, even after one hold change effect is performed, the player's expectation that the other hold change effect is performed can be continued, and the interest of the effect can be further enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), after the effect determining means 303 executes the lightning strike hold change effect on the hold object 732 corresponding to the target lottery value, the end-of-life hold change effect on the hold object 732 is displayed. On the other hand, the second lightning strike hold change effect on the hold object 732 (or the change object 730 after the hold movement) can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the effect determining means 303 changes the hold object 732 to the first stage by executing the end-of-life hold change effect with respect to the hold object 732 corresponding to the target lottery value. Before the second stage mode is set, the lightning strike hold change effect for the hold object 732 is not executed. On the other hand, in the effect determining means 303, the hold object 732 (or the change object 730 after the hold movement) becomes the second stage mode by executing the end magic hold change effect with respect to the hold object 732 corresponding to the target lottery value. After that, the lightning strike hold change effect for the hold object 732 (or the change object 730 after the hold movement) can be executed.

The ending magic hold change effect in FIGS. 78 (b) and 78 (c) may be replaced with the seven-star hold change effect, or may be replaced with the character hold change effect. According to this configuration, even after one hold change effect is performed, the player's expectation that the other hold change effect is performed can be continued, and the interest of the effect can be further enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing confusion for the player due to a discrepancy in the transition of changes in the hold object 732 (or the change object 730 after the hold movement).

FIG. 79 shows a lottery route for the pending change effect. First, the effect determining means 303 determines the type of look-ahead effect by a parent lottery. When the hold change effect is determined in the parent lottery, the child lottery for determining the type of the hold change effect and the change mode before the start of the change is executed using the child lottery table (FIG. 80) described later. Then, the grandchild lottery for determining the change mode in the fluctuation is executed by using the grandchild lottery table corresponding to the result of the child lottery from the plurality of grandchild lottery tables (FIGS. 81 to 90B) described later.

In the actual child lottery table and grandchild lottery table, the main fluctuation pattern (for example, the symbol fluctuation pattern determined by the main board 200) or the sub fluctuation pattern subdivided according to the main fluctuation pattern (for example, the sub board). A number is assigned to each change pattern in order to select one from a plurality of effect patterns (hereinafter, also referred to as "change patterns") according to the variation effect pattern determined by 300). However, in the figure of the child lottery table and the figure of the grandchild lottery table below, for convenience, the total number of places for each change pattern selected in the lottery "when it wins" and "when it loses" Is posted. These numbers indicate which change patterns are likely to be selected at what rate, although the percentages that are actually selected for each main or sub fluctuation pattern are different in the case of hits and misses. It is a thing. Although not shown, in the parent lottery as well, the ratio of which effect pattern is selected is different for each main or sub fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 80 shows an example of a child lottery table. Each record (called a change pattern) of the child lottery table is changed according to (1) the mode of change at the time of winning the 4th prize (at the time of the 4th special figure 1 hold or the occurrence of the special figure 2 hold), (2) at the time of the 3rd prize. Change mode when moving from Ho 4 to Ho 3, (3) Change mode when moving from Ho 2 to Ho 3 or from Ho 3 to Ho 2, (4) When moving from Ho 1 to Ho 1 or from Ho 2 to Ho 1. Determine how time changes. Further, as described above, in FIG. 80, in the child lottery table, each change pattern is selected at the time of hit (design big hit or small hit) and at the time of off (when neither symbol big hit nor small hit). Shows the percentage selected. That is, it shows the feasibility of each change pattern. In the child lottery of the embodiment, a specific change pattern is selected from a plurality of change patterns including a plurality of types of pending change effects in one lottery. As a modification, in the child lottery, a specific change pattern is selected from a plurality of change patterns corresponding to the first stage lottery for determining the type of pending change effect and the type determined in the first stage lottery. A stage lottery may be included.

FIG. 81 shows an example of a grandchild lottery table. The grandchild lottery table in this figure is when the change pattern selected in the child lottery is a change pattern in which the change mode when winning the Ho 1 or moving from Ho 2 to Ho 1 is "Death Demon Hold_Billibirizako". , Used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the change. That is, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the change of the hold when the hold object 732 of the hold 1 becomes the "end-of-life hold biribiri zako". Each record (called a change pattern) of the grandchild lottery table has (1) first change start to change mode during change, (2) second change start to change mode during change, and (3) third change start. -Define the mode of change during fluctuations and (4) the mode of change during the latter half of development. Further, as described above, in FIG. 81, in the grandchild lottery table, each change pattern is selected at the time of hit (design big hit or small hit) and at the time of off (when neither symbol big hit nor small hit). Shows the percentage to be selected. That is, it shows the feasibility of each change pattern.

FIG. 82 also shows an example of a grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery changes when the Ho 1 is won or when the Ho 2 moves to Ho 1 (that is, in the character hold change). When it is a change pattern (with a character of the default color added), it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the change. That is, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the change of the hold object 732 of the hold 1 when the hold object 732 becomes "mini character hold_default". FIG. 83 also shows an example of a grandchild lottery table. The grandchild lottery table in this figure starts the change when the change pattern selected in the child lottery is a change pattern in which "mini character hold_blue" (that is, a blue character is added in the character hold change). Used in the grandchildren lottery of the time. That is, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the change of the hold object 732 of the hold 1 when the hold object 732 becomes "mini character hold_blue".

FIG. 84 also shows an example of a grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "mini character hold_green" when winning the Ho 1 or moving from Ho 2 to Ho 1 (that is, in the character hold change). When it is a change pattern (with a green character added), it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the change. That is, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the change of the hold object 732 of the hold 1 when the hold object 732 becomes "mini character hold_green". FIG. 85 also shows an example of a grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "mini character hold_red" when winning the Ho 1 or moving from Ho 2 to Ho 1 (that is, in the character hold change). When it is a change pattern (with a red character added), it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the change. That is, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the change of the hold object 732 of the hold 1 when the hold object 732 becomes "mini character hold_red".

FIG. 86 also shows an example of a grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "blue" when the Ho 1 is won or when the Ho 2 is moved to the Ho 1 (that is, via the lightning strike hold change). It is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the change when it is a change pattern (the blue object 1 732a is displayed). That is, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the change of the hold object 732 of the hold 1 when it becomes “blue”. FIG. 87 also shows an example of a grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery becomes "green" when the child lottery wins or moves from the child 2 to the child 1 (that is, via the lightning strike hold change). It is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the change when it is a change pattern (where the green protection 1 object 732a is displayed). That is, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the change of the hold object 732 of the hold 1 when it becomes “green”.

FIG. 88 also shows an example of a grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "red" or "seven star hold _7 lighting → red hold" when winning a prize in Ho 1 or moving from Ho 2 to Ho 1. (That is, the red holding object 732a is displayed via the lightning strike hold change or the seven star hold change), it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the change. That is, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the change of the hold object 732 of the hold 1 when it becomes “red”. FIG. 89 also shows an example of a grandchild lottery table. In the grandchild lottery table in this figure, the change pattern selected in the child lottery is "gold" or "seven star hold _7 lighting → gold hold" when the child lottery wins or moves from the second to the first. (That is, the golden hold 1 object 732a is displayed via the lightning strike hold change or the seven star hold change), it is used in the grandchild lottery at the start of the change. That is, the grandchild lottery table determines the change pattern during the change of the hold object 732 of the hold 1 when it becomes "gold".

90A and 90B also show an example of a grandchild lottery table. The grandchild lottery table in these figures is used for the effect lottery at the time of the change when the hold change effect is not won in the parent lottery, in other words, when the hold change effect for the hold object 732 is not executed. That is, the grandchild lottery table in these figures defines the change pattern for the variable object 730 in the default mode.

A modified example of the pending change effect of the above feature 1 will be described.
As a first modification, the ending magic hold change effect and the character hold change effect may be restricted so as not to occur at the same time. In this case, the effect determining means 303 may decide not to execute the character hold change effect when it decides to execute the end magic hold change effect. Further, when the effect determining means 303 decides to execute the character hold change effect, it may decide not to execute the character hold change effect. This is because both the ending magic hold change effect and the character hold change effect are effects that display the character related to the hold object 732, and if they occur at the same time, the player may be confused. For example, as shown in the child lottery table of FIG. 80, the element of the end magic hold change effect is excluded from the change pattern including the character hold change effect, and the element of the character hold change effect is excluded from the change pattern including the end magic hold change effect. May be done. In addition, the element of the end-of-life hold change effect may be excluded from each change pattern of the grandchild lottery table for the character hold change effect of FIGS. 82 to 85. In addition, the element of the ending magic hold change effect may be excluded from each change pattern of the grandchild lottery table of the ending magic hold change effect of FIG. 81.

A second modification will be described. Rather than making a second stage change (for example, a change to a dialogue "chance") due to the change due to the end-of-life hold change effect, a second stage change (change due to the character's action) due to the change due to the character hold change effect. If this is done, the expectation of winning may be relatively high. For example, let A be the probability that the hold change effect pattern that changes the second stage by the end magic hold change effect is selected in the case of a hit, and the hold change effect that changes the second stage by the character hold change effect in the case of a hit. When the probability that a pattern is selected is B, B may be set larger than A. Specifically, in the child lottery table of FIG. 80, the selection ratio at the time of hitting the change pattern that defines the character hold change effect (mini character) is higher than the selection ratio at the time of hitting the change pattern that defines the end magic hold change effect. May be set to be high.

In this modification, for example, it is configured so that the change of red hold or more is finally confirmed when passing through the ending magic hold change effect, and the line corresponding to the reliability equivalent to green hold on average when passing through the character hold change effect. It is preferable to configure it so that it changes to. As a result, regardless of which of the pending change effects is executed, the final changing hold icon can be expected to change to the same degree of hit expectation, while the executed hold change effect itself has a hit expectation. It is possible to make a difference in (end-of-life demon hold change effect <character hold change effect).

A third modification will be described. The seven-star hold change effect and the lightning strike hold change effect may have the same mode as the hold object 732 (or the change object 730) after the change. For example, it could be the same red hold. Here, even if the reserved object 732 (or the variable object 730) after the change has the same mode, even if it is configured so that the expected degree of hit is relatively higher when the object is changed through the seven-star hold change effect. Good. For example, let A be the probability that a hold change effect pattern that changes to red hold due to a lightning strike hold change effect is selected in the case of a hit, and a hold change effect pattern that changes to red hold due to a seven-star hold change effect is selected in the case of a hit. When the probability is B, B may be set larger than A. Specifically, in the child lottery table of FIG. 80, the seven-star hold change effect is selected from the selection ratio at the time of hitting the change pattern that defines the lightning strike hold change effect and finally changes to the red hold. It may be determined that the selection rate at the time of hitting the change pattern that is the specified change pattern and finally changes to the red hold may be higher. As a result, even if the icon changes to the same hold icon (for example, red hold), it is executed across fluctuations from the look-ahead timing rather than changing to red hold through a lightning strike hold change effect that momentarily changes the hold icon. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation because the effect time to be executed is longer when the player changes to the red hold after the seven-star hold change effect.

A fourth modification will be described. The effect determining means 303 may further execute another look-ahead notice (for example, a notice indicating the XX zone) different from the above-described four types of hold change effects. In this case, the change in the second stage of the seven-star hold change effect (all seven stars are lit and red hold or more) is performed when the other look-ahead notice is executed than when the other look-ahead notice is not executed. It may be configured to be more likely to be made. In addition, the hold object 732 or the hold object 732 or which the other look-ahead notice is executed has a higher expectation of hitting in the second stage change of the end-of-life hold change effect than when the other look-ahead notice is not executed. It may be configured so that it is more likely to change to the variable object 730 (for example, a line with high expectation). With this configuration, even if the same hold change effect (seven star hold change effect and end-of-life hold change effect in the fourth modification) is executed, if another look-ahead notice is executed, You can expect the success of the pending change effect during execution and the pending object after the change. In particular, rather than the hold change effect (lightning strike hold change effect in this embodiment) in which the hold change is instantaneously performed, the hold change effect (seven star hold change effect in this embodiment) is executed across the fluctuation from the look-ahead timing. , Ending Demon Hold Change Production, Character Hold Change Production).

In addition, the hold object 732 in which the other look-ahead notice is executed has a higher expectation of hitting in the second stage change of the character hold change effect than in the case where the other look-ahead notice is not executed. Alternatively, it may be configured to be more likely to change to the variable object 730 (eg, red hold or gold hold). In addition, the hold object 732 in which the other look-ahead notice is executed has a higher expectation of hitting in one hold change due to the lightning strike hold change effect than in the case where the other look-ahead notice is not executed. Alternatively, it may be configured to be more likely to change to the variable object 730 (eg, red hold or gold hold).

A fifth modification will be described. As mentioned above, the normal mode includes a plurality of types of production stages. The effect determining means 303 may display the hold object 732 and the variable object 730 in different modes (different shapes) for each effect stage. On the other hand, the effect determining means 303 may display the hold object 732 and the change object 730 of the same aspect regardless of the type of the effect stage as the hold object 732 and the change object 730 after the hold change effect. The reserved object 732 and the variable object 730 of the same aspect here may have the same shape and pattern, but may have different colors (that is, suggested expectations). In this way, the hold object for each effect stage adopts an object that matches the motif of the stage, while the hold object after the change after the hold change effect is executed adopts the same object for each stage. Even in the production stage of, it is possible to see at a glance the degree of expectation of hitting the pending object after the change.

A sixth modification will be described. As described above, the mode of the variable object 730 or the reserved object 732 (collectively, the “holding icon”) after the holding change effect may be different depending on the type of the holding change effect. For example, the hold icon after the change due to the character hold change effect is the one in which the color of the hold icon of the normal shape is changed, while the hold icon after the change due to the end-of-life hold change effect is a line (“chance”, etc.). You may.

A seventh modification will be described. Regarding the hold icon that is the target of the hold change effect, the stage of winning and pre-reading rather than changing to the change object 730 (red hold etc.) with high expectation at the time of the latter half development (after the development of super reach) after the start of the symbol change It may be configured so that the expectation of winning is higher when the object is changed to the hold object 732 having a higher expectation. In other words, when the probability of changing to the variable object 730 (red hold, etc.), which has a high expectation during the latter half of the symbol fluctuation, is changed to the hold object 732, which has a high expectation at the winning & look-ahead stage. It may be configured so that the probability of hitting is higher. A change pattern in which a lightning strike hold change effect is defined in the child lottery table of FIG. 80 will be described as an example. In the child lottery table of FIG. 80, the selection ratio at the time of hitting the change pattern that finally becomes red hold or more is 593, and the selection ratio at the time of losing is 260. On the other hand, the selection ratio at the time of hitting the change pattern (which can change more than red due to the fluctuation) that is finally held in blue or green is 22524, and the selection ratio at the time of losing is 21974. Therefore, the child lottery table of FIG. 80 is configured so that the expectation of winning is higher when the object is changed to the hold object 732, which has a higher expectation at the stage of winning and pre-reading.

Generally, it changes from the look-ahead timing rather than changing to the hold icon (red hold) with high expectation in the hold change effect (lightning strike hold change effect in this embodiment) in which the hold change is performed once. Expectations are high in the hold change effect (seven star hold change effect, end demon hold change effect, character hold change effect, or lightning strike hold change effect that is executed multiple times) that gradually changes to the hold icon over the timing. Changing to a higher hold icon (red hold) can maintain the expectation of the player. Therefore, for example, when a hold change effect in which the change to red hold is finally performed is executed. There is a higher possibility that a hold change effect that gradually changes to a hold icon from the look-ahead timing to the change timing is selected rather than a hold change effect in which the hold change is performed once. In other words, the frequency of changing to red hold in the hold change effect that gradually changes to the hold icon from the look-ahead timing to the change timing, rather than the frequency of changing to red hold in the hold change effect in which the hold change is performed once. Is higher, so it is easier to select whether it is a hit or a miss. In other words, the frequency of selection as an effect is higher than the hit expectation when the effect changes to red hold in the hold change effect that gradually changes to the hold icon from the look-ahead timing to the fluctuation timing. Is low, and the hold change is performed once. When the hold change effect occurs and the red hold is changed, the hit expectation is relatively higher. Similarly, in the hold change effect in which the hold change is performed once, there are more holds than when the hold changes to red hold at the timing when the hold is small (for example, the first hold icon or the variable icon). If the timing (for example, the fourth hold icon) changes to red hold, the hit expectation is relatively high.

The eighth modification will be described. As described above, the effect determining means 303 may be able to execute the first hold change effect and the second hold change effect. The first hold change effect occurs when the second stage change occurs after the first stage hold change (for example, the hold object 732 is accompanied by the seven stars 736) occurs at the stage of entering the ball and pre-reading. It includes both cases where it does not. In the second hold change effect, after the first stage hold change (for example, the character image is attached to the hold object 732), the second stage change (for example, the action of the character image and the color of the hold object 732) is always performed. Change) occurs. The seven-star hold change effect of the above embodiment corresponds to the first hold change effect. In addition, the ending magic hold change effect and the character hold change effect of the above embodiment correspond to the second hold change effect.

As a second feature of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, an over-winning effect including a chance-up effect will be described. When a ball is clogged on the game board due to an unforeseen situation, the original flow path of the game ball is blocked, which may cause the player to feel unpleasant. The main purpose of the over-winning effect of the second feature is to realize a suitable effect corresponding to the situation where the ball is jammed on the game board. The over-winning effect of this embodiment is based on the same technical idea as the effect for over-winning described in feature 2 of the second embodiment. However, the production of the second embodiment is intended for the over-winning of the large winning opening 20, but the over-winning production of this embodiment is the over-winning of the second starting port 12 (so-called electric chew) in the easy-to-enter state. Is targeted.

The effect determining means 303 displays an over-winning effect, which is a pre-reading notice suggesting the degree of expectation that a hit exists in the reserved lottery value, according to the preliminary determination information. FIG. 91 shows an example of an over-winning effect. The effect determining means 303 hits the fluctuation or a maximum of four special figure 2 hold (typically) in the chance mode in the easy-to-enter state (number of fluctuations of 1) with reference to the preliminary determination information of the special figure 2 hold. A character image (character 738) showing the degree of expectation that a small hit) exists is displayed.

The effect determining means 303 displays one of a plurality of types of characters 738 having different expectations of winning according to the prior determination information regarding the holding of the special figure 2. The multiple types of characters 738 are, in order from the one with the lowest expectation of hitting, the army of Hokuto, the thug of Nanto, the legend of the savior, the big boss, and the villainous alliance. The effect determining means 303 follows a predetermined standard (in the embodiment, an over-winning effect determination table described later), and as the number of balls entered into the second starting port 12 in the chance mode easy-to-enter state increases, A chance-up effect of changing the aspect of the character 738 so as to show a higher degree of expectation is executed. In the chance-up production of the example, the character 738 is changed in the order of Hokuto's army, Nanto's thug, Savior's legend, Big Boss, and Wrestling Alliance.

FIG. 92 shows an example of an over-winning effect determination table. The horizontal axis of the table in this figure is 1 to 20 times, which indicates the number of over prizes. The number of over prizes is the number of balls that have entered the second starting port 12 in excess of the maximum number of balls held in Special Figure 2, in other words, the number of balls that have exceeded the maximum number of balls held in Special Figure 2 for the second starting port 12. It is a number. The vertical axis of the table in this figure shows the change pattern of the character 738. In the table in this figure, among the values corresponding to each combination of the number of over prizes and the change pattern, "0" is the army of Hokuto, "1" is the thug of Nanto, "2" is the legend of the savior, "3" is the big boss, "4" indicates a villainous alliance. The change pattern defined in the table in this figure is set so that as the number of over-winnings increases, the character shows a higher degree of expectation, except for "Hokuto no Army_Blue 1".

The effect determination means 303 selects one of the change patterns from a plurality of change patterns defined in the over-winning effect determination table by lottery in the easy-to-enter state of the chance mode. The change pattern lottery may be configured to facilitate the selection of Nanto's thug or savior legend in the case of a miss, and the big boss or villainous alliance in the case of a win. Further, the villainy alliance may be confirmed as a hit. For example, the production determination means 303 has a predetermined probability only when a hit (symbol big hit or small hit) exists in the fluctuation or the special figure 2 hold. You may choose a change pattern for the Wrestling Alliance.

Here, the opening / closing time of the normal electric accessory 90 (in other words, the ball entry fluctuation mechanism) in the chance mode easy entry state is N, the number of game balls that can be launched in N time is M, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the chance mode. Let O be the opening ratio of the object 90. In this case, the maximum number of balls that can be entered into the second starting port 12 in the chance mode in the easy-to-enter state is (M × O). Further, regarding the number of over-winning to the second starting port 12 in the chance mode in which the ball is easy to enter, the maximum value assumed in the design is (M × O-upper limit value for holding special figure 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, the opening / closing time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the easy-to-enter state of the chance mode is 20 seconds. Further, since the number of balls that can be fired in one minute is less than 100 (99.9), the number of balls that can be fired in 20 seconds is (99.9 × 20/60). Further, the opening ratio of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the easy-to-enter state of the chance mode is 0.58. In addition, the upper limit of the special figure reservation is four. Therefore, regarding the number of over-winning to the second starting port 12 in the chance mode in which the ball is easy to enter, the maximum number assumed in the design is (99.9 × 20/60 × 0.58-4) ≈15. Become.

The over-winning effect determination table includes a provision for changing the aspect (that is, the type of character) of the character 738 when the number of over-winning to the second starting port 12 exceeds the maximum number assumed by design. Specifically, the over-winning effect determination table includes a provision for changing the mode of the character 738 when the number of over-winnings exceeds 15 (M × O-special figure 2 hold upper limit value). For example, the change pattern "Violent Alliance_Rainbow 1" in the over-winning effect determination table of FIG. 92 changes the character 738 from the Big Boss to the villainous alliance with 18 over-winnings. In addition, the change pattern "Violent Alliance_Rainbow 2" changes the character 738 from a big boss to a villainous alliance with 17 over prizes. In addition, the change pattern "Violent Alliance_Rainbow 3" changes the character 738 from the Big Boss to the Evil Alliance with 16 over prizes.

Therefore, the effect determining means 303 can change the aspect of the character 738 when the number of over winnings for the second starting port 12 exceeds the maximum number expected by design in the easy-to-enter state of the chance mode. During a game with the pachinko gaming machine 500, a ball jam (so-called grape) occurs on the board due to an unexpected situation, and the ball jam is cleared while the normal electric accessory 90 is open. There is a possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will exceed the expected maximum number. According to the above feature 2, by providing a pattern that changes the character 738 when the over-winning exceeds the maximum number assumed in the design in the over-winning effect determination table, the effect can be changed even if an unexpected situation occurs. As a result, even if an unexpected situation (grape, etc.) that is not desirable for the player occurs, there is a possibility that an effect that is not normally seen can be seen, so that the stress of the player can be reduced.

Further, the over-winning effect determination table of FIG. 92 shows a change pattern that finally changes the character 738 when the number of over-winnings reaches the maximum number expected in design (15 in the embodiment as described above). Including. For example, the change patterns "Big Boss_Gold 1" and "Violent Alliance_Rainbow 4" are applicable. Further, the over-winning effect determination table of FIG. 92 includes a change pattern in which the character 738 changes in the middle when the number of over-winnings reaches the maximum number expected in design. For example, the change pattern "Violent Alliance_Rainbow 1" corresponds.

A modified example of the over-winning effect of the above feature 2 will be described.
As a first modification, the over-winning effect determination table may define the change probability (probability of rising) of the character 738 for each number of over-winning points to the second starting port 12. For example, 1 to 4 over prizes have a change probability of 0%, 5 to 8 over prizes have a change probability of 20%, 9 to 12 over prizes have a change probability of 25%, and 13 over prizes have a change probability. 16 may be defined as a change probability of 30%, and 17 to 20 over prizes may be defined as a change probability of 40%.

As another aspect, the over-winning effect determination table may be defined with a combination of a deterministic change with an increase in the number of over-winnings as in the embodiment and the above-mentioned stochastic change. For example, as corresponding to the change pattern "Big Boss_Gold 3" in FIG. 92, the number of over prizes 1 or 2 is "0", the number of over prizes 3 to 9 is "1", and the number of over prizes is 10. 12 pieces have a change probability of 20% (change mode is from "1" to "2"), and 13 to 20 over prizes have a change probability of 30% (change mode is from "1" to "2" or "2"). It may be defined as "3").

In this modified example as well, as in the above embodiment, the effect determining means 303 is a character when the number of over prizes for the second starting port 12 exceeds the maximum number expected by design in the easy-to-enter state of the chance mode. The aspect of 738 can be changed, and the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

A second modification will be described. The pattern that does not change at all due to the over winning of the second starting port 12 may be a hit (design big hit or small hit). In the over-winning production determination table of FIG. 92, the change pattern "Hokuto no Army_Blue 1" corresponds. Even if the effect determining means 303 selects the change pattern "Hokuto no Gun_Blue 1" with a predetermined probability only when there is a hit (symbol big hit or small hit) in the fluctuation or special figure 2 hold. Good. In the case of the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 92, if the number of over-winnings is 5 or more and the character 738 does not change even once, it is determined that the change pattern is "Hokuto no Gun_Blue 1". That is, the hit is fixed.

A third modification will be described. When the effect determining means 303 is executing the chance-up effect that establishes the aspect of the character 738, the effect determining means 303 may not execute a new effect due to a further over-winning to the second starting port 12, or at least a new effect. You may not perform a chance-up effect. This is because if a certain chance-up effect is interrupted in the middle and another chance-up effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the content of the effect.

The over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 92 is configured so that the character 738 is not continuously changed in the continuous over-winning. That is, when the character 738 changes with N over-winnings, the pattern in which the character 738 changes with N + 1 over-winnings is not specified. This ensures that there is no time overlap in the chance-up production.

A fourth modification will be described. In the above embodiment, the over-winning effect is executed in the easy-to-enter state in the chance mode. As a modification, the over-winning effect may be executed even in each fluctuation of the normal mode (normal state). In this case, the over-winning effect may be executed for the over-winning to the first starting port 11 (the winning ball exceeding 4 held in Special Figure 1).

A fifth modification will be described. In the over-winning effect of the above embodiment, the degree of expectation that a hit exists in the fluctuation or the maximum of four special figures 2 hold is suggested by the aspect of the character 738. As a modification, the over-winning effect may be individually executed for each of the variable object 730 corresponding to the variable and the maximum four reserved objects 732 corresponding to the maximum four special figure 2 hold. In this case, an over-winning effect determination table corresponding to each of the fluctuation or the maximum of four special figure 2 reservations may be provided. Further, the degree of expectation of winning may be suggested by the colors of the variable object 730 and the maximum of four reserved objects 732, and the type of character added to each object.

A sixth modification will be described. In the over-winning effect of the above embodiment, chances are increased according to the number of balls entered in the chance mode in which the number of balls exceeds a predetermined number for the second starting port 12 (4 pieces, which is the upper limit of holding in Special Figure 2). Was displayed. As a modification, the chance up may be displayed according to the number of balls entered into the second starting port 12 in the easy entry state of the chance mode. In this case, in the over-winning effect determination table, the maximum number of balls to be entered for the second starting port 12 in the chance mode easy entry state (M × O as described above, for example, 19). ) May be included, which may change the aspect of the character 738.

As a third feature of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment, a method of managing a variation pattern table relating to an easy entry state will be described. In the easy-to-enter state where the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is increased, a special effect designed on the premise of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 12 may be executed. .. In this case, if the special figure 1 is changed based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11 in the easy entry state, the special effect may proceed in a form unintended by design. The main purpose of the method of managing the fluctuation pattern table of the third feature is to prevent the production from progressing in a form unintended by design.

First, the production contents in the rush mode and the chance mode shown in FIG. 73 will be described.
(1) Rush mode 1st rotation:
It is a fluctuation from the big hit end demo to the rush rush. Basically, it is a guidance part that executes the production that indicates the end of the big hit and the production that indicates the start of the rush, so if you win here, you can produce a production that suggests a hit like a falling character in one shot. Execute. Also, in the first hit, it can be said that it is easier for the player to give a hit notification after executing the big hit end demo and the rush rush effect, but during right-handed hitting (during the small hit V loop) after the big hit ends. Immediately, the hit notification may be executed.

(2) Rush mode 2nd and subsequent rotations:
Of the 14 rotations in a short time, the first rotation is the end demo + rush rush effect as described above, and the last 14 rotations (the first rotation in the chance mode) is the hold charge effect as described later. Therefore, in the remaining 12 rotations excluding the first rotation in the rush mode, an effect suggesting success or failure is executed based on a series of background stages. In addition, the pseudo continuous fluctuation is repeated so that the fluctuation time of one rotation is long in a small rotation speed of 12 rotations and the effect is not redundant. Specifically, four pseudo-variations are executed for each rotation (one variation), and a total of 48 pseudo-continuous fluctuations are executed during 12 rotations. During this pseudo continuous fluctuation, the remaining display count (remaining fluctuation number) is displayed, and the remaining display count is counted down from 48 times. This makes it difficult for the player to determine that the actual number of rotations is 12.

(3) Chance mode:
The effect patterns shown in (3-1) to (3-3) below may be used.
(3-1) This is an effect pattern in which one rotation of the hold charge and four rotations of the remaining hold are shown as one effect, and may be an effect pattern called so-called look-ahead summary variation. For example, the content may be such that after the winning effect, the mini symbol (decorative symbol having a smaller size than usual) is repeatedly changed and stopped at high speed until the hit is held.
(3-2) It may be an effect pattern in which the winning notification effect is performed for each variation of 5 rotations.
(3-3) The effect pattern may be such that the number of hit notifications in the effect is different from that of 5 rotations. For example, it may be an effect pattern in which the battle effect as the winning notification effect is executed only three times in five rotations. The last one variation may be a result screen (a screen showing the result of the battle effect) and a resurrection effect (an effect of contents that are reversed and hit when the battle is defeated).

The first rotation of the chance mode in which the hold charge effect is executed may be the following effect patterns (A) to (C).
(A) It may be an effect pattern that executes an effect having the same contents as the rush mode and a hold charge effect. In the case of a hit, the hit may be notified in the same manner as in the rush mode.
(B) It may be an effect pattern for executing the first battle effect as a chance effect. In the case of a hit, the hit may be notified by winning in the first battle production.
(C) An effect pattern may be used in which a special effect is executed as one variation independent of the subsequent variation. For example, in the case of a hit, after the hold charge effect, the content prompting the operation of the effect button 109 (for example, "press the button") is displayed, and the character drop effect is completed and executed within one variation. You may.

The easy-to-enter state of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is defined as an end condition based on the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 and an end condition based on the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2. When any of the end conditions is satisfied, the specific game control means 270 ends the easy entry state and shifts to the normal state.

The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 determine the variation patterns of the special figures 1 and 2 with reference to the special variation pattern table in the easy-to-enter state. The special variation pattern table is a variation pattern table that defines variation patterns for executing a special effect (for example, a rush effect and a hold charge effect) in an easy-to-enter state, and is a variation pattern table in which the number of references is limited. is there.

FIG. 93 shows the types of the special variation pattern table. The "limited mode" is the identification information of the special variation pattern table. “Presence / absence of time reduction” indicates whether or not the table is referred to in the easy-to-enter state (○) or not (×). "Number of times" indicates a limit value of the number of times of reference of the special variation pattern table. “Special figure 1 subtraction” indicates whether or not the number of references is subtracted (◯) or not (×) as the special figure 1 fluctuates. “Special figure 2 subtraction” indicates whether or not the number of references is subtracted (◯) or not (×) as the special figure 2 fluctuates. As described above in relation to FIG. 73, 13 fluctuations in the rush mode and 1 fluctuation in the chance mode correspond to the easy entry state. Therefore, among the special variation pattern tables of the limited modes 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 93, the one referred to in the easy-to-enter state is the special variation pattern table of the limited modes 7 to 9.

The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 are limited mode 7 at the end of the special game associated with the small hit V or the 7-matched symbol big hit, that is, at the timing of entering the rush mode (easy entry state). , 8 and 9 special variation pattern tables are set. The transition of the special fluctuation pattern table is set to the limited modes 7, 8 and 9 in order from the front.

As shown in FIG. 93, the number of references to the special variation pattern table in the limited modes 7, 8 and 9 is subtracted by the variation of the special figure 2 but not by the variation of the special figure 1. For example, the first variation pattern determining means 231 determines the variation pattern of the special figure 1 with reference to the special variation pattern tables of the limited modes 7, 8 and 9 in the easy-to-enter state, but the limited modes 7, 8 , 9 The number of references to the special variation pattern table is not subtracted. On the other hand, when the second variation pattern determining means 232 determines the variation pattern of the special figure 2 with reference to the special variation pattern table of the limited modes 7, 8 and 9 in the easy-to-enter state, the limited modes 7, 8 and Subtract the number of references to the special variation pattern table of 9.

As described above, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0 or very low, while the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is high (for example, 1 / 7.7). The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the sixth embodiment refers to the special variation pattern table only in the variation of the special figure 2 during the easy-to-enter state in which the main game is to obtain a small hit by the variation of the special figure 2. Subtract and change the special fluctuation pattern table only for the special figure 2 fluctuation. As a result, even if an unintended special figure 1 change occurs during the easy entry state (for example, the player leaves the seat with the special figure 1 hold remaining at the end of the special game, and the special figure 1 is released in the easy entry state. Even if the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is performed), it is possible to control so that the rush effect and the hold charge effect do not proceed.

A modified example will be described. As described in the above-mentioned chance mode production pattern (3-3), assuming that the battle production is executed three times in the chance mode, in the embodiment, the holding upper limit of the special figure 2 is set to four. As a modification, when the holding upper limit of the special figure 2 is 3 or 2, the chance mode effect may be configured as follows.

When the upper limit of the hold of special figure 2 is 3, the hold charge effect is executed in the first change (final change of time reduction), and the first battle in the second change (first change of hold in special figure 2). The effect may be executed, and the second battle effect may be executed in the third variation (the second variation on hold in Special Figure 2). Then, the third battle effect, the result display, and the resurrection effect may be executed in the fourth variation (the third variation on hold in Special Figure 2).
When the upper limit of the hold of the special figure 2 is 2, the hold charge effect and the first battle effect are executed in the first change (final change of the time reduction), and the second change (the change of the first hold in the special figure 2). ) May execute the second battle effect, and the third variation (the second variation on hold in Special Figure 2) may execute the third battle effect, the result display, and the resurrection effect.

There are the following merits by setting a small number (less than 4) of the upper limit of holdings in Special Figure 2.
(1) It is possible to increase the speed of ball ejection (in other words, the number of balls ejected per unit time). In particular, when a battle effect is executed as in the chance mode, the ball ejection speed can be increased without changing the apparent effect of the game.
(2) It is possible to reduce the possibility of a direct hit (symbol jackpot in special figure 2) due to the symbol jackpot probability (1/319). In other words, since the possibility of a direct hit can be reduced by reducing the maximum number of pending hits, the possibility of a ball being ejected due to an unintended direct hit can be suppressed, and the ball ejection design can be performed based on the original small hit probability. ..

In the above modification, the upper limit number of holdings in FIG. 2 is smaller than that of the embodiment (less than 4), but instead of or in combination with this, the number of time reductions may be less than that of the embodiment, for example, the rush mode. The number of time reductions in the above may be less than 13 times. Also in this aspect, the possibility of a direct hit (symbol jackpot in Special Figure 2) due to the symbol jackpot probability (1/319) can be reduced, and the possibility of a ball being ejected due to an unintended direct hit is suppressed, and the original It is possible to design the ball output based on the small hit probability.

In the specific game control means 270, when the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches 14 times in the easy-to-enter state (for example, when the 14th special figure 1 fluctuation is completed), or when the special figure 2 fluctuation reaches 14 times. In the case (for example, when the 14th special figure 2 change is completed), the gaming state is changed from the easy entry state to the normal state. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 are the special variation pattern tables of the limited modes 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, and 2 (special for the normal state) at the timing of the end of the easy entry state. Variable pattern table) is reset. The transition of the special fluctuation pattern table is set to the limited modes 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, and 2 in order from the front. When the easy entry state ends (for example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches 14 times), even if the number of references to the special fluctuation pattern table remains, the special for the normal state is forcibly applied. Switch to the variation pattern table.

When the special fluctuation pattern table of the limited modes 3, 4, 5, and 6 is referred to, that is, when the special figure 1 fluctuates during the period of 4 fluctuations after the end of the easy entry state, the transition of the special fluctuation pattern table is performed. , The production stage will be an immediate stop prevention production. Further, when the special figure 2 changes in the reference period of the special change pattern table of the limited modes 3, 4, 5, and 6 after that, the chance effect is displayed. In this way, after the end of the easy entry state, the effect can be matched with the special symbol to be changed and the content of the effect by proceeding with the effect in both the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation.

The present invention has been described above based on the sixth embodiment. The sixth embodiment is an example, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.

A modified example of the decorative symbol 61, which is applicable to each of the above embodiments, will be described.
The decorative symbol 61 of this modification includes a normal decorative symbol 802 displayed as a main symbol on the effect display device 60 at least when the special symbol is stopped, and a normal decorative symbol 802 at least when the normal decorative symbol 802 is difficult to see. A simple decorative symbol 804 displayed in a more simplified display form is included. The normal decorative symbol 802 is a symbol displayed in a size larger than that of the simple decorative symbol 804. Normally, the decorative symbol 802 is composed of three symbols, and in principle, the decorative symbols 802 are stopped one by one after the variable display. The simple decorative symbol 804 is also composed of three symbols, but three of them are stopped at the same time after the variable display. As the combination of the stop symbols of the simple decorative symbol 804, the same combination as the combination of the stop symbols of the normal decorative symbol 802 is displayed. The simple decorative symbol 804 corresponds to the alternative symbol and the simplified symbol described in the above-mentioned prerequisite techniques and examples.

During the execution of the super reach effect, the normal decorative symbol 802 may be displayed small (display an alternative symbol) or the normal decorative symbol 802 may be hidden during at least a part of the period (displaying an alternative symbol). The alternative symbol may also be configured not to be displayed), but in such a situation, the simple decorative symbol 804 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple decorative symbol 804 is displayed small in the upper right corner of the effect display device 60, and displays a variable display while the special symbol is fluctuating, and displays a stop while the special symbol is stopped. , As with the normal decorative symbol 802, three symbols are variable display and stop display. By providing this simple decorative symbol 804, a situation in which the normal decorative symbol 802 is desired to be made smaller or hidden (for example, when performing a super reach effect, an effect is performed by a movable accessory and the center of the effect display device 60 is used. Even if it is hidden, it is possible to notify that it is changing (in other words, that the result of success or failure has not been determined).

That is, it can be said that the simple decorative symbol 804 is a symbol for display security (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 802). When the simple decorative symbol 804 is variablely displayed, it is preferable to always continue the variable display from the start of the special symbol to the stop display, that is, the normal decorative symbol 802 temporarily stops in the middle. Even in the case (for example, when the special normal decorative symbol 802 that displays characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing the pseudo continuous effect), the simple decorative symbol 804 does not temporarily stop in the middle. (Therefore, the simple decorative symbol 804 is not provided with a special symbol for displaying characters such as "NEXT", and the simple decorative symbol 804 only stops the confirmation). , In order to prevent misunderstanding that it is a big hit in the case of a missed fluctuation, and to prevent the player from being detected in advance that it is a big hit in the case of a big hit fluctuation, regardless of whether it is a missed fluctuation or a big hit fluctuation, the player On the other hand, it is variablely displayed while maintaining the symbol combination indicating the deviation (for example, when the type of the simple decorative symbol 804 is "1" to "7", "123"-> "234"-> "345"-> "456". ”→“ 567 ”→“ 671 ”→“ 712 ”→“ 123 ”→ ...).

Further, when the fluctuation starts from the situation where the normal decorative symbol 802 and the simple decorative symbol 804 are fixedly stopped, the symbol combination (the first symbol combination immediately after the start of the fluctuation) as the starting point is 1 from the symbol combination at the fixed stop. Although it is a symbol combination that has progressed, if the simple decorative symbol 804 starts to fluctuate from the situation where the fixed stop is fixed, the symbol combination that is the starting point will be a predetermined symbol combination regardless of the combination at the fixed stop. .. For example, when the normal decorative symbol 802 and the simple decorative symbol 804 start to fluctuate in a situation where both the number combinations related to the normal decorative symbol 802 and the simple decorative symbol 804 are fixedly stopped at "243", the normal decorative symbol 802 The symbol combination that is the starting point of is "354", but the symbol combination that is the starting point of the simple decorative symbol 804 is fixed to "123", and both the number combinations related to the normal decorative symbol 802 and the simple decorative symbol 804 are "333". When the normal decorative symbol 802 and the simple decorative symbol 804 start to fluctuate in the situation where the confirmation is stopped at "", the symbol combination that is the starting point of the normal decorative symbol 802 is "444", but the starting point of the simple decorative symbol 804. The symbol combination is fixed at "123".

In addition to this, the simple decorative symbol 804 can be clearly differentiated from the normal decorative symbol 802 by having the following features.
(1) The display area of the normal decorative symbol 802, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the simple decorative symbol 804 (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 802) for display security. This is a situation in which the normal decorative symbol 802 and the simple decorative symbol 804 are fixedly stopped, and the normal decorative symbol 802 is immediately after forming the reach state (the reach state in a state where the super reach effect has not been developed) and is a simple decoration. The symbol 804 is not limited to the situation where the variable display is being performed, and even if the normal decorative symbol 802 is a small symbol during a super reach production or the like and the simple decorative symbol 804 is the situation where the simple decorative symbol 804 is being variablely displayed. It is preferable to configure it as follows.

(2) The display position of the normal decorative symbol 802 is in the first effect mode (for example, stage A in the normal mode or the normal mode) or in the second effect mode (for example, the stage B in the rush mode or the normal mode). By setting different display positions according to the crab, it is possible to realize a variety of effects in the normal decorative pattern 802 according to the effect mode. On the other hand, since the simple decorative symbol 804 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 802, it is unnecessary to use the same display position regardless of whether it is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. It is preferable not to carry out various development designs. The details of the effect mode will be described later.

(3) The display mode of the normal decorative symbol 802 is either the first effect mode (for example, stage A in the normal mode or the normal mode) or the second effect mode (for example, the stage B in the rush mode or the normal mode). By using different display modes depending on the mode, it is possible to realize a variety of effects in the normal decorative pattern 802 according to the effect mode. For example, in the first effect mode, the normal decorative symbol 802 is composed of only the number normal decorative symbols 802 (normal decorative symbols 802 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second effect mode. The normal decorative symbol 802 of the number and the normal decorative symbol 802 of the ally character are combined to form the normal decorative symbol 802 ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., " Ordinary decorative symbols such as "7" + "character g" 802). On the other hand, since the simple decorative symbol 804 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 802, only the same display mode can be used regardless of whether it is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. For example, it is preferable to configure the simple decorative symbol 804 with only the normal decorative symbol 802 of numbers and to avoid unnecessary development and design.

(4) The display area of the normal decorative symbol 802 is variable (moving, making it a small symbol) according to the fluctuation situation (for example, whether or not it is in normal reach, whether or not it is in super reach effect, etc.). As a result, it is possible to give diversity to the production of the normal decorative pattern 802. On the other hand, since the simple decorative symbol 804 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 802, the display area of the simple decorative symbol 804 is not variable (does not move or is not a small symbol). It is preferable not to carry out development design.

(5) The fluctuation speed of the normal decorative symbol 802 can be changed to low speed, medium speed, high speed, ultra high speed, etc. according to the fluctuation situation (for example, whether it is at the start of fluctuation, in the middle of fluctuation, or just before the end of fluctuation). By doing so, it is possible to give variety to the production of the normal decorative pattern 802. On the other hand, since the simple decorative symbol 804 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 802, the fluctuation speed of the simple decorative symbol 804 is not variable, or the step of making it variable is reduced (for example, low speed). It is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by (only high speed). Also, regarding the direction of fluctuation, the normal decorative symbol 802 enables not only the fluctuation from top to bottom but also the fluctuation from bottom to top (it enables fluctuation in multiple directions), while the simple decorative symbol 804 enables variation in multiple directions. , It is preferable to make only the fluctuation from top to bottom.

(6) The normal decorative symbol 802 is a temporary stop (temporary stop in the middle of the change of the special symbol) before the fixed stop (stop at the timing when the special symbol stops), and is provisional with a slight shaking fluctuation. (Stop), and at that time, temporarily stop a specific symbol other than the number, which is a normal decorative symbol 802 (for example, a normal decorative symbol 802 on which the word "super" is written to announce the development of a super reach effect). As a result, it is possible to have a relationship between the effect of the normal decorative pattern 802 and other effects. On the other hand, since the simple decorative symbol 804 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 802, the simple decorative symbol 804 is not temporarily stopped, nor is the specific symbol temporarily stopped. It is preferable not to carry out various development designs.

(7) The normal decorative symbol 802 overlaps with the display area of other notice effects (for example, comment notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), that is, superimposed display is performed. In order to perform a powerful effect by using the area on the effect display device 60 as much as possible, such superimposed display is allowed, but the simple decorative symbol 804 usually plays a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol 802. Therefore, it is desirable that the display area of the simple decorative symbol 804 is designed so as not to overlap with the display area of the other notice effect (do not overlap and display). However, regarding the relationship with special notice effects that are inevitably duplicated (for example, group notice effects displayed on the entire effect display device 60, background notice effects, etc.), the display priority of the simple decorative symbol 804 is set. It is preferable to set it higher than the display priority of the special notice effect (set the simple decorative symbol 804 to be displayed in front of the special notice effect). Further, the right-handed notification image (unlike the image displayed during the special game, the right-handed notification image dedicated to the high-base state displayed during the high-base state, but may be an image common to the image during the special game. ), Since it is desirable that the player can always see it, it is desirable to design so that the display area of the simple decorative symbol 804 and the display area of the right-handed notification image do not overlap (do not overlap and display). .. However, when the display area of the normal decorative symbol 802 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the normal decorative symbol 802 and the display area of the right-handed notification image may overlap (superimpose display). In that case, set the display priority of the normal decorative symbol 802 to be lower than the display priority of the right-handed notification image (set the normal decorative symbol 802 to be displayed on the rear side of the right-handed notification image). Is preferable.

(8) During the special game, the normal decorative symbol 802 may be displayed as only one, not as a combination display. For example, if "777" is fixedly stopped and the special game is executed, "7" is displayed during the special game, and if "222" is fixedly stopped and the special game is executed, the special game is executed. "2" is displayed during the special game. As a result, it is possible to recognize which normal decorative symbol 802 was the big hit during the special game. As a modification, only the normal decorative symbol 802 corresponding to the jackpot with high advantage (for example, "333", "555", "777" indicating that the jackpot is 7R or more or the jackpot of 10R) is in the special game. It may be displayed in. The display area for displaying one normal decorative symbol 802 displayed during the special game is the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize, which are other display areas during the special game. It is desirable that the area does not overlap with the number of balls display area, that is, the display is not superimposed (however, the highlighting may be superimposed, and in that case, the highlighting has a higher display priority). Further, the simple decorative symbol 804 is preferably hidden during the special game (because the variable display is not performed during the special game), but it may be displayed during the special game. When configured to, it may be configured so that it does not overlap with other display areas during the special game, such as the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball number display area, that is, they are not superimposed. It is desirable, and it is desirable not to superimpose the highlighting.

(9) In the normal decorative symbol 802, in addition to the fluctuation (for example, movement from top to bottom), a predetermined operation is performed at the start of fluctuation, immediately after temporary stop, after the reach is established, during temporary stop, and the like. The accompanying display may be performed (the operation in each situation may be referred to as a fluctuation start operation, a temporary stop operation, a reach establishment operation, or a shaking operation). For example, in the case of non-reach (when the normal decorative symbol 802 and the simple decorative symbol 804 are displayed as "624" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right of the normal decorative symbol 802 are displayed. After performing an operation that expands all of the symbols, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation and then temporarily stops "6" and then shakes. After that, when the right symbol temporarily stops, a bouncing motion is performed, and then the swaying motion is continued after "4" temporarily stops, and then when the middle symbol temporarily stops. After performing a bouncing motion, "2" temporarily stops and performs a slight swinging motion, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the actions of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are terminated. In this case, the simple decorative symbol 804 does not perform each operation at all.

In addition, in the case of normal reach (when the normal decorative symbol 802 and the simple decorative symbol 804 are displayed as "212" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the normal decorative symbol 802 are displayed. After performing an action that expands all of the above, the fluctuation starts, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, a bouncing motion is performed, and then the "2" temporarily stops and then the shaking motion is performed. Continue, then when the right symbol temporarily stops, perform a bouncing motion, then continue the swaying motion after "2" temporarily stops, and then left to notify that it is reach. After the symbol and the right symbol rotate, the shaking motion is continued again, and then when the middle symbol temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing motion, "1" temporarily stops and the shaking motion is slightly stopped. After that, all the operations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are ended at the fixed stop timing (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the simple decorative symbol 804 does not perform each operation at all.

In addition, when developing into a super reach effect (when the normal decorative symbol 802 and the simple decorative symbol 804 are displayed as "232" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol and the middle symbol in the normal decorative symbol 802 are displayed. , Starts to fluctuate after performing an action that enlarges all of the right symbols, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing motion and then temporarily stopping "2" The swaying motion is continued, and when the right symbol temporarily stops, a bouncing motion is performed, and then the swaying motion is continued after "2" is temporarily stopped, and then the reach is notified. Therefore, the left symbol and the right symbol rotate and then continue the swaying motion again, and then the middle symbol fluctuates while the left and right symbols are swaying (at this time, the middle symbol). The symbols fluctuate from top to bottom in a magnified state, and the left and right symbols that were not duplicated or had a small overlap ratio were duplicated or had a high overlap ratio), After that, it shifts from the normal background to the reach background in order to execute the super reach effect, and when it is notified by the super reach effect that it is the result of the deviation, it shifts from the reach background to the normal background, and after the shift, the left The symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol continue to sway for a predetermined time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are terminated (the middle symbol performs both the bouncing motion and the rotating motion). Absent). In this case, the simple decorative symbol 804 does not perform each operation at all.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give variety to the production of the normal decorative symbol 802, while the simple decorative symbol 804 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 802, so that it is simple. It is preferable that the decorative design 804 is configured so as not to perform any particular operation, and unnecessary development design is not required. Further, even between the time when the fluctuation is stopped and the time when the standby demo effect is displayed, the normal decorative symbol 802 swings after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the simple decorative symbol 804 does not operate at all. With this configuration, even when the game is waiting (the symbol is stopped), the motivation for the game can be stimulated, and the simple decorative symbol 804 does not swing, so that the game is waiting. Notification can be guaranteed.

In addition, when the standby demo effect is displayed, the normal decorative symbol 802 is normally hidden, but it is preferable that the simple decorative symbol 804 is continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to secure the display of what kind of symbol is stopped while emphasizing the display of the standby demo effect screen. However, if the standby demonstration is being produced, the simple decorative symbol 804 may be hidden because the game is not being performed. Further, among the normal decorative symbols 802, a specific symbol (for example, "7" of the middle symbol) may be configured so that the predetermined operation is not performed or the probability of performing the predetermined operation is lower than that of the other symbols. This predetermined operation may be, for example, the above-mentioned temporary stop operation (bounce-like operation) (particularly, regarding “7” of the middle symbol after the reach is established). With this configuration, the rarity of the movement in a specific symbol can be increased.

The normal decorative symbol 802 of the number and the normal decorative symbol 802 of the ally character are combined to form the normal decorative symbol 802 (“1” + “character a”, “2” + “character b”, ... , "7" + "Character g", etc. In the case of the normal decorative symbol 802), the normal decorative symbol 802 of the number and the normal decorative symbol 802 of the ally character both perform the shaking motion of the normal decorative symbol 802. However, the swing width (the swing distance, for example, if it swings up and down, the distance between the state in which the normal decorative symbol 802 during the swing operation is displayed at the top and the state in which it is displayed at the bottom). By making the width) different, it is possible to realize a dynamic swinging motion, and in such a configuration, the swinging width of the normal decorative symbol 802 of the number is larger than the swinging width of the normal decorative symbol 802 of the ally character. Or the number normal decorative symbol 802 may be configured not to swing, and only the normal decorative symbol 802 of the ally character may be configured to swing.

A modified example of the effect mode and the pseudo continuous variation effect (also referred to as “pseudo continuous effect”) applicable to each of the above embodiments will be described.
In this modification, there are a plurality of types of effect modes, and it is determined which type of effect can be executed, such as a symbol variation effect or a notice effect, for each effect mode.
To specifically explain the effect mode and the effect content executed in the effect mode, for example, "normal mode", "chance mode", and "rush mode" are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and the game state. One of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set according to (or the variation pattern selection state) or the number of variations of the special symbol, and the variation effect according to the set effect mode is executed. Will be done. Basically, "normal mode" is set when the game state is the normal state, "chance mode" is set when the game state is the time saving state, and "rush" is set when the game state is the probability change state. Mode "is set. When any of the effect modes is set, as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the user is staying in the effect mode, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a background displayed on the back of the decorative symbol 61) is displayed on the screen. (Image) is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 108. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

Specifically, the "normal mode" is equipped with four stages, "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", and the progress of 20 fluctuations or more or the super reach production is missed. Taking the opportunity, it shifts from "Stage A" to "Stage B", from "Stage B" to "Stage C", from "Stage C" to "Stage A", and "Look-ahead stage" in the pre-reading notice production judgment If you win the execution (transition) of, the stage you are currently staying in will shift to the "look-ahead stage" (when you move to the "look-ahead stage", the execution of the super reach effect will be confirmed, and if you hit the jackpot, "look-ahead" Zoro eyes are displayed in "Stage", and if it is off, other than Zoro eyes are displayed in "Look-ahead stage", and the next change returns to the stage before the transition to "Look-ahead stage"). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage" (different from stage BGM in "chance mode" and stage BGM in "rush mode"). , In "Stage A", the stage BGM is interrupted (finished) triggered by the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) of the non-reach out-of-reach (the out-of-reach state, for example, a break such as "351"). ), The stage BGM is started from the beginning with the start of the next fluctuation, and in the "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", the stage BGM is stopped even if the fluctuation is stopped (fixed stop) out of reach. The stage BGM is output continuously to the next fluctuation without interruption (it does not end) (the configuration is such that the "chance mode" and the "rush mode" are also continuously output).

Here, the pseudo-continuous production can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", but in any stage, at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous production. The stage BGM is not output at (when a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol having the character "NEXT") as a middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the vicinity of a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped). (Interruption), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the re-variation display (re-variation after the temporary stop), or the stage BGM is switched to a specific BGM different from that before the re-variation display. After that, when developing into a super reach production in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", the background image of each stage (the stage where you were staying) is changed to the background image of the super reach production. (At the same time, the BGM is switched to the BGM dedicated to the super reach production), the stage BGM is not output during the super reach production, and the super reach production is displayed to indicate the deviation, so that the super reach production is executed. The background image of each stage (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development of the super reach production) is switched again within the variable display, but in that situation, the background of the stage until the next variable display starts. Even if the image is displayed, the stage BGM is not output, and the BGM dedicated to the super reach effect is not output (there is no sound, or a specific BGM different from the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the super reach effect is output). Therefore, the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the fluctuation is stopped (fixed stop) out of reach, and the stage BGM is output continuously after the next fluctuation. "Stage B" and "Stage" Even if it is "C" or "look-ahead stage" (even if it is not "stage A"), if it is missed via the super reach effect, the stage is before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop). The BGM will be interrupted, and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts.

In the "chance mode" and the "rush mode", the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Here, a special effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (for example, "Continue!", Which is a notice of continuous dialogue and the execution of the subsequent pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed, and the subsequent execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is suggested that a pseudo-continuous production (re-variation display) will be performed after that by executing an unconfirmed production (such as "may continue?"), But this special production is "Stage A" and "Stage A". It is displayed only in "Stage C" and not in "Stage B" and "Look-ahead stage". In other words, by preparing both a stage where the possibility of pseudo-continuous production can be detected and a stage where it cannot be detected and repeating the stage transition between the stages, it is possible to realize a production that does not make the player bored. doing. In "Stage A", a special effect using the character A as a motif is executed, but in "Stage C", a special effect using the character B as a motif is executed. In addition, it is a different effect from the special effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect is determined to be executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed only when it occurs (for example, when the character C appears, the line "Continue confirmed!" Is always displayed. The effect to be displayed) is also provided, and it is a different effect from the special effect and the pseudo-ream effect. (For example, an effect in which a line saying "development confirmed!" Is displayed whenever character D appears) is also provided. The pseudo-continuous confirmation effect and the development confirmation effect can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage".

In this way, when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous effect can be determined by displaying one or more combinations of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the development confirmed effect. It is possible to diversify the degree of development expectations for super reach production. In addition, all of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous confirmation effect, and the development confirmation effect may be executed during one variation display, and in that case, during a certain re-variation display (for example, the first or second re-variation display). ) May include a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo-continuous confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed. In the pattern in which the special effect is executed in the first or second time), the pseudo-continuous confirmation effect may be further executed during the certain revariation display after the special effect is executed during the certain revariation display.

The "random number" referred to in the present specification or the scope of the patent claim does not have to be a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit or a true random number in a mathematical sense, and a hardware random number or a random number generation using a 16-bit counter. It may be a pseudo-random number such as a software random number using an algorithm. Alternatively, a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number, for example, a plus random number method in which the initial value is changed each time the counter makes one round may be used.

Strictly speaking, when the term "table" or "criteria (selection criteria)" is used in the present specification or claims, the correspondence between the first parameter such as a lottery value and the second parameter such as a value indicating an option. Does not only refer to the data defined in the table structure, but also broadly includes the case where such a correspondence is realized by a program structure in which the second parameter is derived from the first parameter. Including them, the concept is substantially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "criteria (selection criteria)". Further, when a table structure is used, the selection criteria that are substantially one type may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables, but the term "multiple types of selection criteria" is subdivided. Shows the actual number of types of tables, not the number of converted tables.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine in which a game ball (prize ball) is paid out as a profit based on the entry of a ball is illustrated, but instead of paying out the prize ball, an electronic profit management system is used to launch the game ball. -It can also be applied to so-called enclosed type pachinko machines that manage prize ball grants. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, typically, a predetermined number of game balls circulate in the game machine and play a game with the circulating game balls, and the game balls can be launched instead of paying out the prize balls. Benefit the player by increasing the number of times. For example, a ball circulation means that receives a game ball that has rolled in the game area and sends it to the game area again without discharging it to the outside of the game machine to circulate it in the game machine, and the number of launched balls and the number of received balls of the game ball. , And a ball number management means for managing the number of balls held based on the number of prize balls paid out, and a ball holding display means for displaying the managed number of balls held.

Any combination of the examples and modifications described above is also useful as an embodiment of the present invention. The new embodiments resulting from the combination have the effects of the combined examples and the modifications. It is also understood by those skilled in the art that the functions to be fulfilled by each of the constituent elements described in the claims are realized by a single component or a cooperation thereof shown in the examples and modifications.

The techniques described in the first embodiment and modifications described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 1-1-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening is
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port, and an operation lottery means.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
With
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, the operation control means is set a predetermined time before the time interval in which a plurality of game balls are launched. A ball game machine that opens the entry ball fluctuation mechanism.

[Aspect 1-1-2]
The easy ball entry state ends with the end of one symbol change triggered by the ball entering the second starting port.
In the one-time symbol fluctuation time triggered by the ball entering the second starting port in the easy-to-enter state, the normal symbol hits at least twice or more when the operation lottery is continuously executed. The ball gaming machine according to aspect 1-1, which is defined for a time that is longer than possible.

[Aspect 1-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening is
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port, and an operation lottery means.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
With
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, the operation control means is set a predetermined time before the time interval in which a plurality of game balls are launched. Open the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
The operation control means determines that when the opening time of the ball entry fluctuation mechanism reaches the predetermined time, or the number of balls entering the second starting port is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second lottery value. A ball game machine that terminates the opening of the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the number is reached.

[Aspect 1-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening is
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port, and an operation lottery means.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
An effect control means for displaying an effect content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, the operation control means is set a predetermined time before the time interval in which a plurality of game balls are launched. Open the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
When the ball entry fluctuation mechanism is opened due to the predetermined hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, the effect control means prompts the launch of the game ball aiming at the second starting port. The special effect is displayed, and while the special effect is being displayed, the variation effect of the decorative symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first starting port is reduced and displayed.
In the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, the variation time of the special symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination based on the entry into the first starting port is fixed to a time shorter than the average variation time in the normal game in the normal state. ,
The effect control means displays the special effect in the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, and changes in the decorative symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination based on the entry into the first starting port during the display of the special effect. A ball game machine that hides the production.

[Aspect 1-4]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening is
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port, and an operation lottery means.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
An effect control means for displaying an effect content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
The easy ball entry state ends when a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations triggered by the ball entering the second starting port are completed.
The effect control means is a ball game machine that displays a special effect of prompting the launch of a game ball aimed at the second starting port during the final symbol change in the easy-to-enter state.

[Aspect 1-5-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening is
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port, and an operation lottery means.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
An effect control means for displaying an effect content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, the operation control means is set a predetermined time before the time interval in which a plurality of game balls are launched. Open the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
When the ball entry fluctuation mechanism is opened due to the predetermined hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, the effect control means prompts the launch of the game ball aiming at the second starting port. Display a special effect,
In the effect control means, the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port or the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port is the predetermined standby demo transition time. If not, display a predetermined standby demo on the effect display device.
The hold control means displays a variation of the normal symbol indicating the result of the operation lottery, up to a predetermined number, of the normal figure lottery value for the operation lottery acquired when the ball enters the operation port. Hold until the start,
The standby demo transition time is set longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the general drawing lottery value is held up to the upper limit.

[Aspect 1-5-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening is
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port, and an operation lottery means.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
An effect control means for displaying an effect content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, the operation control means is set a predetermined time before the time interval in which a plurality of game balls are launched. Open the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
When the ball entry fluctuation mechanism is opened due to the predetermined hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, the effect control means prompts the launch of the game ball aiming at the second starting port. Display a special effect,
In the effect control means, the entry of the game ball into either of the plurality of winning openings or the entry openings provided in the game area has not been detected in the predetermined standby demo transition time, and the special symbol is present. If it is not fluctuating, the effect display device is displayed with a predetermined standby demo.
The hold control means displays a variation of the normal symbol indicating the result of the operation lottery, up to a predetermined number, of the normal figure lottery value for the operation lottery acquired when the ball enters the operation port. Hold until the start,
The standby demo transition time is set longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the general drawing lottery value is held up to the upper limit.

[Aspect 1-6]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening is
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port, and an operation lottery means.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
An effect control means for displaying an effect content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
The easy ball entry state ends when a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations triggered by the ball entering the second starting port are completed.
The effect control means ends as a result of a change that triggers the end of the easy-to-enter state, or a change based on the second lottery value that remains in the hold control means after the end of the easy-to-enter state. In this case, the effect related to the ball ejection up to that point is displayed on the effect display device.
The effect control means is a bullet that displays an effect related to the ball ejection in a manner higher in visibility than the variable effect when the special symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination based on the entry into the first starting port is changing. Ball game machine.

The techniques described in the second embodiment and modifications described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 2-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device for displaying fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and a symbol display device.
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening, and the special game control means.
An opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the grand prize opening,
With
The large winning opening is provided with an opening / closing member for switching between an open state and a closed state of the large winning opening, and when the large winning opening is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member.
Both the unit game and the small hit game in the special game end when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number.
The opening time of the large winning opening in the small hit game is set to a short time during which the game ball rolling on the opening / closing member can enter the large winning opening.
The opening / closing control means is a ball game machine capable of repeating the opening of the large winning opening for a short time a predetermined number or more times in the small hit game.
According to this configuration, in a machine equipped with a small hit development big hit, by using a common large winning opening for the big hit and the small hit, it is possible to secure a wide board area where the production can be performed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the production. it can. Further, in the small hit game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball equivalent to one round during the big hit, and it becomes easy for the player to have a sufficient feeling of coming out.

[Aspect 2-2-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device for displaying fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and a symbol display device.
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the large winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game.
The effect determining means is a ball game machine that displays images corresponding to the predetermined number of images during the small hit game and changes the images according to the entry of a ball into the large winning opening during the small hit game.
According to this configuration, it is suggested to the player that it is possible to enter a relatively large number of balls into the big winning opening during the small hit game (in other words, the possibility of getting a ball) in the machine equipped with the small hit development big hit. It is possible to encourage the player to fire during the small hit game.

[Aspect 2-2-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device for displaying fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and a symbol display device.
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the large winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game.
When the game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, the effect determining means determines the small hit according to the type of the symbol indicating the small hit after the end of the small hit game. Display one of multiple types of suggestion effects that suggest the profits that the player can obtain.
The effect determining means displays an image showing the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested in a later suggestion effect during the small hit game, and responds to the entry into the large winning opening during the small hit game. A ball game machine that changes the image.
According to this configuration, in a machine equipped with a small hit development big hit, it is possible to identify the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested by a later suggestion effect by entering the ball into the big winning opening during the small hit game. It is possible to promote firing during a small hit game.

[Aspect 2-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device for displaying fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and a symbol display device.
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the operation of the special electric accessory and the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games involving the operation of the special electric accessory and the opening of the large winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the large winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game.
When the game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, the effect determining means displays an effect that notifies that fact, and the small hit game is changed to a special game. An image showing the cumulative number of times the special electric accessory has been activated is displayed over the entire period.
The effect determining means is a ball game machine that displays an image indicating that it is the first operation of the special electric accessory as the image during the small hit game.
According to this configuration, an image showing "first round" or the like is displayed even during the small hit game, that is, a series of count displays are performed from the small hit game to the special game. This suggests that it is possible to obtain a ball output equivalent to one round of the special game in the small hit game, and it is possible to encourage the player to fire during the small hit game.

[Aspect 2-4]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device for displaying fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and a symbol display device.
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the large winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game.
The type of profit that the player can obtain with respect to the special game executed when the game ball entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, and the normal after the end of the special game. At least one of the types of profits a player can earn with respect to a game depends on the type of symbol indicating the small hit.
When the game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, the effect determining means waits after the final opening of the large winning opening in the small hit game is completed. A ball game machine that displays an effect suggesting the type of profit that a player can obtain according to the type of a symbol indicating a small hit until the first opening of the big winning opening in the special game.
According to this configuration, on condition that the game ball has passed through a specific area, a game ball in a small hit game is displayed by displaying an effect suggesting the type of profit that the player can obtain according to the small hit symbol. It is possible to prevent the production content and the actual profit type from becoming inconsistent when the player does not pass through the specific area. Further, in the small hit game, vibration detection may be performed to prevent fraud, but according to the above configuration, since the timing of vibration detection is removed to perform a suggestion effect, vibration such as an effect of causing the player to press a button It is also possible to suggest the aspect of occurrence.

[Aspect 2-5]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device for displaying fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and a symbol display device.
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
When a ball enters the second starting port, it is acquired with the entry as an opportunity regardless of whether or not the variation display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the entry is immediately started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the lottery value is a small hit, the advance judgment information indicating that the change corresponding to the entry is a small hit can be notified to the effect determining means in advance. Judgment means and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The effect determining means is a case where a game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game has passed through the specific area, and the lottery value for which the preliminary determination information is a small hit is 1. When indicating that two or more are held, a ball game machine capable of executing an effect of notifying the occurrence of a small hit one or more times between the end of the special game and the start of the normal game.
According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that a large profit can be obtained by suggesting that it is possible to additionally acquire the small hit development big hit in the machine equipped with the small hit development big hit. It can be done, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

The techniques described in the third embodiment and modifications described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 3-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting port.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
Setting change means for changing to any of multiple settings that may have different game advantages,
A storage means for storing the set value set by the setting changing means, and a storage means for storing the set value.
An effect control means capable of executing an advantageous notification effect for notifying the player that a transition to an advantageous state is planned, and
With
In the special game, when the advantageous notification effect is executed before the start of the end demo, the effect control means can execute the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value stored in the storage means in the end demo. However, if the advantageous notification effect has not been executed before the start of the end demo, the ball game machine limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demo.
Until now, setting suggestion effects have not been common in ball pachinko machines. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the end demo of the special game, it is suggested or notified that the setting suggestion effect is scheduled to shift to an advantageous state (for example, a probability fluctuation state or a pending villa). There is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that it is something to do. According to the above-mentioned ball game machine, since the setting suggestion effect is executed on the condition that the advantageous notification effect has already been executed, it becomes easy to prevent the above-mentioned misidentification of the player, and the expectation of the player is impaired. It becomes easier to prevent that.
In addition, "restricting the execution of the setting suggestion effect" includes that the setting suggestion effect is not displayed at all in the effect and the displayability is significantly reduced. Includes canceling the effect lottery result that is the execution of the determined setting suggestion effect. The same applies to other aspects.

[Aspect 3-2]
A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, triggered by a predetermined game operation.
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of indicating that the lottery by the lottery means is possible to shift to the special game.
Setting change means for changing to any of multiple settings that may have different game advantages,
A storage means for storing the set value set by the setting changing means, and a storage means for storing the set value.
An effect control means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value stored in the storage means, and an effect control means.
With
The effect control means stores the plurality of setting suggestion effects and the plurality of priorities in association with each other, and after executing the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first priority, the second priority is lower than the first priority. A gaming machine that limits the execution of setting suggestion effects that correspond to priorities.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game or suppress the decline of the interest of the game according to the correspondence between the type of the setting suggestion effect and the priority. For example, a setting suggestion effect with a narrower range of suggestion setting values may be given a higher priority. In this case, the range of the set value suggested to the player by the setting suggestion effect becomes wider than the range of the set value suggested before that, which impairs the player's expectation (expectation that the set value can be specified). It can be prevented from being lost. Further, a setting suggestion effect with a higher suggestion setting value may be given a higher priority. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being impaired because the set value suggested to the player by the setting suggestion effect is lower than the set value suggested before that.

[Aspect 3-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device for displaying fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and a symbol display device.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by the opening of the grand prize opening, and the special game control means.
Setting change means for changing to any of multiple settings that may have different game advantages,
A storage means for storing the set value set by the setting changing means, and a storage means for storing the set value.
An effect control means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value stored in the storage means, and an effect control means.
With
When the special game ends, the effect control means executes the end demo effect of the special game for the first hour, and when the small hit game ends with the game ball not passing through the specific area, the small hit game ends. The end demo production of the winning game is executed for the second hour, which is shorter than the first hour.
The effect control means can execute the setting suggestion effect in the end demo effect of the special game, but is a ball game machine that limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the end demo effect of the small hit game.
The execution time of the end demo effect of the small hit game is short, and it is difficult to secure the time for the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, by not executing the setting suggestion effect in the end demo of the small hit game, it is possible to avoid the execution of the lottery process and the display process which are practically meaningless.

[Aspect 3-4-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting port.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
Hold control means for holding the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
Production control means to execute production and
When a ball enters the starting port, it is acquired by the entry, regardless of whether or not the variation display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired by the entry is immediately started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the lottery value is a big hit, the pre-judgment means capable of notifying the effect control means of the pre-judgment information indicating that the change corresponding to the entry is a big hit.
Setting change means for changing to any of multiple settings that may have different game advantages,
A storage means for storing the set value set by the setting changing means, and a storage means for storing the set value.
With
The effect control means performs a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game will occur in the future symbol change according to the prior determination information, and a plurality of symbol changes up to the future symbol change. It is feasible over
The suggestion effect is controlled by one of a plurality of types of effect modes, and is designed so that the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game will occur differs depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect.
Of the plurality of symbol fluctuations, the expectation degree suggested by the effect mode of the suggestion effect in the later symbol variation is equal to or higher than the expectation degree suggested by the effect mode of the suggestion effect in the previous symbol variation. Designed
The probability that the suggested effect becomes a specific effect mode differs depending on the set value stored in the storage means.
According to this pachinko / pachislot machine, the player suggests a big hit and suggests a set value by assuming that a specific effect mode in the suggestion effect by hold look-ahead suggests a set value. It can be presented to the player, and the expectation of the player and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

[Aspect 3-4-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting port.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
An effect control means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game will occur in this symbol change, and
Setting change means for changing to any of multiple settings that may have different game advantages,
A storage means for storing the set value set by the setting changing means, and a storage means for storing the set value.
With
The suggestion effect is controlled by one of a plurality of types of effect modes, and is designed so that the degree of expectation of transition to the special game differs depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect.
The probability that the suggested effect becomes a specific effect mode differs depending on the set value stored in the storage means.
According to this ball game machine, it is possible to newly provide a game property in which a setting is estimated according to the appearance frequency of each of a plurality of production modes that can be suggested.

The techniques described in the fourth embodiment and modifications described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 4-1-1]
A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, triggered by a predetermined game operation.
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of indicating that the lottery by the lottery means is possible to shift to the special game.
Setting change means for changing to any of multiple settings that may have different game advantages,
A storage means for storing the set value set by the setting changing means, and a storage means for storing the set value.
When the special game ends in an advantageous period, which is a period in which the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, an effect control means capable of executing a normal effect having a content consistent with the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. When,
With
When the special game ends in the advantageous period, the effect control means stores the effect inconsistent with the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period, instead of the normal effect, with a predetermined probability. A gaming machine that can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value stored in the means.
According to this gaming machine, when the special game ends in the advantageous period, the content is inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period and the content inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period. By making it possible to selectively execute the setting suggestion effect, even if the gaming machine is set to a low setting, a normal effect having the same content as when the setting is high can be executed, which can lead to promotion of motivation for playing. it can.

[Aspect 4-1-2]
The probability that the effect control means executes a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests a set value stored in the storage means may differ depending on the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to 1-1.
According to this gaming machine, the fun of the game in the advantageous period can be further enhanced by changing the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. Further, for example, when the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value is increased as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases, the set value is correctly suggested as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period. It is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect.

[Aspect 4-1-3]
A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, triggered by a predetermined game operation.
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of indicating that the lottery by the lottery means is possible to shift to the special game.
Setting change means for changing to any of multiple settings that may have different game advantages,
A storage means for storing the set value set by the setting changing means, and a storage means for storing the set value.
When the special game ends in an advantageous period, which is a period in which the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, an effect control means capable of executing a normal effect having a content consistent with the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. When,
With
The effect control means further executes an effect inconsistent with the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period as a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value stored in the storage means, instead of the normal effect. It is possible and
When the special game in the advantageous period ends, either the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect can be executed with a predetermined probability, and either the normal effect or the setting suggestion effect is executed. The gaming machine, characterized in that, the probability of selectively executing the setting suggestion effect is increased according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period.
According to this gaming machine, when the special game ends in the advantageous period, the special game is acquired in the advantageous period by increasing the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. It is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect as a privilege to.

[Aspect 4-2-1]
A lottery means for executing a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, triggered by a predetermined game operation.
A special game control means for executing the special game when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of indicating that the lottery by the lottery means is possible to shift to the special game.
Setting change means for changing to any of multiple settings that may have different game advantages,
A storage means for storing the set value set by the setting changing means, and a storage means for storing the set value.
When the advantageous period, which is the period during which the gaming state advantageous to the player continues, ends, the effect control means capable of executing the normal effect having the content consistent with the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period, and the effect control means.
With
When the advantageous period ends, the effect control means stores in the storage means an effect that is inconsistent with the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period, instead of the normal effect, with a predetermined probability. A gaming machine that can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value.
According to this gaming machine, when the advantageous period ends, a normal effect that matches the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period and a setting suggestion effect that matches the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period are set. By making it possible to selectively execute and, even if the gaming machine is set to a low setting, it is possible to execute a normal effect having the same contents as when the setting is high, which can lead to promotion of motivation for playing.

[Aspect 4-2-2]
The probability that the effect control means executes a setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests a set value stored in the storage means may differ depending on the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to 2-1.
According to this gaming machine, the fun of the game in the advantageous period can be further enhanced by changing the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value according to the number of times the special game is executed in the advantageous period. Further, for example, when the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect that correctly suggests the set value is increased as the number of executions of the special game in the advantageous period increases, the set value is correctly suggested as a privilege for continuing the advantageous period. It is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect.

[Aspect 5-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game, which is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
The gaming state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game includes a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering the second starting port is higher than that of the normal state. When the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the easy-to-enter state, and
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The effect determining means displays a special effect having a continuous content over one or more symbol fluctuations for a predetermined period including the easy entry state.
The effect determining means displays a first object and a second object for urging the launch of a game ball aimed at the second starting port in the easy-to-enter state.
The size of the second object is larger than the size of the first object,
The contents of the first object do not change regardless of the number of reserved numbers of the second lottery value.
The second object is a ball-and-ball gaming machine, characterized in that the presence or absence of display of content suggesting the number of holdings is switched according to the number of holdings of the second lottery value.
According to this ball game machine, the first object does not change the content that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the second starting port while the ball is easy to enter, so that the player can be given the optimum launch direction of the game ball. You can continue to present. On the other hand, the second object, which is larger in size than the first object and easily attracts the attention of the player, is displayed during the special production by switching the display / non-display of the content suggesting the number of holds according to the number of holds in the second lottery value. It is difficult to understand that the symbol change is executed one or more times, and the special effect can be presented more effectively.

[Aspect 5-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When a game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the small winning opening, it is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the opening of the large winning opening is opened. A special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of accompanying unit games,
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
When a ball enters the second starting port, it is acquired with the entry as an opportunity regardless of whether or not the variation display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the entry is immediately started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second lottery value is a hit, the advance judgment information indicating that the change corresponding to the entry is a hit can be notified to the effect determining means in advance. Judgment means and
With
When the pre-determination information indicates that the lottery value to be a small hit is reserved, the effect determining means is advantageous before the variation display of the symbol based on the lottery value to be a small hit is started. A predetermined effect suggesting a transition to a favorable state is displayed, and while a variation display of a symbol based on a lottery value held prior to the lottery value to be a small hit is made, a predetermined transition to the advantageous state is displayed. A ball game machine characterized by continuing to display the objects of.
According to this pachinko / pachislot machine, after displaying an effect suggesting a small hit in the hold (transition to an advantageous state) by so-called look-ahead, the fluctuation stop of the out-of-hold hold until the hold that becomes the small hit is reached ( It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is no small hit by the off display).

[Aspect 5-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting port.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game, which is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect determining means shifts to a state in which a special effect can be displayed.
The special effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of types of individual effects in a predetermined order over a plurality of symbol fluctuations.
When the final individual effect of the special effect is displayed, the effect determining means does not display the special effect until the predetermined condition is satisfied again, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied again, the special effect is determined. A ball-and-ball game machine characterized in that it shifts to a displayable state again.
According to this ball game machine, it is possible to realize a control that shows a special effect only once when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, frequent occurrence of game machine information (explanation of tie-up works, etc.) and character introductions that are not related to the jackpot expectation as special effects may make the player feel annoyed. According to the present invention, it is possible to show such an effect that has nothing to do with the jackpot expectation degree only once when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Aspect 5-4]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting port.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game, which is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the effect determining means shifts to a state in which a special effect performed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations can be displayed.
The effect determining means is characterized in that, after shifting to a state in which the special effect can be displayed, at least a part of the other effects is not displayed until a predetermined end condition of the special effect is satisfied. Ball game machine.
According to this ball-and-ball gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to intensively present a special effect over a plurality of symbol fluctuations to the player. The special production may be, for example, game machine information (explanation of the work to be tied up, etc.) or character introduction, and by presenting it without a pause, it becomes easier for the player to deepen the understanding and enhance the interest of the game. it can.

[Aspect 5-5-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A first winning / failing determination means for executing a first winning / failing determination based on a first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port.
A first display control means for varyingly displaying a first special symbol indicating the result of the first hit / fail determination, and
A second display control means for varyingly displaying a second special symbol indicating the result of the second hit / fail determination, and
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the result of the first hit / fail determination is a hit, and when the second special symbol is the result of the second hit / fail determination. When stopped and displayed in a mode indicating that it is a hit, a special game control means for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and a special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for displaying the variation effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the effect display device.
With
When the second lottery value is held by the hold control means, the first display control means reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hit / fail determination, while the second display control means. Starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing determination regardless of whether or not the first lottery value is held by the holding control means.
A special effect period in which a special effect is displayed as a variable effect for holding the second lottery value is set.
In the effect determining means, when the reserved number of the second lottery value is a predetermined value at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the special effect period, the reserved number of the second lottery value is the predetermined value. A ball-and-ball gaming machine characterized in that the effect pattern of the special effect is determined by using an effect pattern determination standard different from that in the case where the case is not.
According to this ball game machine, it is possible to display an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern by a specific fluctuation in a period (special effect period) in which a special effect is executed. For example, in the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is started when the number of reserved pieces of the second lottery value is 0 in the special effect period, the effect according to the predetermined effect pattern is displayed. Can be done.
[Aspect 5-5-2]
Further equipped with specific game control means,
The second starting port has a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the ball entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
The specific game control means has a normal state and a ball entering state in which the ease of entering the second starting port is higher than that of the normal state, as a gaming state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game. When the player has an easy state and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game is shifted to the easy ball entry state.
The ball gaming machine according to aspect 5-5-1, wherein the special effect period is a predetermined gaming period in the normal state.
According to this aspect, it is possible to display an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern with a specific variation in a normal state in which the ball is not easily entered. This makes it easier to enhance the interest of the game even in the normal state.

[Aspect 5-6]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A first winning / failing determination means for executing a first winning / failing determination based on a first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port.
A first display control means for varyingly displaying a first special symbol indicating the result of the first hit / fail determination, and
A second display control means for varyingly displaying a second special symbol indicating the result of the second hit / fail determination, and
Hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the result of the first hit / fail determination is a hit, and when the second special symbol is the result of the second hit / fail determination. When stopped and displayed in a mode indicating that it is a hit, a special game control means for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and a special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for displaying the variation effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the effect display device.
With
When the second lottery value is held by the hold control means, the first display control means reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hit / fail determination, while the second display control means. Starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing determination regardless of whether or not the first lottery value is held by the holding control means.
A special effect period in which a special effect is displayed as a variable effect for holding the second lottery value is set.
The effect determining means is said to be the first when the number of reserved numbers of the second lottery value is a predetermined value and a predetermined permission condition is satisfied at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the special effect period. (2) A ball-and-ball gaming machine characterized in that the effect pattern of the special effect is determined by using an effect pattern determination criterion different from the case where the number of reserved lottery values is not the predetermined value.
According to this ball game machine, it is possible to display an effect according to a predetermined effect pattern with a specific variation in a period (special effect period) in which a special effect is executed. Further, by determining whether or not the permission condition is satisfied, it is possible to display the effect according to the predetermined effect pattern at the timing intended by the designer even in an irregular situation.

[Aspect 6-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game, which is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The gaming state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the starting port in the normal game includes a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering the ball into the starting port is higher than that of the normal state.
The effect determining means displays an object suggesting the number of reserved numbers of the second lottery value in the easy-to-enter state.
As an initial display mode of the object, the effect determining means displays the object in a predetermined mode regardless of the actual number of reserved values of the second lottery value, and the object is displayed in the predetermined mode from the state where the object is displayed. A ball game machine characterized in that when a predetermined number of balls are inserted into a second starting port, the object is displayed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode.
If an object suggesting the number of reserved numbers of the second lottery value is displayed in a manner corresponding to the actual number of reserved numbers of the second lottery value at the time of initial display, the player is allowed to enter more balls into the second starting port. Sometimes it's hard to tell what to do. According to the configuration of this ball game machine, by setting the initial display mode of the object to a predetermined mode regardless of the actual number of held objects, the number of held numbers of the second lottery value is set so as not to cause a disadvantage to the player. It will be easier to store up to the upper limit. Further, even if the reserved number of the second lottery value has reached the upper limit, the total number of outs can be increased and the base of the gaming machine can be lowered by prompting the launch of the gaming ball.

[Aspect 6-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
The variation pattern of the first special symbol for showing the result is determined according to the result of the winning / failing judgment based on the first lottery value, and the result is determined according to the result of the winning / failing judgment based on the second lottery value. A variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol for showing, and
A symbol display device in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed according to the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, a special game for executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game is executed. Control means and
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The gaming state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the starting port in the normal game includes a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering the ball into the starting port is higher than that of the normal state.
The easy-to-enter state is defined as an end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and an end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and ends when any of the end conditions is satisfied. To do
The fluctuation pattern determining means is a standard for determining a fluctuation pattern for executing a special effect in the easy-to-enter state, and refers to the special standard which is a standard for limiting the number of references. The special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol are determined, and
A ball game machine characterized in that the number of references of the special reference is subtracted according to the fluctuation of the second special symbol, but is not subtracted according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol.
According to this ball game machine, the special standard can be changed only by the change of the second special symbol in the easy-to-enter state. As a result, even if the first special symbol is changed unintentionally by the designer and the player (for example, the player leaves the seat with the hold of the first lottery value remaining at the end of the big hit, and the ball is easily entered. Even in the situation where the first special symbol is changed), it is possible to control so that the special effect does not proceed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Aspect 6-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting port.
Hold control means for holding the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game, which is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
When a ball enters the starting port, it is acquired by the entry, regardless of whether or not the variation display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired by the entry is immediately started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the lottery value is a hit, the pre-judgment means capable of notifying the effect determination means of the pre-judgment information indicating that the change corresponding to the entry is a hit.
With
The gaming state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the starting port in the normal game includes a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering the ball into the starting port is higher than that of the normal state.
The effect determining means displays an object indicating the degree of expectation that a hit exists in the reserved lottery value according to the preliminary determination information.
The effect determining means changes the mode of the object so as to show a higher degree of expectation as the number of balls entering the starting port in the easy-to-enter state increases according to a predetermined standard. Is possible,
The reference includes a provision that the mode of the object can be changed when the number of balls entered into the starting port exceeds the maximum number expected by design in the easy entry state. A ball game machine featuring.
According to this ball game machine, when the number of over-winning points to the starting port exceeds the maximum number expected by design due to the clogging of the game balls in the game area (so-called grapes), etc., the object By using a standard that can change, it is possible to realize an effect that is normally difficult to see. In addition, even when an unexpected situation (for example, grapes) that is not desirable for the player occurs, the effect that is normally difficult to see may be seen, so that the stress and dissatisfaction of the player can be reduced.

[Aspect 6-4]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting port.
Hold control means for holding the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game, which is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
When a ball enters the starting port, it is acquired by the entry, regardless of whether or not the variation display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired by the entry is immediately started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the lottery value is a hit, the pre-judgment means capable of notifying the effect determination means of the pre-judgment information indicating that the change corresponding to the entry is a hit.
With
The gaming state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the starting port in the normal game includes a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering the ball into the starting port is higher than that of the normal state.
The effect determining means displays an object indicating the degree of expectation that a hit exists in the reserved lottery value according to the preliminary determination information.
The effect determining means changes the mode of the object so as to show a higher degree of expectation as the number of balls entering the starting port in the easy-to-enter state increases according to a predetermined standard. Is possible,
When the opening / closing time of the ball entry fluctuation mechanism in the easy entry state is N, the number of balls that can be launched in N time is M, and the opening ratio of the entry variation mechanism in the easy entry state is O. The standard stipulates that the mode of the object can be changed when the number of balls entered with respect to the starting port exceeds (M × O − the predetermined number) in the easy-to-enter state. A ball game machine characterized by including.
According to this ball game machine, when the number of over-winning points to the starting port exceeds the maximum number expected by design due to the clogging of the game balls in the game area (so-called grapes), etc., the object By using a standard that can change, it is possible to realize an effect that is normally difficult to see. In addition, even when an unexpected situation (for example, grapes) that is not desirable for the player occurs, the effect that is normally difficult to see may be seen, so that the stress and dissatisfaction of the player can be reduced.

[Aspect 6-5]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting port.
Hold control means for holding the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game, which is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
When a ball enters the starting port, it is acquired by the entry, regardless of whether or not the variation display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired by the entry is immediately started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the lottery value is a hit, the pre-judgment means capable of notifying the effect determination means of the pre-judgment information indicating that the change corresponding to the entry is a hit.
With
The effect determining means causes the effect display device to display a held image corresponding to the held lottery value.
The effect determining means can execute the first hold change effect and the second hold change effect for the hold image corresponding to the certain lottery value according to the preliminary determination information regarding the hold certain lottery value.
In the first hold change effect, before the start of the symbol change based on the certain lottery value, the hold image corresponding to the certain lottery value is displayed in a mode of the first stage different from the usual, and after the start of the symbol change, It is an effect that changes the reserved image to a second stage mode that is different from the usual one.
The second pending change effect is an effect that can be executed both before the start of the symbol change and after the start of the symbol change based on the certain lottery value, and corresponds to the certain lottery value in a manner completed once. It is a production that changes the reserved image,
It is possible to execute the second hold change effect on the hold image even after the hold image corresponding to the certain lottery value is changed to the second stage mode by the first hold change effect. A featured ball game machine.
According to this ball game machine, even after one hold change effect is performed, the player's expectation that another hold change effect is performed can be continued, and the interest of the effect can be further enhanced.

[Aspect 6-6]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting port.
Hold control means for holding the lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game, which is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
When a ball enters the starting port, it is acquired by the entry, regardless of whether or not the variation display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired by the entry is immediately started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the lottery value is a hit, the pre-judgment means capable of notifying the effect determination means of the pre-judgment information indicating that the change corresponding to the entry is a hit.
With
The effect determining means causes the effect display device to display a held image corresponding to the held lottery value.
The effect determining means can execute the first hold change effect and the second hold change effect for the hold image corresponding to the certain lottery value according to the preliminary determination information regarding the hold certain lottery value.
In the first hold change effect, before the start of the symbol change based on the certain lottery value, the hold image corresponding to the certain lottery value is displayed in a mode of the first stage different from the usual, and after the start of the symbol change, It is an effect that changes the reserved image to a second stage mode that is different from the usual one.
The second pending change effect is an effect that can be executed both before the start of the symbol change and after the start of the symbol change based on the certain lottery value, and corresponds to the certain lottery value in a manner completed once. It is a production that changes the reserved image,
After the second hold change effect is executed for the hold image corresponding to the certain lottery value, the first hold change effect for the hold image is not executed, while the second hold image for the hold image is the second. 2 Hold change production is feasible,
After the reserved image is changed to the first stage mode by executing the first hold change effect for the held image corresponding to the certain lottery value, and before the held image is changed to the second stage mode, the holding image is described. While the second hold change effect is not executed, after the hold image becomes the second stage mode by executing the first hold change effect for the hold image corresponding to the certain lottery value, the hold image is subjected to. A bullet game machine characterized in that the second hold change effect can be executed.
According to this ball game machine, even after one hold change effect is performed, the player's expectation that another hold change effect is performed can be continued, and the interest of the effect can be further enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing confusion for the player due to a discrepancy in the transition of changes in the reserved image.

11 1st start port, 12 2nd start port, 60 effect display device, 20 big prize opening, 221 1st hit / fail judgment means, 222 2nd hit / fail judgment means, 240 hold control means, 260 special game control means, 265 small hits Game control means, 270 specific game control means, 303 effect determination means, 304 effect control means, 500 pachinko game machine.

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A symbol display device in which the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variablely displayed, and
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit is stopped and displayed, the special game control means for executing the special game, which is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the special game control means.
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The gaming state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the starting port in the normal game includes a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering the ball into the starting port is higher than that of the normal state.
The effect determining means displays an object suggesting the number of reserved numbers of the second lottery value in the easy-to-enter state.
As an initial display mode of the object, the effect determining means displays the object in a predetermined mode regardless of the actual number of reserved values of the second lottery value, and the object is displayed in the predetermined mode from the state where the object is displayed. A ball game machine characterized in that when a predetermined number of balls are inserted into a second starting port, the object is displayed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode.

Images